JP2020068978A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: In a situation in which balls do not enter a V winning hole 74a at a stage of start winning regardless of whether a jackpot in which a V winning device 72 is opened is won, a phase of opening/closing timing of the V winning hole 74a is shifted at timing when the V winning device 72 is opened by setting a reserved ball number of special patterns is set to be in a situation in which a variation shortening function is operated until before the jackpot is started, thus creating a situation in which balls can enter the V winning hole 74a.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 18

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is shot toward a game area provided in a game board, and the game ball enters a ball entrance provided in the game area. Based on the winning or failing lottery, if the winning or losing lottery is won in an advantageous state such as winning, the normally closed variable entrance means is opened so that a predetermined game value is given to the player. (For example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2017-148264, A

  However, with the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, a launching means for launching a game ball, a ball entry means into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter, and a game in the ball entry means. By using the information acquisition means for acquiring the predetermined information due to the ball entered, the determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the determination result by the determination means, Dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of identification information performed on the display means, and the predetermined information by the information acquiring means when the dynamic display is being executed on the display means by the dynamic display executing means When the information is acquired, when the predetermined number is set as an upper limit, the storage unit that stores the predetermined information and the number of the predetermined information stored in the storage unit are a predetermined first predetermined value, One place Selection changing means for easily selecting a second execution time different from the first execution time of the dynamic display that is easily selected when the value is less than a value, a first state in which a game ball is difficult or unenterable, and a game ball And a variable ball entering means that can be changed to a second state in which the variable ball entering can be entered, and when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display, the variable ball entering means is set to an advantageous state that can be in the second state. Advantageous state means, and, in the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, a special area in which the game ball can pass, a passable state in which the game ball can pass through the special area, and the game ball passes Passage switching means for switching to a difficult passage state or a difficult passage state, and a second advantageous state means capable of generating a second advantageous state advantageous to the player when the game ball passes through the special area, Equipped with the selection change hand When the second execution time of the dynamic display is selected by, the passing result of the game ball to the special area changes compared to when the first execution time of the dynamic display is selected. .

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the passage switching means does not link the passable state and the passage difficult state of the special area with the execution of the dynamic display. Switching is performed in a fixed period, and the fixed period is the same as the difference between the first execution time and the second execution time.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the gaming machine has the special area, a third state in which a game ball is hard to enter or cannot enter, and a game ball can enter. By using the second variable ball entrance means that can be changed to the fourth state and the judgment result by the judgment means, the second variable ball entrance means that can bring the second variable ball entrance means into the fourth state in the advantageous state. Entry state changing means, remaining time of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display executing means, execution time of the dynamic display based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and the advantageous state In the first state time until the second variable ball entering means reaches the fourth state, the remaining time counted by the time counting means, the execution time, and the first time. When the state time elapses, Another area is provided with a passage determination means for determining whether a said passable state, and passes the determination result informing means for informing the determination result of said passing judgment means.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, a launching means for launching the game ball, a ball entering means into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter, and a game ball entering the ball entering means. It is performed in the display unit by using the information acquisition unit that acquires the predetermined information due to the above, the determination unit that determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition unit, and the determination result by the determination unit. Dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of identification information, and the predetermined information is acquired by the information acquiring means when the dynamic display is being executed in the display means by the dynamic display executing means. At this time, when the number of the predetermined information stored in the storage unit and the number of the predetermined information stored in the storage unit is a predetermined first predetermined value with a predetermined number as an upper limit, One day Selection changing means for easily selecting a second execution time different from the first execution time of the dynamic display, which is easy to be selected, a first state in which a game ball is difficult or impossible to enter, and a second in which a game ball is enterable A variable ball entering means that can be changed to a state, and an advantageous state means that brings the variable ball entering means into an advantageous state that can be in the second state when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display. It is provided with, in the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, a special area through which the game ball can pass, a special state through which the game ball can pass, and a special state where the game ball cannot pass or cannot pass And a second advantageous state means capable of generating a second advantageous state advantageous to the player when the game ball passes through the special area, and the selective change. By means of said dynamic If shows the second execution time is selected than when the first execution time of said dynamic display is selected, passing the result of the game balls to the special region changes. As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effect is achieved. That is, the passage switching means switches the passable state and the passage difficult state of the special area at a fixed period that is not linked to the execution of the dynamic display, and the fixed period is the first execution time. It is the same as the difference from the second execution time. As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second variable ball entering means which has the special area and can be changed to the third state in which the game ball is hard to enter or cannot enter, and the fourth state in which the game ball can enter, and the judging means. By using the determination result, in the advantageous state, the second variable ball entering state changing means that can bring the second variable ball entering means into the fourth state, and the dynamic state being executed by the dynamic display executing means. The remaining time of display, the execution time of the dynamic display based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and the first state until the second variable ball entering means is in the fourth state in the advantageous state. Time counting means for counting time, and whether the special area is in the passable state when the remaining time counted by the time counting means, the execution time, and the first state time have elapsed. Pass judgment to determine And includes a means, and a passage determination result informing means for informing the determination result of said passing judgment means. As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the V winning device in front view, (b) is a diagram showing the behavior of a sphere that is distributed to the left path by the distribution device of the V winning device, (c) ) Is a diagram showing the behavior of the spheres sorted to the right path by the sorting device of the V winning device. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine, and is a block diagram which mainly shows a main controller and an electric constitution. It is a figure showing typically composition of various counters, each reservation sphere storage area, and reservation sphere execution area. It is the figure which showed an example of the jackpot random number table typically. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of the special jackpot type jackpot type table, and (b) is the figure which showed an example of the special figure 2 jackpot type table typically. It is the figure which showed an example of the reservation number table typically. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of A table of a stop pattern table, (b) is the figure which showed typically an example of B table of a stop pattern table. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of C table of a stop pattern table, (b) is the figure which showed typically an example of D table of a stop pattern table. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table for losses. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table for big hits. It is the figure which shows one example of the production time for every fluctuation element of fluctuation production. It is a timing chart showing whether or not a ball is detected by the V winning opening switch at two timings of "timing A" and "timing B" in the case of "7 round V opening jackpot". It is a timing chart which showed the situation where the big hit state occurred, without shortening the change time of the change effect, when "7 round V open big hit" occurred. It is the timing chart which showed the situation where the variation time of this variation effect was shortened and the jackpot state occurred when "7 round V open jackpot" occurred. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of the random number table per universal figure, (b) is the figure which showed typically an example of the universal figure fluctuation time table, (c) is normal. It is the figure which showed an example of the electric power combination control table typically. It is a block diagram mainly showing an electric configuration of a voice lamp control device. It is the figure which showed an example of the V winning suggestion table typically. It is the figure which showed an example of the reservation change table typically. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the 1st reservation information storage area, the 2nd reservation information storage area, and the execution information storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows V drive processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special figure change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows a winning device opening and closing control processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart which shows processing during V winning device opening which is performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows processing during opening of a variable winning device performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot termination processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the starting-up process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the pre-reading setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which shows the V winning chance production setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit command processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which shows the fluctuation production processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which shows the big hit production processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a counter subtraction process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the figure which shows the transition from the "V winning chance production" which is done with the 3rd design indicator to the first round of the big hit without the occurrence of new starting winning, (a), "V winning chance production Is a diagram showing a state immediately after the start, (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the left symbol row is stopped from the state of (a), (c) is the state of (b) Is a diagram showing a state in which the variation effect 1 has been digested and the next variation effect that has been held is started, and (d) shows that the “V winning chance effect” has ended from the state in (c). It is a figure showing a state, (e) is a figure showing a state in which a variable effect that is a cause of occurrence of the "V winning chance effect" has been started from the state of (d), and (f) is a figure It is the figure which showed the state where the jackpot pattern appeared from the state of (e), and (g) is the V input from the state of (f). It is the figure which showed the state which has shown that the prize device is opened, (h) shows the state where (g) the ball cannot be won in the V winning a prize mouth “V non acquisition It is the figure which showed the state where "report effect" is performed. It is the figure which shows the transition from the "V winning chance production" which is done with the 3rd design indicator to the 1st round of the big hit after the new starting winning occurs, (a), "V winning chance production Is a diagram showing a state immediately after the start, (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the left symbol row is stopped from the state of (a), (c) is the state of (b) Is a diagram showing a state in which the variation effect 1 has been digested and the next variation effect that has been held is started, and (d) shows that the “V winning chance effect” has ended from the state in (c). It is a figure showing a state, (e) is a figure showing a state in which a variable effect that is a cause of occurrence of the "V winning chance effect" has been started from the state of (d), and (f) is a figure It is the figure which showed the state where the jackpot pattern appeared from the state of (e), (g) is V from the state of (f). It is a figure showing a state suggesting that the winning device is opened, and (h) is a "V acquisition notification effect" showing that a ball has been won in the V winning opening from the state of (g). It is a figure showing the state where is executed. It is the flowchart which shows the V winning chance production setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 2nd execution form. It is the figure which showed the transition to the 1st round of the jackpot from "V winning opportunity production" performed by the 3rd symbol display device in a 2nd embodiment, without generating a new starting winning, and (a). , Is a diagram showing a state immediately after the "V winning chance production" is started, (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the left symbol row is stopped from the state of (a), (c) is , (B) is a diagram showing a state where one variation effect has been digested from the state and the next pending variation effect has been started, and (d) is a state where "V winning It is a figure showing the state where "Chance production" was ended, and (e) is a figure showing the state where the variation production which became the generation factor of "V winning chance production" was started from the state of (d). , (F) is a diagram showing a state in which a jackpot pattern has appeared from the state of (e), and (g) is a diagram. , (F) is a diagram showing a state in which the V winning device is suggested to be opened, and (h) is a state in which a ball is won in the V winning opening from the state of (g). It is a figure showing the state where "V acquisition production" which shows is being performed. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the 1st hold information storage area, the 2nd hold information storage area, and the execution information storage area in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable time management process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pre-reading setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 3rd execution form. It is the flowchart which shows the V winning chance production setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 3rd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation production process which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 3rd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the update process at the time of shortening performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the transition from the "V winning opportunity production" performed by the 3rd symbol display device in a 3rd embodiment to the first round of the jackpot after a new starting winning occurs, and (a) is It is a figure showing the state immediately after "V winning opportunity production" is started, and (b) is a "V drive suggestion display" and "variable time integration display" in "V winning opportunity production" from the state of (a). Is a diagram showing a state where "is displayed", and (c) shows a new start winning from the state of (b), and "additional display" is made to "remaining time display". It is a figure showing the state just before, (d) is a figure showing the state where "additional display" was applied to "remaining time display" from the state of (c), and (e) is (d). From the state of “), the“ V winning chance production ”continues, and“ V drive suggestion display ”and“ variable time product ” Is a diagram showing a state in which "calculation display" is displayed and "fire continuation suggestion" is displayed, and (f) is a state in which "fire stop suggestion" is displayed from the state of (e). It is a diagram showing a state, (g) is a diagram showing a state suggesting that the V winning device is opened from the state of (f), (h) is a state of (g) It is a diagram showing a state in which "V acquisition notification effect" indicating that a ball has been won from the V winning opening.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 47, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinge 18 serves as an opening / closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 3) having a large number of nails and winning openings (ball entrances) 63, 64, 65a, 71, 74a, etc. is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached. The details of the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided serves as an opening / closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the rear surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and the upper surface opened, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

  The frame button 22 is, for example, a button pressed by the player when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later. Further, the frame button 22 is an operation button for allowing the player to select the effect contents on the notice display executed in the variable display of the third symbol (hereinafter, the variable display of the third symbol is referred to as “variable effect”). Also used as.

  Further, the variation effect is an effect displayed on a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later, and as described later, the ball shot in the front area of the game board 13 has a specific winning opening ( For example, the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later, is executed as an opportunity to win the prize, and after the symbol (the third symbol, which will be described later) has been changed for a predetermined time, it is displayed as a stop. By the combination of the symbols, it is an effect of presenting the result (whether or not it is a big hit) of the lottery to the prize, to the player.

  Further, the stage is a production mode in which various productions displayed on a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later are made uniform, and in the pachinko machine 10, the “town stage” and the “empty stage” are used. There are three stages, "stage" and "island stage". The above-described variation effects and various effects such as "reach display" executed during the variation effects are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage.

  In addition, the "reach display" means a display one step before the "big hit display" indicating that a big hit occurs in the variable effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later. .. Specifically, the third symbol of the left symbol column Z1 and the right symbol column Z3 (see FIG. 5), which will be described later, stop at the same symbol, and the middle symbol column Z2 (see FIG. 5) continues to vary without stopping. The state of being.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the "reach display" is roughly divided into one unit element that constitutes the effect of "normal reach" (hereinafter, one unit element that constitutes the effect is referred to as "variable element"), Developed and executed from the variable element of the "normal reach", and developed from the variable element of "super reach" having a higher jackpot expectation than the variable element of the "normal reach" and the variable element of "normal reach", There are variables for "Special Reach" that have higher jackpot expectations than variables for "Super Reach".

  The change of the stage is performed during a period in which the fluctuating effect is not performed (that is, during the demo display) or in the fluctuating element of "high-speed fluctuating" in which the third symbol is fluctuated at high speed in the fluctuating effect invisible to the player, This is performed when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player. Then, every time the frame button 22 is operated, the order is repeatedly changed in the order of “town stage” → “empty stage” → “island stage” → “town stage” → ... Immediately after the power is turned on, the "town stage" is set as the initial stage.

  Further, when the "normal reach" variation element is started in the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later, the "normal reach" variation element to the "super reach" variation element or When the variable element of “special reach” is developed, the selection screen of the variable element of “super reach” or the variable element of “special reach” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variable element of “normal reach”. It may be configured as follows.

  Specifically, on the selection screen, a plurality of candidates that can be selected as the variable elements of “super reach” or the variable elements of “special reach” are displayed, and the frame button 22 is displayed while the selection screen is displayed. It is configured such that the selected candidate is changed when the player performs a pressing operation. Then, based on the production candidate selected when the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is selected, the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is determined. According to the determination, the variable element of “super reach” is executed by the variable element of “special reach” on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, in the first embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button that is pressed down, but instead of the frame button 22, the player moves in a predetermined direction with respect to the pachinko machine 10 (for example, with respect to the pachinko machine 10, It may be configured by an operation lever that can be tilted forward, backward, rightward, and leftward. Then, based on the direction in which the operation lever is tilted, the effect stage may be selectively changed, or the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" may be determined.

  Further, although the frame button 22 is arranged on the front side of the upper plate 17 in a side view, the frame button 22 may be arranged at any position as long as it can be depressed by the player. Well, for example, it may be arranged on the upper surface side of the upper plate 17, or may be arranged near the lower plate 50 (upper surface or side surface) described later.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined "reach display", and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided the light-emitting portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as a light emitting diode (Light Emitting Diode; hereinafter abbreviated as "LED"). ..

  In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when the jackpot or the “reach display” is performed, each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is turned on or off by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Lights up or flashes to notify that the jackpot is in the midst of jackpot, or that the “reach display” one step before the jackpot is in progress. A display lamp 34, which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of displaying during payout of an award ball and when an error occurs, is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 3). ), Etc., is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene, hereinafter referred to as “ABS”) is chromium-plated in the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33. A resin plated member 36 is attached.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit, not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount as a number as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit.

  It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to share a pachinko machine using a card unit with a cash machine.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6). Of the touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 by changing the electric resistance. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting is built in.

  When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thus the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, and The sphere spontaneously falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") placed below the lower plate 50 for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 2, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has a micro-processing unit (hereinafter referred to as “MPU”) as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, and various lottery A random number generator used in the above, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to extend over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and when the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or when the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, the tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and the downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls is paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as the ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, a specific configuration of the game board 13 and a detailed configuration of the V winning device 72 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. First, as shown in FIG. 3, in the game board 13, a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and balls are won on a wooden base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. With a general winning opening 63 that can obtain a predetermined prize ball, a variable winning device 65 that is opened when a jackpot of the third symbol occurs, a V winning device 72 that can be opened in a jackpot of some of the third symbols, The first starting opening 64 and the second starting opening 71 which become the lottery trigger of the third symbol, the through gate 67 which becomes the lottery trigger of the second symbol, and the ball can enter the second starting mouth 71 by being opened. The normal electric power combination 71a, the variable display device unit 80 having the third symbol display device 81, the second symbol display device 83 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12.

  The general winning opening 63, the first starting opening 64, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the second starting opening 71, the normal electric role 71a, the V winning device 72, and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the formed through hole and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and a shot ball is formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70. It is the area that flows down.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 3) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 3), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the central portion (hereinafter, the act of firing a ball with the momentum that hits the return rubber 69 and passing the ball through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in front view is referred to as “right hitting”). , The act of letting a shot ball pass through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front is referred to as “left hitting”. In the first embodiment, in the left-handed game, the ball can enter the first starting port 64, while the ball enters the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the second starting port 71 and the V winning device 72. It is hard to do. Also, in the right-handed game, while the ball can enter the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the second starting port 71 and the V winning device 72, it is difficult for the ball to enter the first starting port 64. It is configured.

  In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by forming an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  A first symbol display device 37 (hereinafter referred to as a first symbol display device 37 provided with a first LED group 37a and a second LED group 37b configured by a plurality of LEDs that are light emitting means is provided on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (the upper right side in FIG. 3). Regarding the first symbol display device 37, a "special symbol display device 37" may be referred to) for convenience of description. The special symbol display device 37, each variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to each control performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 6) described later (hereinafter, the variable display of both special symbols is " "Dynamic display") is performed and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

  The first LED group 37a displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) for which variable display has not been executed, among the balls that have won (balled) in the first starting opening 64 or the second starting opening 71 described later. This is indicated by the lighting state. The number of jackpots (hereinafter, the round may be simply referred to as “R”) and an error display are also indicated by the lighting state of the first LED group 37a corresponding to the state. The first LED group 37a is configured such that the respective LEDs have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emission colors suggests various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. be able to.

  The “round” in the jackpot is a big winning opening / closing plate 65b that opens and closes a big winning opening 65a of a variable winning device 65 or a V that opens and closes the V winning device 72 in order to divide the number of prize balls of the big hit. It means that the prize winning device opening / closing plate 72a is opened and then closed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, "30 seconds" has elapsed from when the special winning opening 65a was opened, or 10 balls are won while the special winning opening 65a is opened, or "5 seconds" have passed since the V winning device 72 was opened, or 10 balls were opened while the V winning device 72 was opened. One "round" is executed by winning the prize.

  The second LED group 37b is composed of a total of 12 LEDs including an upper LED group 37b1 composed of 6 LEDs and a lower LED group 37b2 also composed of 6 LEDs. The upper LED group 37b1 is dynamically displayed with the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game executed based on the entry of the ball into the first starting opening 64. Further, the lower LED group 37b2, the second special symbol showing the determination result of the second lottery game executed based on the ball entering the second starting port 71 is dynamically displayed.

  Specifically, the upper LED group 37b1 is dynamically operated until the variation time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning of the first starting opening 64 provided in the center of the board surface of the game board 13 elapses. After the display (in the first embodiment, the lower LED is sequentially lit one by one from the uppermost LED of the upper LED group 37b1 and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), a design showing the determination result (the first embodiment Then, depending on the combination of the respective lighting patterns of the six LEDs, one of 64 kinds of stop symbols in total) is displayed.

  Further, the lower LED group 37b2 is dynamically displayed until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning of the second start opening 71 provided on the right side of the game board 13 has elapsed ( In the first embodiment, the lower LEDs are sequentially lit one by one from the uppermost LED of the lower LED group 37b2, and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), and then a pattern showing the determination result (in the first embodiment, Any of a total of 64 types of stop symbols) is displayed in combination depending on the combination of the respective lighting patterns of the six LEDs.

  In any of the LED groups 37b1 and 37b2, when the determination result is a loss, only the leftmost LED is lit and displayed, and when the determination result is a jackpot, it corresponds to the type (type) of the jackpot. Each LED group is lit and displayed in a lighting pattern. Details of the stop pattern of each LED group will be described later.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the winning / non-judgment determination (big hit lottery) of whether or not the ball enters the first starting opening 64 or the second starting opening 71 is performed. The jackpot type is also determined according to the winning opening 64, 71.

  The jackpot types determined in the first embodiment are “15 round V open jackpot”, “7 round V open jackpot”, and “7 round V closed jackpot” based on the winning of the first starting opening 64. Are prepared (see FIG. 9A). Further, based on the winning of the second starting opening 71, "15 round V open jackpot" and "15 round V closed jackpot" are prepared (see FIG. 9B).

  The “15 round V open jackpot” jackpot type is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 15 rounds, and the V winning device 72 is opened in the first round of the jackpot and variable from the second round to the 15th round. This is a jackpot when the winning device 65 is opened.

  Further, the jackpot type of "7 round V open jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of 7 rounds, and like the "15 round V open jackpot", the V winning device 72 is opened in the first round of the jackpot. The second to seventh rounds are jackpots in which the variable winning device 65 is opened.

  The “15 round V closed jackpot” jackpot type is a jackpot with a maximum number of 15 rounds, and the variable winning device 65 is opened and the V winning device 72 is opened from the first round to the 15th round of the jackpot. It is a jackpot that is not done.

  The "7 round V closed jackpot" jackpot type is a jackpot with a maximum number of 7 rounds, and like the "15 round V closed jackpot," all the variable winning devices 65 from the 1st round to the 7th round of the jackpot. Is a big jackpot that is opened and the V winning device 72 is not opened.

  Here, the configuration of the V winning device 72 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the V winning device 72 in a front view, and FIG. 4B shows the behavior of a sphere distributed to the right path 75 by the allocating device 73 of the V winning device 72. FIG. 4C is a diagram showing the behavior of the ball distributed to the left path 74 by the distribution device 73 of the V winning device 72.

  The V winning device 72 is arranged on the lower right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 3). In this V winning device 72, a V winning device opening / closing plate 72a that opens and closes the V winning device 72 and a ball that has flown into the V winning device 72 with the V winning device opening / closing plate 72a opened are passed. Pre-sorting route 72c, a sorting device 73 provided on the downstream side of the pre-sorting route 72c, and a ball that has flown into the V winning device 72 when the sorting device 73 is in a state of rising to the right in a front view. On the left side path 74, a V winning opening 74a capable of detecting a sphere passing through the left side path 74, and a ball flowing into the V winning apparatus 72 when the sorting device 73 is in a state of rising to the left when viewed from the front. And the right side path 75 (see FIG. 4A).

  The V winning device opening / closing plate 72a is configured to be displaceable between a protruding state protruding from the game board 13 board surface and an immersive state immersed in the game board 13 board surface by a V winning device open / close solenoid 72b (see FIG. 6) described later. ing. Specifically, at normal times, the V winning device opening / closing solenoid 72b is turned off to bring the V winning device opening / closing plate 72a into a protruding state, and the V winning device opening / closing plate 72a causes the upper portion of the V winning device 72 (the pre-sorting path). The upstream side 72c) is closed so that the ball does not flow into the V winning device 72. When the above-mentioned “15 round V opening jackpot” or “7 round V opening jackpot” is won, the V winning device opening / closing solenoid 72b is operated for a predetermined period (in the first embodiment, “5” in the first round of both jackpots). By turning on the V winning device opening / closing plate 72a, the upper part of the V winning device 72 (upstream side of the pre-sorting path 72c) is opened, and the ball that has been hit to the right is the V winning device 72. It is configured to flow in.

  The ball that has flown into the V winning device 72 always reaches the distribution device 73 via the pre-sorting route 72c, and is distributed to either the left side route 74 or the right side route 75 depending on the driving mode of the sorting device 73. Be done.

  The distribution device 73 is arranged on the downstream side of the pre-distribution path 72c, on the upstream side of the left path 74 and the right path 75, and on the boundary portion between the left path 74 and the right path 75. The distribution device 73 is configured such that the distribution plate 73a can be rotationally driven around the rotation shaft portion 73b, and a V distribution drive solenoid 73c (see FIG. 6) described later has a constant cycle (in the first embodiment, " The ball that has flown into the V winning device 72 is switched to either the left path 74 or the right path 75 as the ball is switched on and off every 10 seconds. Specifically, when the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is turned off, the left path 74 is closed and the right path 75 is opened (see FIG. 4B), and the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is turned on. As a result, the right side path 75 is closed and the left side path 74 is opened (see FIG. 4C) at a constant cycle.

  As shown in FIG. 4B, the sphere that has flown into the V winning device 72 while the V distribution driving solenoid 73c is off is distributed to the right path 75 by the distribution plate 73a of the distribution device 73. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 4C, the balls that have flown into the V winning device 72 with the V distribution driving solenoid 73c turned on are distributed to the left path 74 by the distribution plate 73a of the distribution device 73. And passes through the V winning opening 74a.

  In the first embodiment, when the ball flows into the left path 74 and wins the V winning opening 74a while the V winning device 72 is open, after the jackpot, each special symbol is compared with the "normal gaming state". Along with the high-probability state, the normal symbol is configured to shift to the gaming state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "probability variation state") is a high-probability state. On the other hand, during the jackpot, if the V winning device 72 is not opened, or even if the V winning device 72 is opened, the ball does not flow into the left path 74 and the ball does not enter the V winning opening 74a. After the jackpot, like the "normal gaming state", while each special symbol is a low probability state, the normal symbol is a high probability state to the gaming state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "time reduction state") It is configured to migrate.

  Here, the "normal game state" means a time when the game state is not the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", and the jackpot probability of each special symbol and the normal symbol hit probability are normal states (ie, , Low probability state) and the normal electric power combination 71a is opened for a short time. That is, "normal game state", the probability of jackpot of each special symbol is lower than that of "probability fluctuation state", and the state of probability of hitting ordinary symbols is lower than that of "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state" Therefore, the opening time of the electric utility 71a is also short. As will be described later in detail, in the case of the "normal game state", when a so-called right-handed game is performed, a ball is easy to win in the second starting port 71 (hereinafter, a state in which the ball is easy to win in the second starting port 71). This may be referred to as a "winning assistance state"), but a gaming state most disadvantageous to the player. In the “normal game state”, when a ball is shot by a right-handed game (for example, detection of passage of a ball to the through gate 67), it is said that the player is not encouraged to play the game. A predetermined alarm sound (for example, "please return to the left-handed game" or the like) is output as a voice in order to give a hint to a person involved in the hall. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the non-encouragement right-handed game from being continuously executed in the "normal game state", and to realize the game performance according to the game specification.

  Then, "time reduction state", the jackpot probability of each special symbol is a low probability state as in the "normal gaming state", but the state in which a so-called "time saving function" with an increased probability of hitting a regular symbol is given Say. That is, in the "time shortened state", the normal electric power combination 71a provided on the right side of the second starting port 71 in front view is likely to be in an open state, and as a result, the winning assistance function is activated to move the ball to the second starting port 71. Becomes easy to enter.

  That is, in the "time shortening state", although the big hit by the special symbol is equivalent to the "normal game state", the hit by the ordinary symbol is easily derived, and the open state of the ordinary electric role 71a is long. Therefore, in the "time-reduced state", it is possible to easily win the ball fired by the right-handed game to the second starting opening 71, so that it is possible to continuously execute the dynamic display of the second special symbol, 2 It is possible to obtain a prize ball (eg, 1 prize / win) based on a prize in the starting port 71 and play a game while suppressing a decrease in the number of balls held.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "time reduction state" is a predetermined number of times (in the first embodiment, a predetermined number of times after the jackpot) when the ball does not enter the V winning opening 74a in each jackpot type. , 100 times) until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed, the probability of hitting the normal symbol becomes a high probability state. Then, after the dynamic display of the special symbol of the specified number of times is executed, it is configured to shift from the "time reduction state" to the "normal game state".

  Next, in the "probability fluctuation state", it is a high-probability state in which the jackpot probability of each special symbol is increased as an added value after the jackpot is over, and the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is increased, and the winning of the ordinary electric role 71a is achieved. The auxiliary function is activated.

  That is, the "probability fluctuation state" is a state in which the big hit result due to the special symbol is easily derived, the hit result due to the ordinary symbol is easily derived, and further, the open state of the ordinary electric role 71a becomes long. Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state", since the ball fired by the right-handed game is likely to win the second starting port 71, it is possible to continuously execute the dynamic display of the second special symbol and the second starting. It is possible to play a game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held by obtaining a prize ball (eg, 1 / win) based on the winning of the mouth 71, and a jackpot game based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol (special It is possible to play the game in a state where the (game state) is likely to occur.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a ball wins the V winning opening 74a in each jackpot type in which the V winning device 72 can be opened, a predetermined number of times predetermined after the jackpot (in the first embodiment, Until 100 times of dynamic display of special symbols is executed (so-called special time. Hereinafter, Special Time (special time) may be abbreviated as "ST".) The jackpot probability of the special symbol becomes a high probability state. Then, after the special symbols have been dynamically displayed the specified number of times, the "probability variation state" is shifted to the "normal game state".

  Here, the display mode of the second LED group 37b for each jackpot type will be described. As the stop display (lighting display) of the upper LED group 37b1 for the first special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to the loss, 21 types of the display pattern corresponding to the jackpot type "15 round V open jackpot", and the jackpot type " There are 21 types of display patterns corresponding to the "7 round V open jackpot" and 21 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "7 round V close jackpot", for a total of 64 types of display patterns. Each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each jackpot type, and a random display pattern is associated in advance. Therefore, when the player sees the display pattern of the upper LED group 37b1, the stop display of the loss can be recognized, while the jackpot type “15 round V open jackpot”, “7 round V open jackpot” or “7 round V open jackpot” or “7”. It is configured such that it is difficult to identify which stop indication of "Round V closed jackpot".

  Further, as a stop display (lighting display) of the lower LED group 37b2 for the second special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to the loss, 32 types of the display pattern corresponding to the jackpot type "15 round V open jackpot", and the jackpot. There are a total of 64 display patterns, 31 display patterns corresponding to the type “15 round V closed jackpot”. And, like the upper LED group 37b1, each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each jackpot type, and a random display pattern is associated in advance. Therefore, when the player sees the display pattern of the lower LED group 37b2, the stop display of the loss can be recognized, while the jackpot type "15 round V open jackpot" or "15 round V close jackpot" is recognized. It is difficult to identify whether it is a stop display.

  With this configuration, even if each jackpot type is displayed in the stop display of the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, if all the jackpot types corresponding to each stop display are not known. It becomes difficult for the player to recognize the winning jackpot type. Therefore, it is difficult to identify whether or not the V winning device 72 is a jackpot type that is opened only by the display result of the variation effect, and a game property that makes the player guess which gaming state is created is created, and the game is played. The interest can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 3, the description will be continued. In the game area of the game board 13, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is won.

  A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a ball entering the first starting port 64 or a ball entering the second starting port 71 (hereinafter, the ball entering the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 is referred to as “starting”). There is a case of "winning") as a trigger, while synchronizing with the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 37, a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display") that produces a variation effect of the third symbol. Abbreviated as "apparatus") and a third symbol display device 81, and an LED that variably displays a normal symbol with the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 as a trigger (hereinafter, the variable display of the normal symbol is referred to as "variable display"). A configured second symbol display device 83 (hereinafter, with respect to the second symbol display device 83, may be referred to as "normal symbol display device 83" for convenience of description) is provided. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 17-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 6) described later, for example, left, middle and right. The three symbol columns (not shown) are displayed.

  Each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 5) is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 to display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is variably displayed. The third symbol display device 81 of the first embodiment is commonly used in the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol, and is used for the control of the main controller 110. The display of the accompanying game state is performed on the special symbol display device 37, while the decorative display corresponding to the display of the special symbol display device 37 is performed using the third symbol of the third symbol display device 81. It is a thing. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 5B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". Each main symbol is formed by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol made of a wooden box, and odd numbers ("1", "3", "5", "7", The main design with "9") has a large number added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (“0”, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) are used for characters such as planks, furoshiki, helmets, etc. that are almost full on the front of the wooden box. A simulated accessory pattern is added, and an even number is small in green on the lower right side of the accessory pattern, and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the accessory pattern.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the result of lottery of any special symbol by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 6) described later is a big hit, a variation effect in which the same main symbol is aligned is produced. It is configured so that a big hit is generated after the change effect is finished. For example, when the jackpot type of “15 round V open jackpot” is won, a variation effect is mainly performed in which main symbols with numbers “7” are arranged. When the jackpot type of "7 round V open jackpot" is won, the variation effect is mainly performed in which the main symbols with the number "3" are aligned. On the other hand, if you win the jackpot type of "15 round V closed jackpot" or "7 round V closed jackpot", the main symbol with a number other than "3" or "7", that is, " A variation effect in which the main symbols with the numbers “1”, “2”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “8” or “9” are arranged is performed.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the jackpot type of "15 round V open jackpot" and "7 round V open jackpot" is won, all the main symbols can be revealed. .. Specifically, for example, even if the "15 round V open jackpot" or "7 round V open jackpot" is won, fluctuations in which the same main symbols with the numbers "2" and "8" are arranged Performance may be performed. With such a configuration, for example, when the variation effect is stopped, the content of the game value that can be given cannot be determined, and by performing the promotion effect during the jackpot, a variety of game variations are possible. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into three parts in the vertical direction, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is fluctuated and reserved. It is composed of a cockpit display area Db for displaying the number of balls and the like, and the other upper third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right sides. The left symbol row Z1 is displayed on the display area Dm1, and the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed on the display area Dm2. The right symbol row Z3 is displayed in the display area Dm3.

  In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending order (or in descending order) of numbers, and each symbol column Z1 to Z3 is cyclically scrolled from the upper side to the lower side to perform the variable effect. In addition, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the arrangement of the numbers may be different. For example, in the left symbol column Z1, the numbers of the main symbols may be arranged in descending order, while in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3, the numbers of the main symbols may be arranged in ascending order.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle and lower three rows for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each variation effect, the third symbol on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. It will be stopped. If a combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols. Hereinafter, referred to as “jackpot display”) is arranged on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  The 3rd symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is the first start while the variable effect (dynamic display) of the 3rd symbol corresponding to the 1st special symbol or the 2nd special symbol is being performed. When entering the mouth 64, the number of times of entering the ball (the number of holding balls) is reserved up to 4 times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, and the special symbols 1 to 1 to 4 reserved symbol display regions Db1a to Db1d of the first reserved symbol display region Db1 corresponding to the first special symbol of the cockpit display region Db. It is also shown. Special figure 1 1st-4th reservation design indicatory territory Db1a-Db1d, 1 reservation design per 1 retention ball 1 sphere of the 1st special design (the number of retention spheres 1 time) (in the normal indicatory mode “○” design ( White circle symbols)) are respectively displayed, and the number of reserved balls is displayed in accordance with the number of reserved symbols displayed in the special figure 1 to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d.

  That is, in the special figure 1 to the fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, when one reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol Indicates that it is once, and when two reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the special figure 1 first and second reserved symbol display areas Db1a, Db1b, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol Indicates that the number of times is two, and when three reserved symbols in total, one each in the special figure 1 first to third reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1c, are displayed, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol Indicates that the number of times is three times, and when four reserved symbols in total, one each in the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, are displayed, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol Indicates 4 times. Moreover, when the reserved symbols are not displayed in the special figure 1 to the fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 0 times and there is a variable effect that is reserved. Indicates not to.

  In addition, the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is the first sphere while the variation effect (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being performed. When the player has entered the 2 starting port 71, the number of entered balls (the number of reserved balls) is reserved up to 4 times. The number of reserved balls is shown by the special symbol display device 37, and the special figure 2 of the second reserved symbol display area Db2 corresponding to the second special symbol of the cockpit display area Db 1 to 4 reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d It is also shown. Special figure 2 1st ~ 4th reservation symbol display areas Db2a ~ Db2d, in the same manner as the 1st reservation symbol display area Db1, one reserve symbol per reserve ball 1 ball of the second special symbol (the number of reserve balls once) ( In the normal display mode, "○" symbols (white circle symbols) are displayed respectively, and the number of reserved balls is changed according to the number of reserved symbols displayed in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d. Is displayed.

  That is, in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, when one reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol Indicates that it is once, and when two reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the special figure 2 first / second reserved symbol display areas Db2a, Db2b, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol Indicates that it is twice, and when three reserved symbols in total, one each in the special figure 2 first to third reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2c, are displayed, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol Indicates that the number of times is 3 times, and when four reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol Indicates 4 times. Further, when the reserved symbol is not displayed in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, there is a variable effect in which the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 and is reserved. Indicates not to.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time, and only one of the lottery games is executed. Is configured. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when one of the lottery games being executed is completed, when the holding ball of the first special symbol and the holding ball of the second special symbol are stored, The second lottery game of the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the first lottery game of the first special symbol (so-called, special figure 2 priority variation). The lottery game may be executed in a winning order (so-called winning order change), or the first lottery game of the first special symbol may be executed in preference to the second lottery game of the second special symbol. Good (so-called, special figure 1 priority change), it may be configured to execute the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol at the same time (so-called, simultaneous change).

  In the central portion of the cockpit display area Db, an execution symbol display area Db0 is provided in which an execution symbol indicating that the variation effect is being executed in the main display area Dm is displayed. This execution symbol display area Db0 is provided in the central portion of the cockpit display area Db, that is, on the right side of the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a and on the left side of the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a, Execution symbols larger than the respective reserved symbols displayed in the reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d and Db2a to Db2d are configured to be displayed. The execution symbol display area Db0 is displayed as an execution symbol by moving (shifting) the reserved symbol displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a or the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a. It

  The execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is erased when the variation effect is finished, and with the elimination of the execution symbol, the displayed reserved symbol is on the lower side (the right side if the first special symbol, the first, If it is 2 special symbols, it is moved and displayed as a reserved symbol on the left side). Specifically, for example, in the situation where there are no reserved symbols of the second special symbol and there are four reserved symbols of the first special symbol, the end of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol When the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is erased, the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a, as the execution symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0 It is displayed after moving (shifting). Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a. Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b. In addition, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 fourth reserved symbol display area Db1d, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c.

  Further, for example, in a situation where there are four reserved symbols of the second special symbol, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is erased with the end of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In the case where the reserved symbol is displayed in the special symbol 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the execution symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0. Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 second reserved symbol display area Db2b, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a. Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 third reserved symbol display area Db2c, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 2 second reserved symbol display area Db2b. Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 fourth reserved symbol display area Db2d, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 2 third reserved symbol display area Db2c.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, while the variation effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, the execution symbol is continuously displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0. On the other hand, when the variation effect is finished, the execution symbol is erased. That is, when the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, it indicates that the variable effect is being executed (is continuing) in the main display area Dm, and the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0. If not, it indicates that the variation effect is not executed (not continued) in the main display area Dm.

  Further, in the cockpit display area Db, the "holding change notice" can be executed by using the holding symbol and the execution symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db. The "holding change notice" means that the jackpot expectation of the variation effect executed in the main display area Dm is to change the display color of the pending symbol and the execution symbol in a plurality of stages before and during the execution of the variation effect. It is a preliminary announcement suggested by.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the "holding change notice", the display color of the holding symbol and the execution symbol is changed from "white" which is a normal display mode to "blue" or a red color which is a blue display mode. The display mode can be changed to "red". In the pachinko machine 10, when the "big hit display" is generated in the variable effect or when the "reach display" is generated, the selection ratios of the display colors of the reserved symbol and the execution symbol are different, By changing the display color of the reserved symbol and the execution symbol from the normal display mode (“white”) to another display mode (for example, “blue”), in the variable effect indicated by the reserved symbol and the execution symbol, The possibility that "reach display" or "big hit display" may occur can be suggested to the player for each display color.

  Specifically, in the "holding change notice", when the holding design and the execution design are in the display form of "blue" rather than the normal display form ("white"), the fluctuations indicated by the holding design and the execution design The ratio of “reach display” and “big hit display” in the production is set to be high. Further, when the hold design and the execution design are in the display mode of “red” rather than “blue”, the ratio of “reach display” or “big hit display” in the variation effect indicated by the hold design and the execution design is higher. Is set.

  In addition, when the display mode of the holding design and the execution design is “red”, the mode of the production (mainly “main reach”) in the variation production indicated by the “red” holding design or the execution design (mainly The mode of production is referred to as "production mode" or "special reach" production mode (hereinafter, "super reach" production mode or "special reach" production mode may be collectively referred to as "super reach or higher" production mode. ) Is set to be finalized. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the display patterns of the pending symbols and the execution symbols are in the normal (“white”) → “blue” → “red” step-by-step order of “reach display” and “big hit display” appearance expectation degree. Is set to be high. The details of the “holding change notice” will be described later.

  In addition, by this "holding change notice", in a state in which the display mode of the pending symbols is changed, when the pending symbols are shifted along with the execution (digestion) of the variable effect, the display mode of the changed pending symbols is shifted. It is configured to be taken over (inherited) and reflected on the previous pending design or execution design. That is, when the display mode of the reserved symbol is changed, when the changed reserved symbol is shifted to the other reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, Db2a to Db2d or the execution symbol display area Db0 with the execution of the variation effect, The display mode before the shift is configured to be maintained as it is as the display mode of the pending symbol or the execution symbol after the shift.

  Therefore, for example, when the display color of the reserved symbol changes to "red" in the special figure 1 fourth reserved symbol display area Db1d, the reserved symbol is the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c → special figure 1 second reserved When the design display area Db1b → special figure 1 first reserved design display area Db1a → execution design display area Db0 is respectively shifted, the reserved design or the execution design of “red” is continuously displayed. It

  In addition, in the first embodiment, the number of balls to be held for the variation effect based on the ball entering the first starting opening 64 or the second starting opening 71 is configured to be held up to four times, respectively. The number of balls is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls ( For example, it may be displayed in a color or a lighting pattern). Moreover, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, it is not necessary to display the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81. If the third symbol display device 81 does not display the information on the number of reserved balls (reserved symbols, etc.), it is not possible to execute the "reservation change notice" based on the reserved symbols, and therefore other character symbols, etc. are additionally added. It may be configured to execute a pre-reading notice similar to the “holding change notice” by displaying the notice.

  Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with four holding lamps each showing the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and depending on the number of holding lamps in the lighting state, the holding balls. The number may be displayed. In the case where the holding lamp is used to display the number of holding balls, it is naturally possible to execute a pre-reading notice similar to the “holding change notice” of the first embodiment by providing a plurality of holding lamp display colors. Is possible.

  The sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying a character and a notice effect image, respectively. The image displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 gives the player an expectation that a big hit will be obtained as a result of the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image such as a notice symbol appearing is displayed in the left small area Ds1, and the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm may be in a state where it is easier to transition to a big hit than usual. Suggested by the player.

  Further, in the sub display area Ds, in the central small area Ds2, usually, a predetermined character (a boy with a hachimaki in the first embodiment) performs a predetermined motion, and the variation effect is performed in the main display area Dm. Based on a special action other than the prescribed action, the color of the boy's hair, which is usually black, or the color of the white bee, usually white, changes, or another character appears, etc. Is done.

  Further, in the sub-display area Ds, in the right small area Ds3, a serif notice that indicates whether or not a jackpot is generated in the variation effect that is performed in the main display area Dm, or a specific effect (for example, V winning described later) Various notice effects such as remaining time of chance effects etc.) are displayed. Detailed contents will be described later.

  Returning to FIG. 3, the description will be continued. A through gate 67 is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. The through gate 67 is provided with through holes (not shown) for passing balls in the vertical direction. When the ball passes through this through gate 67, a normal symbol switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the main controller 110 causes a normal symbol hit lottery due to the turning on. The through gate 67 only serves as a trigger for the variable display of the ordinary symbols, and the prize balls and the like are not paid out even when the balls pass.

  On the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front, an ordinary electric power combination 71a is arranged. The ordinary electric role 71a is mainly composed of a rotating plate and a rotating solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the rotating plate.

  The main controller 110 of the first embodiment keeps the rotating plate of the normal electric outlet 71a in the upright state and covers the right side portion of the second starting port 71 when viewed from the front, so that the second starting port is normally maintained. It prevents the ball from flowing into 71. When the winning symbol is won in the variable display of the normal symbol, the rotating solenoid (not shown) is driven for a predetermined time, and the rotating plate of the normal electric power combination 71a is kept in the upright state for a predetermined time. From the right side to a predetermined angle (for example, 45 degrees), an open state (inclined state) is driven to allow the ball to flow into the second starting port 71, and the variable display device unit is played by a right-handed game. It is configured such that a ball flowing down on the right side of the front view of 80 easily enters the second starting opening 71, that is, a winning assistance state.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that the probability of winning in the variable display of the normal symbols is changed according to the game state. Specifically, in the "normal game state", the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to a low probability state (for example, 1/10), and it is difficult to win the winning in the variable display of the ordinary symbol, so that the ordinary electric power combination 71a It is configured such that it is difficult for the rotating plate to be in the open state (tilted state) and it is difficult for the second starting port 71 to win the prize. On the other hand, in the “probability fluctuation state” or the “time reduction state”, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to a high probability state (for example, 9/10), and it is easy to win the winning in the variable display of the ordinary symbol, so that the ordinary electricity The rotating plate of the winning combination 71a is easily opened (tilted), and the second starting opening 71 can be easily won.

  In addition, instead of changing the winning probability of the normal symbol from the "normal gaming state" such as the "probability variation state" or the "time shortening state", the number of times of the normal electric officer 71a is changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The time when the moving plate rotates and the number of times that the rotating plate of the normal electric role 71a rotates per one time may be changed. Specifically, in the "probability variation state" or the "time shortening state", the time for which the rotating plate of the normal electric role 71a rotates is set to be longer than that in the "normal game state", or the normal electric power is generated once. The number of times that the rotating plate of the winning combination 71a rotates may be made larger than in the "normal game state". Further, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time shortening state", the probability of hitting a normal symbol is increased, the rotation time of the rotating plate of the normal electric outlet 71a is lengthened, and the rotating plate of the ordinary electric outlet 71a is increased. It is also possible to simultaneously perform at least two of increasing the number of rotations of.

  The normal symbol display device 83 is a variable display that alternately turns on the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the display symbol (ordinary symbol) every time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The pachinko machine 10 is a normal electric outlet 71a provided on the right side in the front view of the second starting opening 71 when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the first embodiment, the symbol "○"). Is activated only for a predetermined time, and when it stops in a pattern other than the predetermined pattern (“X” pattern in the first embodiment), the normal electric hand 71a is deactivated (closed state is maintained) Has been done.

  The number of holding balls of the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of holding balls is the above-mentioned second symbol holding lamp 84 (hereinafter, regarding the second symbol holding lamp 84, for convenience of explanation, "ordinary symbol holding lamp 84"). May be referred to as)). Normally, four symbol reserve lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of reserves, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81. Then, the number of holdings is displayed by the number of the normal symbol holding lamps 84 that are turned on.

  In addition, the variable display of the normal symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the normal symbol display device 83 as in the first embodiment, as well as the special symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. You may make it perform using a part of 81. Similarly, the normal symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Further, since the special symbol display device 37 indicates the number of holding balls, the normal symbol holding lamp 84 may not be lit.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first starting opening 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first starting port 64, a first starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller is caused by the turning on of the first starting port switch. At 110 (see FIG. 6), a jackpot lottery for the first special symbol is made. Then, the dynamic display according to the lottery result is shown by the upper LED group 37b1 of the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the variation effect based on the first special symbol is executed by the third symbol display device 81. To be done. The first starting opening 64 is also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  On the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front, a second starting port 71 is provided, into which a ball can enter only when the normal electric role 71a is open. When a ball enters the second starting port 71, a second starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller is caused by the turning on of the second starting port switch. At 110 (see FIG. 6), a jackpot lottery for the second special symbol is made. Then, the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the lower LED group 37b2 of the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the variation effect based on the second special symbol is executed by the third symbol display device 81. .. It should be noted that the second starting opening 71 is also one of the winning openings through which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when a ball enters.

  On the lower right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, a horizontally-long rectangular large winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion of the variable winning device 65. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery for the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 6) is a big hit, after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed, While the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is lit and displayed so as to be a big hit stop symbol, a stop symbol corresponding to the big hit on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, three same symbols are aligned (“777 "))) Is displayed, and the occurrence of a jackpot game is indicated. After that, depending on the type of jackpot, the special winning opening opening / closing plate 65b provided in the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device opening / closing plate 72a provided in the V winning device 72 is opened, and the ball becomes the big winning opening 65a. The game state transitions to a special game state (big hit game) in which it is easy to win a prize in or in the V winning device 72. As the special game state, the special winning opening 65a or the V winning device 72, which is normally closed, is satisfied until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the case of the special winning opening 65a, "30 seconds" elapses, or a ball). Will be opened until 10 wins, until 5 seconds have passed in the V winning device 72, or until 10 balls win.

  When the special winning opening 65a is opened, a predetermined time elapses from the opening or when a predetermined number of winnings are detected, it is closed, and after the closing, the special winning opening 65a is opened again. The opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state (big hit state) that is advantageous to the player, and the player can play a ball by winning the ball at the special winning opening 65a. As a value (game value) is added, a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out.

  In addition, the V winning device 72 is opened in the first round when the V winning device 72 can win the jackpot that can be opened, and is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the opening or when a predetermined number of winnings are detected, and the closing thereof. After that, the special winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened. The opening / closing operation of the V winning device 72 can be opened only once at the maximum. The state in which this opening / closing operation is being performed is one form of a special game state (big hit state) that is advantageous to the player, and the player is allowed to win a ball by the V winning device 72, so that the player can play the game. As a value (game value) is added, a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps and identification labels are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps and the like adhered to the adhesive space K1 are the front frame 14 It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not entered any of the winning openings (ball entrances) 63, 64, 65a, 71, 72 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a read only memory (hereinafter, abbreviated as “ROM”) 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and controls stored in the ROM 202. A random access memory (Random Access Memory; hereinafter abbreviated as “RAM”) 203, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing a program, and an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, Various circuits such as a data transmission / reception circuit are built in.

  Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery, the special symbol display device 37 and the dynamic display of each special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 and the setting of the variable effect, the display result of the variable display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 83 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as lottery is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203c that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

  Further, the ROM 202 has a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a reserved number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, a variation pattern table 202e, a universal figure random number table 202f, a universal figure variation time table 202g, and an ordinary electric power combination control table 202h. Store at least. Main controller 110 executes the main control described above by using various counters stored in RAM 203 and various tables stored in ROM 202.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 7, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters perform jackpot lottery, setting of dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37, setting of variable effect of the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display result of variable display on the ordinary symbol display device 83, and the like. Therefore, it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Further, in the description of the various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will also be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 19.

  For the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37, and the setting of the variable effect of the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot random number counter C1 used in the jackpot lottery and the stop type of the jackpot symbol The jackpot type counter C2 used for selection, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting the effect mode of the variation effect, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the variation pattern selection The fluctuation type counter CS1 used for the above is used.

  Further, the ordinary symbol display counter 83 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the ordinary symbol counter C4.

  Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to "0".

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of "4 milliseconds", which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24), and some counters are irregular in the main processing (see FIG. 36). Is updated and the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203c set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 has a first holding ball storage area 203d including four holding areas (first holding first to fourth areas) for the first special symbol, and four holdings for the second special symbol. A second holding ball storage area 203e composed of areas (second holding first to fourth areas) is provided, and a ball entering the first starting opening 64 or the second starting opening 71 is provided in each of these areas. The respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored according to the timing.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 899"), and becomes a maximum value (for example, "899" for a counter that can take a value of "0 to 899"). It is configured to return to "0" after reaching. In particular, when the big hit random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1, and the big hit random number counter C1 is updated from the initial value. Done.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the big hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of “0 to 899”, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of “0 to 899”. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 36).

  The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting opening 64 (starting winning), the first reserved first to first provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first starting opening 64 (first special symbol). It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any of the first holding areas of the fourth area. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins the winning in the second starting opening 71 (starting winning), the second holding 1st to 1st holding provided in the second holding ball storing area 203e corresponding to the second starting opening 71 (second special symbol). It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of any of the second holding areas of the fourth area.

  The value of the random number for which the jackpot random number counter C1 is a jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. That is, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the holding area of the first holding ball storage area 203d matches the value of the jackpot random number set by the jackpot random number table 202a. It is judged as a big hit. Further, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the holding area of the second holding ball storage area 203e matches the value of the jackpot random number set by the jackpot random number table 202a. It is judged as a big hit.

  Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202. The jackpot random number table 202a is commonly used by the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the "normal gaming state" or the "time saving state", which is the first symbol (each special symbol). For low probability state used in the case of low probability state of (pattern) (period that is not "probability variation state"), the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the first symbol with a high probability of being a big hit than the low probability state ( It is divided into two types, one for high probability state used in the case of "probability variation state (during probability change)" which is a high probability state of each special symbol). Then, the numbers of the random numbers to be the jackpots included in the low probability state and the high probability state are set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of jackpot random number counter C1 (jackpot random number value) that is a jackpot in the case of a low probability state of each special symbol is three, and the value is "7,307,582". Is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability of each special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time reduction state") is set to be 3/900 = 1/300.

  On the other hand, in the case of a high probability state of each special symbol, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are a big hit is 9, and the value “28,122,298,390,486,567,656,750, 866 ”is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability of each special symbol in the high-probability state (that is, the “probability variation state”) is set to be 9/900 = 1/100.

  In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number values stored in the jackpot random number table 202a and the jackpot random number values for the low probability state and the jackpot random number values for the high probability state do not overlap with each other. Is set. Here, if there is a value that is a jackpot random number value regardless of the status of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, and there is a possibility that the jackpot will be erroneously assigned. On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, by changing the value of the random number, which is a big hit, according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state), the big hit Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the random number that becomes, it is possible to prevent fraud.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. The jackpot type counter C2 determines the jackpot type when a jackpot is hit, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99") to obtain a maximum value (for example, "0 to 99"). In the case of a counter that can take a value of "," it is configured to return to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24)).

  Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting opening 64, a big hit among the first holding first to fourth areas of the first holding ball storing area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting opening 64. The random number counter C1 is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first holding area as the first holding area. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting opening 71, a big hit among the second holding first to fourth areas of the second holding ball storing area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting opening 71. It is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second holding area as the second holding area in which the random number counter C1 is stored.

  Here, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the one holding area in the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e is not a random number that is a big hit (big hit random number value), That is, if the random number is a random number (missing random number value), the variation pattern in the variation effect and the type of the stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) are those at the time of loss. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the one holding area in the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e is a random number (big hit random number value), a variation effect The fluctuation pattern and stop type in are those at the time of a big hit. In this case, the variation pattern and the stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  As described above, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of "0 to 99", and the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type stored in the ROM 202 are stored. The jackpot type is determined based on the table 202b. This jackpot type table 202b, the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 referred to in the first lottery game of the first special symbol, and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 referred to in the second lottery game of the second special symbol And are provided.

  Here, with reference to Drawing 9 (a) and Drawing 9 (b), special figure 1 big hit classification table 202b1 and special figure 2 big hit classification table 202b2 are explained. FIG. 9A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. 9B is also stored in the ROM 202. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the special figure 2 big hit classification table 202b2 corresponding to the 2nd special symbol.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b), the jackpot type table 202b is provided according to the type of the special symbol (that is, the first special symbol or the second special symbol), and the special symbol. The jackpot type corresponding to the type and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 are associated with each other.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as described above, as the jackpot type, "15 round V open jackpot", "7 round V open jackpot", "15 round V closed jackpot", and "7 round V jackpot". Closed jackpot. "

  In the "15 round V open jackpot", since the V winning device 72 is opened in the first round, it is possible to put a ball into the V winning opening 74a at the opening timing, and after the jackpot ends, the "probability fluctuation state" Is a type of jackpot that can occur.

  Also, the "7 round V opening jackpot" is similar to the "15 round V opening jackpot" because the V winning device 72 is opened in the first round, so a ball can be won in the V winning opening 74a at the opening timing. This is a jackpot type that is possible and in which a “probability fluctuation state” can occur after the jackpot is over.

  On the other hand, the "15 round V closed jackpot" is a jackpot type in which the V winning device 72 is not opened and a ball cannot be placed in the V winning opening 74a, so that the "time saving state" is always obtained after the jackpot ends. is there.

  The "7 round V closed jackpot" is similar to the "15 round V closed jackpot" because the V winning device 72 is not opened and the ball cannot be placed in the V winning opening 74a. It is a jackpot type that becomes a "time reduction state".

  In any of the jackpot types, when 10 balls are won in the open V winning device 72 or the variable winning device 65, the open V winning device 72 or the variable winning device 65 is closed (that is, , The maximum winning number is 10). Also, the opening time at the start of the jackpot is executed at "10 seconds", the interval time of each round is executed at "2 seconds", and the ending time at the end of the jackpot is executed at "10 seconds (not shown)". ..

  Further, in the “15 round V opening jackpot” and the “7 round V opening jackpot”, the V winning device 72 to be opened in the first round has the maximum opening time set to “5 seconds”. It is configured such that it is difficult to win 10 spheres (details will be described later) that are fired at "0.6 second" intervals. Therefore, the V winning device 72 opened in the first round of the "15 round V opening jackpot" and the "7 round V opening jackpot" is closed based on the condition of the maximum winning number, rather than the maximum opening time (that is, It is configured to be easily closed after the elapse of "5 seconds"). In this way, by configuring the opening time of the V winning device 72 to be relatively short, the V winning opening 74a that can give the "probability variation state" is configured to be difficult to be fraudulently opened, and is not intended. It is possible to prevent the game value from being given.

  In the toku-zu 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the toku-tsu 2 jackpot type table 202b2, the jackpot type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type is associated with each jackpot type.

  In the example of the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 of FIG. 9A, the value “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with “15 round V opening jackpot”, and “7 round V opening jackpot”. The value “30 to 94” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with, and the value “95 to 99” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with “7 round V closed jackpot”.

  In the winning / non-drawing lot of the first special symbol in the first embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any one of the first holding ball storage areas 203d becomes a jackpot. When the value is a value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first holding area is determined from the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", "15 rounds V open jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "50", the jackpot type is "7 rounds". "V open jackpot" is determined, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "97", "7 round V closed jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

  That is, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol which is the first lottery game, the jackpot type of "15 round V open jackpot" is 30%, and the jackpot type of "7 round V open jackpot" is 65. %, The jackpot type of “7 round V closed jackpot” is 5%, and the prize is won.

  Further, in the example of the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 of FIG. 9B, the value “0 to 94” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with “15 round V open jackpot” and “15 round V closed”. The value “95 to 99” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with “jack”. That is, in the jackpot of the second special symbol, the jackpot of all 15 rounds will be awarded.

  In the winning / winning lottery of the second special symbol in the first embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of any of the first holding areas of the second holding ball storage area 203e is a jackpot. When the value is a value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same first holding area is determined from the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “17”, “15 rounds V open jackpot” is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “98”, the jackpot type is “15 rounds”. V closing jackpot "is decided.

  That is, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol which is the second lottery game, the jackpot type of "15 round V open jackpot" is 95% and the jackpot type of "15 round V closed jackpot" is 5 % Will be elected.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the selection ratio of "15 round V open jackpot" having the highest game value in the first lottery game with the first special symbol is 30%, while the second special symbol is used. In the 2 lottery game, the selection ratio of "15 round V open jackpot" is 95%, so the lottery game with the second special symbol has a higher game value for the player than the lottery game with the first special symbol. Is becoming For this reason, the player first wins the jackpot by winning a ball in the first starting opening 64 that can be won in the "normal gaming state", obtains the gaming value of the jackpot, and executes it along with the jackpot. How to receive a lot of lottery by the second special symbol in "probability change state" or "time reduction state" that can be done, that is, to enter the second starting opening 71 rather than to enter the first starting opening 64 The game is born, and variations are provided in the game to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, the probability that each jackpot type will be selected in the case of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the jackpot type table 202b defines the value of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type.

  Further, the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each gaming state may be prepared, and the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type table 202b may be changed.

  Returning to FIG. 7, description of various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by "1" in order within the range of "0 to 99", for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99").

  In the first embodiment, depending on the number of pending variable effects and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, there is a rough effect mode of variable effects at the time of big hit and loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81. To be selected. Specifically, a "non-reach (normal)" effect mode and a "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode in which "reach display" does not occur, and one unit element that constitutes the "normal reach" effect as "reach display" "A normal reach (normal)" effect mode and "normal reach (shortening)" effect mode, in which only one unit of elements constituting the effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as "variable element") are executed, and the "normal reach" Developed from the variable elements of "Superreach" and executed by the variable elements of "Superreach" and "Superreach (normal)" production modes The production mode of the "special reach (normal)" production mode and the "special reach (shortened)" production mode in which the variable elements of "special reach" are executed are selected. It is.

  Here, each effect mode will be described in detail. Among the effect modes, the “non-reach (normal)” effect mode and the “non-reach (shortened)” effect mode (hereinafter, “non-reach (normal)” effect mode and “non-reach (shortened)” effect mode are collectively referred to. Then, "may be referred to as a" non-reach "effect mode") means that each of the symbol arrays in the third symbol display device 81 in which three symbol arrays (not shown) vary as a variation effect of the special symbol. After the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" that shuffles at high speed is performed, the same third symbol does not stop in the second symbol row that is stopped first, and the "reach display" is not generated.

  The variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is, for example, in the variable effect of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol displayed in each symbol row is scrolled vertically downward in the vertical direction of the display screen. It refers to the variable that is being used. In this "high-speed fluctuation", the third symbol is changed so that the display content of the third symbol cannot be clearly recognized by the player, and the stop result of the variable effect previously stopped and displayed is randomly mixed (shuffled). Is executed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "high speed fluctuation" is performed, the variable element of "low speed fluctuation" is executed except for a specific effect mode ("non-reach (shortening)" effect mode). Is configured to be.

  With the variable element of "low speed fluctuation", in the variable effect of the third symbol performed on the third symbol display device 81, after the variable element of "high speed fluctuation", the third symbol is slowed at a speed visible to the player. The variable that is scrolling to. In the variable element of "low speed fluctuation", each of the symbol rows is stopped and displayed in turn while making the player recognize the display content of the third symbol. If the same 3rd symbol is stopped in the 2 symbol rows that are stopped and displayed first (for example, the left symbol row and the right symbol row), the "reach display" is generated and the variable element of "normal reach" develops. When a different third symbol is stopped in the two symbol columns to be stopped and displayed first, the remaining symbol columns are stopped and displayed, and the variation effect is finished.

  Therefore, in the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode, the variable element of "low speed fluctuation" is performed after the variable element of "high speed fluctuation" is performed, and each symbol row is stopped in order and stopped first. A different third symbol is stopped in the two symbol columns, and the remaining one symbol column is stopped, and the variable effect of 1 ends. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (shortening)" effect mode, the variable element of "slow speed fluctuation" is not performed after the "high speed fluctuation" is performed, and after completion of the variable element of "high speed fluctuation", each symbol row is simultaneously displayed. While stopping and displaying the third symbol different in the second symbol row (for example, the second symbol row which is stopped first in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode), the other symbol rows are also stopped and displayed, The variation effect of 1 ends. Details of each variable will be described later.

  Among the effect modes, the “normal reach (normal)” effect mode and the “normal reach (shortened)” effect mode (hereinafter, “normal reach (normal)” effect mode and “normal reach (shortened)” effect mode are collectively referred to as “ Sometimes referred to as "normal reach" effect mode "), in the variable effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81, immediately after the same third symbol is stopped in the second symbol row that is stopped and displayed first. This is one of the production modes of "reach display" in which the variable element of "normal reach" is executed and other "reach display", that is, the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is not developed. In the "normal reach (normal)" effect mode and the "normal reach (shortening)" effect mode, the variable element of "high speed fluctuation" to be executed is a variable element of "high speed fluctuation (normal)" or "high speed fluctuation". Only the variables of "(shortened)" are different, and the remaining variables are common.

  Among the effect modes, the “super reach (normal)” effect mode and the “super reach (shortened)” effect mode (hereinafter, “super reach (normal)” effect mode and “super reach (abbreviated)” effect mode are collectively referred to. And "may be referred to as" "super reach" effect mode "" is one of "reach display" effect modes in which the "super reach" variable element is executed by developing from the "normal reach" variable element. Is one. In the "super reach (normal)" effect mode and the "super reach (shortening)" effect mode, the variable element of "high speed fluctuation" to be executed is a variable element of "high speed fluctuation (normal)" or " The only difference is the variable of "high-speed fluctuation (shortening)", and all the remaining variables are common.

  Among the effect modes, the “special reach (normal)” effect mode and the “special reach (shortened)” effect mode (hereinafter, the “special reach (normal)” effect mode and the “special reach (shortened)” effect mode are collectively referred to. And "may be referred to as" "super reach" effect mode "" is one of the "reach display" effect modes in which the "normal reach" variable element is developed and the "special reach" variable element is executed. Is. In the "special reach (normal)" effect mode and the "special reach (shortening)" effect mode, the variable element of "high speed fluctuation" to be executed is a variable element of "high speed fluctuation (normal)" or " The only difference is the variable of "high-speed fluctuation (shortening)", and all the remaining variables are common.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting opening 64, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time is the first holding held in the first holding ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first starting opening 64. Of the first to fourth areas, the big hit random number counter C1 is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first holding area. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting opening 71, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time is set to the second holding ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second starting opening 71. Of the first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second holding area.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, depending on whether or not in the variation effect (big hit or loss), the current game state, and the number of variation effects (holding ball number) of both special symbols currently held, The stop pattern table 202d that refers to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is different. That is, the stop pattern table 202d is provided in a plurality of types, and is configured to be selected according to the number of variation effects (the number of reserved balls) of both special symbols on standby.

  In the first embodiment, when determining a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect, first, based on the holding number table 202c (see FIG. 10) provided in the ROM 202, whether or not the variation effect is present and the current game state. One of the stop pattern tables 202d corresponding to the current number of fluctuation effects (the number of reserved balls) is selected. Then, based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, an effect mode that is a rough mode of the variable effect is selected. After that, a detailed variation pattern (variation time) of the variation effect is determined based on the selected production mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1 described later.

  The plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of the random number value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 whose effect mode is selected is different for each stop pattern table 202d. The plurality of stop pattern tables 202d are prepared in order to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the variable effect depending on whether or not the variable effect is achieved, the game state, and the number of holding balls. That is, (1) a big hit occurs in the variation effect of the acquired third symbol, or (2) the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a "probability variation state", a "time reduction state", or a "normal game state". This is because the selection ratio of the effect mode is changed depending on whether or not (3) the number of pending balls of the variable effect that is held is (3).

  This is because, as the first reason, the degree of expectation of a big hit is changed for each effect mode. That is, when the jackpot lottery is won and when the jackpot lottery is missed, a stop pattern, that is, a "non-reach" effect mode, a "normal reach" effect mode, a "super reach" effect mode, and a "special reach" effect By configuring the selection ratios of the modes to be different, the expectation level of a big hit is changed for each effect mode. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot lottery is won, it is configured to easily select the "super reach" effect mode or the "special reach" effect mode, and when the jackpot lottery is not won, the "non-reach" effect is produced. A mode or a "normal reach" effect mode is easily selected.

  By configuring in this way, the "super reach" effect mode and the "special reach" effect mode can be a big hit easily, and the "normal reach" effect mode and the "non-reach" effect mode are hard to hit. It can be an effect or an effect without a big hit, and the jackpot expectation degree can be differentiated for each effect mode. Therefore, when a production that is likely to be a big hit appears in the fluctuating production, it suggests to the player that there is a high possibility that a big jackpot will occur while the production that is easy to make a big hit is performed, and enhances the interest of the game. There is.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, specifically, when the acquired lottery result is a big hit, the stop pattern table 202d in which it is easy to select an effect that is easy to hit and hard to select an effect that is hard to hit (That is, the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 (see FIG. 14)) is configured to select a production mode (stop pattern) that is a rough content of the variation production. On the other hand, when the obtained lottery result is a loss, it is difficult to select an effect that is likely to be a big hit, and a stop pattern table 202d (that is, a variation pattern table for losing 202e1 (refer to FIG. 13) that is difficult to be selected. )), The production mode (stop pattern) of the variation production is selected. Thereby, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect, if the effect that is likely to be a big hit is being executed, a big hit is likely to occur in the fluctuating effect, and an effect that is hard to be a big hit is executed. If it is, the big hit is less likely to occur in the variation effect, and by providing a difference in the big hit expected value for each effect mode (stop pattern), it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the execution of the variation effect.

  Also, as a second reason, the first special opening 64 in the state where the number of waiting times for the variation effect of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, or the number of waiting times for the variation effect of the second special symbol is the upper limit. This is in order to reduce as much as possible the useless balls (so-called, non-lottery of special symbols due to overflow winning) due to entering the second starting opening 71 in the state of reaching.

  To be more specific, the maximum number of waiting times for the variation effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 4 and the upper limit is set, and the variation effect is executed for at least a certain period of time. In the gaming state in which the ball easily enters the second starting port 71 in the "variable state" and the "time shortening state", it is easy to reach the maximum reserved ball number of the second special symbol. In these gaming states, when the variation effect of a long variation time is selected, the ball frequently enters the second starting port 71 in the state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is reached, and the turning angle is the second starting port. Despite entering 71, the chance to get the lottery for the second special symbol cannot be obtained. Further, even in the "normal game state", when the variation effect of a long variation time is selected in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is reached, the first special symbol is retained while the variation effect is being executed. Since the number of balls is not digested, even if a ball enters the first starting opening 64 in the meantime, the lottery opportunity for the first special symbol cannot be acquired. In such a state, the player determines that the game value cannot be obtained even if the ball is inserted into the first starting opening 64, and the player is aroused for the game, and the variation effect is digested. Until the number of reserved balls can be acquired again, the shooting of the balls is stopped and the game is interrupted.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a game state in which it is easy to reach the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) and the maximum number of retained balls is close (or coincides). With respect to the number of reserved balls, it is configured to select the effect mode of the variable effect based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a short variable time is easily selected. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the ball entering the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 in the state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) has been reached. it can.

  Further, as a third reason, when the number of waiting times for the variation effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is small, the variation effect is set by setting the execution time of the variation effect to be long and delaying the end of the variation effect. This is to keep the running state for a long time. More specifically, when the number of balls to be held for the variation effect is small (absent), a ball is newly inserted into either the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 within the variation time of the variation effect being executed. If the ball is not made to move, the next variation effect cannot be started, and a demo screen or the like must be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the player does not produce a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 despite shooting a ball and playing the game, the player can obtain the interest related to the jackpot lottery that the player is seeking. Instead, it arouses the game. Further, the player recognizes that the ball is difficult to enter the first starting opening 64 or the second starting opening 71 because the variation effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 81, There is a possibility that the game on the pachinko machine 10 is stopped because it is determined that the game value is difficult to obtain.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to select the effect mode of the variable effect based on the stop pattern table 202d in which the long variable time is easily selected when the number of balls to hold the variable effect is small. There is. As a result, it is possible to configure a situation in which the variation effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 81 so that it is unlikely to occur, and to keep the execution state of the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 for a long time.

  Here, the details of the hold number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the reservation number table 202c. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variation effect is performed based on the ball entering the first starting opening 64 or the second starting opening 71, whether or not the variation effect is correct, Based on the game state at that time and the total pending number of the variation effects of special figure 1 and special figure 2 at that time as well, the holding number table 202c is referred to and one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d4 is selected. Is configured. Then, the rough effect mode of the variable effect is determined based on any of the selected stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d4 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3.

  Specifically, as shown in the reserved number table 202c of FIG. 10, the total reserved number of balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is "1 to 3" at the time of the loss extraction of the "normal game state". In the case of "," or at the time of the loss extraction of "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" and the total number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is "1", the stop pattern The A table 202d1 (see FIG. 11A) of the table 202d is selected.

  In addition, at the time of loss extraction of "normal game state", if the total number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is "4 to 8", or "probability change state" or "time reduction" If the total number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is “2 to 8” at the time of extracting the “state”, the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d (FIG. 11B). (See) is selected.

  On the other hand, in the "normal gaming state", when all jackpots are won (ie, "15 round V open jackpot", "7 round V open jackpot", "15 round V close jackpot" and "7 round V close jackpot" At the time of extraction. The same applies to the following.) And when the total number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is "1 to 3", or in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state" In the case where the total number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is “1” at the time of winning all the jackpots, the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 12 (a)) Is selected.

  Further, in the "normal game state", when the total number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is "4 to 8" at the time of winning all jackpots, or "probability fluctuation state" In the "time reduction state", when the total number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is "2 to 8" at the time of winning all the jackpots, the stop pattern table 202d D table 202d4 (see FIG. 12B) is selected.

  That is, both when the jackpot is won and when the jackpot is not won (that is, at the time of losing), either of the stop pattern tables 202d (A table 202d1, based on the number of reserved balls and the gaming state at that time) B table 202d2, C table 202d3 or D table 202d4) is selected.

  Next, each stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a stop pattern table 202d that can be selected at the time of losing, and FIG. 11A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d. (B) is the figure which showed typically an example of B table 202d2 of stop pattern table 202d. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of a big hit, and FIG. 12 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d. 12B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, in the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each "non-reach (normal)" effect mode is set to "0" to "74". , The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach (normal)" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach (normal)" effect mode Is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach (normal)" effect mode is set to "98" and "99".

  In the A table 202d1, a "non-reach (shortening)" effect mode, a "normal reach (shortening)" effect mode, a "super reach (shortening)" effect mode, and a "special reach (shortening)" effect mode (hereinafter referred to as "non-reach (shortening)" The “reach (shortening)” effect mode, the “normal reach (shortening)” effect mode, the “super reach (shortening)” effect mode, and the “special reach (shortening)” effect mode may be collectively referred to as “shortening effect mode”. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to (Yes), and it is set so that any shortening effect mode is not selected.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11B, in the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (shortening)" effect mode is "0" to "74". , The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach (shortening)" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the stop pattern selection counter corresponding to the "super reach (shortening)" effect mode The range of C3 is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach (shortening)" effect mode is set to "98,99".

  In the B table 202d2, "non-reach (normal)" effect mode, "normal reach (normal)" effect mode, "super reach (normal)" effect mode, and "special reach (normal)" effect mode (hereinafter, "non-reach (normal)" effect mode) The “reach (normal)” effect mode, the “normal reach (normal)” effect mode, the “super reach (normal)” effect mode and the “special reach (normal)” effect mode may be collectively referred to as the “normal effect mode”. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to (Yes), and it is set so that any normal effect mode is not selected.

  That is, in the A table 202d1, 75% of the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode, 20% of the "normal reach (normal)" effect mode, 3% of the "super reach (normal)" effect mode, and "special reach (normal)" ) ”The effect mode is set to be 2%. Further, in the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (shortening)" effect mode is 75%, the "normal reach (shortening)" effect mode is 20%, the "super reach (shortening)" effect mode is 3%, and the "special reach (shortening)" mode. ) ”The effect mode is set to be 2%.

  That is, in the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode is selected, and in the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode. Is configured. Further, in the A table 202d1, the "normal reach (normal)" effect mode is selected, and in the B table 202d2, the "normal reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected instead of the "normal reach (normal)" effect mode. Has been done. Further, in the A table 202d1, the "super reach (normal)" effect mode is selected, and in the B table 202d2, the "super reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected instead of the "super reach (normal)" effect mode. Is configured. Further, in the A table 202d1, the "special reach (normal)" effect mode is selected, and in the B table 202d2, the "special reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected instead of the "special reach (normal)" effect mode. Is configured.

  Therefore, the A table 202d1 selects the normal effect mode in the predetermined effect mode, and the B table 202d2 selects the shortened effect mode in the predetermined effect mode. Therefore, the A table 202d1 is selected compared to the B table 202d2. It can be said that the variation time of the variation effect is relatively long. In other words, it can be said that the B table 202d2 is likely to have a shorter variation time of the selected variation effect than the A table 202d1.

  In this way, when the lost lottery result is extracted, the effect mode of the variable effect is selected based on the number of holding balls of the pending variable effect. For example, when the number of balls to be held in the variable effect is large, the “non-reach (shortening)” effect mode in which the variable effect time is short is selected. As a result, when the number of holding balls of the variable effect is large, the execution time of the variable effect is shortened and the number of times of the variable effect is increased, so that the execution efficiency of the variable effect can be increased.

  Further, for example, in the case where the number of balls to be held for the variable effect is small, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first starting opening 64 or the second starting opening 71, a "non-reach (shortening)" effect mode is used. A "non-reach (normal)" effect mode having a long variable effect time is selected. As a result, it is possible to perform the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode having a longer variable effect time than when the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected. Therefore, the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 It becomes easier to secure the time for the ball to enter the ball, and by increasing the possibility that a new starting winning will occur during the execution time of the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, the situation in which the variation effect is being executed Can be maintained.

  In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d that is selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variation effect is different in selecting the effect mode in the variation effect of the loss, but the first start opening 64 is used. Alternatively, substantially the same effect mode is selected by the determination of the variation effect based on the time of entry of the ball into the second starting opening 71 and the determination of the variation effect based on the start of the variation effect based on the entry of the ball. Is configured.

  Specifically, in the case of a variation effect of loss, one of the A table 202d1 and the B table 202d2 is configured to be selected based on the number of holding balls of the variation effect, but the A table 202d1 is selected. And B table 202d2, "non-reach (normal)" performance mode or "non-reach (shortened)" performance mode, "normal reach (normal)" performance mode or "normal reach (shortened)" performance mode, "super reach (normal)" ) ”Production mode or“ super reach (shortening) ”production mode, or the value of the stop pattern counter C3 assigned to the“ special reach (normal) ”production mode or“ special reach (shortening) ”production mode is the same. It is set.

  That is, it differs only in whether the normal effect mode or the shortened effect mode is selected in each effect mode, based on the number of holding balls of the variable effect, and only the time of the variable element of "high speed change" is different. Then, the substantially same rendering mode is selected. Therefore, the effect mode selected at the time of winning a start and the effect mode selected at the start of variation are substantially the same (same type) even when the game state changes (for example, the number of reserved balls increases). Is selected. As a result, even if a pre-reading notice such as "preliminary change notice" is given based on the presentation mode selected at the time of winning the start prize, the contents of the variation production to be executed are substantially the same (the same kind), In the fluctuating effect that is the subject of the advance notice, it is possible to execute an effect in which no discrepancy occurs with respect to the content of the advance notice.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 12A, in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach (normal)" effect mode is set to "0" to "4". The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach (normal)" effect mode is set to "5" to "39", and the stop pattern selection counter corresponding to the "special reach (normal)" effect mode The range of C3 is set to "40" to "99".

  The C table 202d3 is the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of a big hit, and since "reach display" is always generated, the "non-reach" effect mode is not selected. Further, in the C table 202d3, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to each shortening effect mode, and it is set so that any shortening effect mode is not selected.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 12B, in the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach (shortening)" effect mode is "0" to "4". The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 that is set and corresponds to the "super reach (shortening)" effect mode is set to "5" to "39", and the stop pattern selection counter corresponding to the "special reach (shortening)" effect mode The range of C3 is set to "40" to "99".

  Like the C table 202d3, the D table 202d4 is a stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of a big hit, and since "reach display" is always generated, the "non-reach" effect mode is not selected. Further, in the D table 202d4, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to each normal effect mode, and it is set so that any normal effect mode is not selected.

  Therefore, in the C table 202d3, the selection ratio is 5% for the "normal reach (normal)" effect mode, 35% for the "super reach (normal)" effect mode, and 60% for the "special reach (normal)" effect mode. Is set. Further, in the D table 202d4, the selection ratio is 5% for the "normal reach (shortening)" effect mode, 35% for the "super reach (shortening)" effect mode, and 60% for the "special reach (shortening)" effect mode. Is set.

  Therefore, the C table 202d3 is selected in the normal effect mode and the D table 202d4 is selected in the shortened effect mode, so that the C table 202d3 has a relatively long fluctuation time of the selected variable effect as compared with the D table 202d4. It can be said that it is easy to become. In other words, it can be said that the D table 202d4 tends to have a shorter variation time of the selected variation effect than the C table 202d3.

  In this way, even when the jackpot lottery result is extracted, as in the case where the lost lottery result is extracted, the effect mode of the variable effect is selected based on the number of holding balls of the pending variable effect. Constitute. For example, when the number of balls to be held for the variable effect is large, the "special reach (shortening)" effect mode in which the variable effect time is short is selected. As a result, when the number of holding balls of the variable effect is large, the execution time of the variable effect is shortened and the number of times of the variable effect is increased, so that the execution efficiency of the variable effect can be increased.

  Further, for example, when the number of balls to be held in the variable effect is small, in order to secure a time for the ball to enter the first starting opening 64 or the second starting opening 71, a "special reach (shortening)" effect mode is used. A "special reach (normal)" effect mode having a long variable effect time is selected. As a result, it is possible to perform the normal effect mode having a longer variable effect time than when the shortened effect mode is selected, and thus it becomes easier to secure the time for the ball to enter the first starting opening 64 or the second starting opening 71. By increasing the possibility that a new start winning will occur during the execution time of the fluctuating effect on the third symbol display device 81, the situation in which the fluctuating effect is being executed can be maintained.

  In addition, in the first embodiment, even when selecting the effect mode in the jackpot variation effect, the stop pattern table 202d selected based on the number of reserved balls of the variable effect is different, similarly to the selection of the effect aspect in the variation effect of the loss. Although it is configured as described above, the change effect determination based on the ball entering the first starting opening 64 or the second start opening 71 and the change effect determining based on the start of the variable effect based on the entering ball are performed. The substantially same presentation mode is selected.

  Specifically, in the case of a jackpot variation effect, either the C table 202d3 or the D table 202d4 is configured to be selected based on the number of balls held in the variation effect, but the C table 202d3 is selected. And D table 202d4, a "normal reach (normal)" effect mode or a "normal reach (shortened)" effect mode, a "super reach (normal)" effect mode or a "super reach (shortened)" effect mode, or a "special reach" The values of the stop pattern counters C3 assigned to the (normal) effect mode or the "special reach (shortening)" effect mode are set to be the same.

  That is, it differs only in whether the normal effect mode or the shortened effect mode is selected in each effect mode, based on the number of holding balls of the variable effect, and only the time of the variable element of "high speed change" is different. Then, the substantially same (same type) effect mode is selected. Therefore, the effect mode selected at the time of winning a start and the effect mode selected at the start of variation are substantially the same (same type) even when the game state changes (for example, the number of reserved balls increases). Is selected. As a result, even when a pre-reading notice such as "preliminary change notice" is given based on the presentation mode selected at the time of winning the start prize, the contents of the variation production to be executed are substantially the same, and the target of the pre-reading notice is In the variable effect that has become, it is possible to execute an effect in which no discrepancy occurs with respect to the content of the prefetching notice.

  From the above, the selection ratio is high in the order of "Special reach" effect mode> "Super reach" effect mode> "Normal reach" effect mode in the variable effect when jackpot is won, and "Normal reach" effect mode in the variable effect when lost. The selection ratios are set to be higher in the order of> "Super reach" effect mode> "Special reach" effect mode. Therefore, the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance of each "reach display" is highly likely to appear the jackpot display result in the order of "special reach" effect mode> "super reach" effect mode> "normal reach" effect mode. Configured to be. Thereby, the player's expectation level for the jackpot can be shown by the effect mode of the variable effect, and the player can enjoy the feeling of uplifting to the jackpot in accordance with the effect mode of the variable effect performed by the player.

  Also, by determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed, based on the win / fail of the variable effect, the game state at that time, and the number of holding balls of the variable effect at that time, the situation in which the game is being performed is determined. Based on this, by shortening the execution time of the fluctuating effect and increasing the number of times the fluctuating effect is executed, it is possible to select an effect mode that improves the execution efficiency of the fluctuating effect.

  In addition, when the number of balls to be held for the variable effect is large, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the variable element of "slow speed change" is omitted in each effect mode. Further, the stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the selection rates of the respective effect modes are completely different depending on the number of balls reserved for the variable effect. However, when the selection rate of each effect mode is different depending on the number of holding balls of the fluctuating effect, the number of holding balls at the time of pre-reading notice execution decision, and The number of holding balls at the time of execution of the variable effect which is the target of the prefetch notice may be different. In such a case, it is necessary to perform a process for maintaining the consistency between the contents of the advance notice and the contents of the variation effect.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the drive cycle of the V distribution drive solenoid 73c that opens and closes the V winning opening 74a (see FIG. 4) is set to "20 seconds". Specifically, the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is switched on and off every "10 seconds", and the distribution plate 73a driven by the V distribution drive solenoid 73c causes the left path 74 having the V winning opening 74a. The state (see FIG. 4) is opened to close the right side path 75 (see FIG. 4) (see FIG. 4C), and the state where the left side path 74 is closed and the right side path 75 is opened (FIG. 4 (b)). ) See) and are configured to be switched alternately. Therefore, depending on whether the variation effect to be executed is performed in the normal variation mode or the shortened variation mode that is performed in a time shorter than the normal variation mode by "10 seconds", the V winning device is determined by the variation result of the variation effect. When 72 is opened, it is configured to change whether or not a ball flows into the V winning opening 74a.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by "1" in order within the range of "0 to 99", for example, and then return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99"). The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 36). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting opening 64, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 at that time is provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting opening 64. It is stored in the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reservation area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the first reservation first to fourth areas. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting opening 71, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 at that time is provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting opening 71. It is stored in the variation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reservation area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the obtained second reservation first to fourth areas.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is used to determine a detailed fluctuation time (rough fluctuation pattern) of fluctuation effect. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, in the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3, uses the value of the change type counter CS1 and the change pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202 for detailed operation. Determine the fluctuation time. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a more detailed symbol variation mode. Also, the presence / absence of execution of the notice effect and the execution mode of the notice effect (for example, a mini character notice, a cut-in notice, etc.) are determined.

  In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a rough variation pattern of the variation effect and determines only the variation time. With such a configuration, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 does not need to perform detailed control such as advance notice lottery necessary to execute the variation effect, and thus the processing of the MPU 201 relating to the variation effect can be reduced. it can. Further, the main controller 110 does not need to prepare the commands for all the variation patterns of the variation effect, and the ROM capacity of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Further, in the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the variation effect is produced by determining a detailed variation pattern in the variation effect based on the variation time (rough variation pattern) determined by the main controller 110. You can increase the freedom to choose. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 whose game state changes every moment, it is possible to select or change the effect contents of the variable effect at any time in response to the change, and it is possible to execute an appropriate effect in accordance with the game state. it can.

  Here, details of the variation pattern table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. This pachinko machine 10, as the variation pattern table 202e, the variation pattern table 202e1 for the loss, which is commonly used in all gaming states when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are lost, and the first special symbol and With the big hit variation pattern table 202e2 for the big hit of the second special symbol, which is commonly used in all the gaming states.

  FIG. 13 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the variation pattern for losing pattern 202e1 stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the variation pattern table for big hits 202e2 stored in the ROM 202. It is a figure. As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the variation pattern tables 202e1 and 202e2 are divided into groups based on the selected presentation mode.

  Specifically, for the "E0: non-reach (shortening)" and "non-reach (normal)" productions, which are referred to when the "non-reach (shortening)" production mode is determined as the production mode at the time of loss. For "E1: non-reach (normal)" referred to when the mode is determined, for "E2: normal reach (normal)" referenced when the "normal reach (normal)" effect mode is determined, "E3: Super reach (normal)" referred to when the "super reach (normal)" effect mode is determined, and "E4 referred to when" Special reach (normal) "effect mode is determined. : "Special reach (normal)", "E5: Normal reach (shortening)" for reference when the "normal reach (shortening)" effect mode is determined, and "Super reach (shortening)" effect mode are determined Taba It is divided into "E6: Super reach (shortening)" for reference and "E7: Special reach (shortening)" for when the "special reach (shortening)" effect mode is determined. (See Figure 13).

  Further, as an effect mode at the time of a big hit, "E8: normal reach (normal)" for "E8: normal reach (normal)" referred to when the "normal reach (normal)" effect mode is determined and "super reach (normal)" effect mode are determined. "E9: Super reach (normal)" referred to in the case, "EA: Special reach (normal)" referred to when the "special reach (normal)" effect mode is determined, and "normal reach ( "Shortening)" for "EB: normal reach (shortening)" that is referred to when the production mode is determined, and "EC: super reach (shortening) that is referred to when the" super reach (shortening) "production mode is determined. ) ”And“ Special reach (shortening) ”for reference when the effect mode is decided (“ ED: Special reach (shortening) ”) (FIG. 14). Irradiation).

  Then, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups (see FIGS. 13 and 14).

  In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area of the first holding ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is not a jackpot value (jackpot random number value), that is, If it is a value that causes a loss, refer to the holding number table 202c, select the stop pattern table 202d based on the game state at that time and the holding ball number at that time, and the same holding area The effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in (4) and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, the group to be referred to in the variation pattern table for loss 202e1 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the variation pattern table for loss 202e1, the variation pattern (variation time. Hereinafter, the “variation pattern” is referred to as “variation time”) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area. Of course, it can be replaced.) Is determined as the variation pattern in the variation effect suspended in the suspension area.

  In the variation pattern table for loss 202e1 which is referred to when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are lost, "E0: non-reach (shortening)" includes "" high-speed variation (3 seconds) "for the entire variation time. There is one variation pattern of "only variation elements of" short) ".

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 13, the variation pattern in “E0: non-reach (shortening)” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 are associated only with the variation element “high-speed variation (short)” (FIGS. 13 and 14). , "0 to 99", and only "variable elements of" high speed variation (short) "" are set to be selectable.

  That is, in any gaming state, if the "non-reach (shortening)" effect mode is selected in the variation pattern table for loss 202e1 that is referred to when the variable effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation type counter "Only variable elements of" high speed fluctuation (short) "are associated with all possible values (" 0 to 99 ") of CS1. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (short)" effect mode in the variable effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, "only the variable element of" high speed fluctuation (short) "is always selected as the fluctuation pattern.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 15, each variable element that constitutes the fluctuation pattern will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of the effect time for each variable element of the variable effect. As described above, the variable element is one unit element that constitutes each effect executed in the variable effect, and one variable effect is configured by combining the variable elements. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the variable elements, the variable elements of “high-speed fluctuation (long)”, the variable elements of “high-speed fluctuation (short)” (hereinafter, the variable elements of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” and "Variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "may be collectively abbreviated as" variable elements of "high-speed fluctuation" "," variable elements of "slow-speed fluctuation", variable elements of "pseudo-ren", There are provided a "normal reach" variable element, a "super reach" variable element, a "special reach" variable element, and a "re-change" variable element.

  As described above, the variable elements of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" and the variable elements of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" are fluctuations that scroll rapidly at high speed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the contents of the third symbol. Is an element. The variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" is performed for 13 seconds at the beginning of the variable effect when the normal effect mode is selected, and the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" is the shortened effect mode. When selected, "3 seconds" is performed at the beginning of the variable effect (see FIG. 15). When the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” or the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (short)” is finished, the variable element of “slow-speed fluctuation” described later is started (executed) or “ The fluctuating element of "pseudo-run" is started (executed), or the fluctuating effect is ended as it is.

  The variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" is visually recognized by the player after the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" in the variable effect performed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 5A) of the third symbol display device 81. It is a variable element that scrolls the third symbol at a low speed at a possible speed. The variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" is performed "2 seconds" after the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" except for the "non-reach (shortening)" effect mode (see FIG. 15).

  In the variable element of this "low-speed fluctuation", while letting the player recognize the display content of the third symbol, the left symbol column Z1 → the right symbol column Z3 → the middle symbol column Z2 (see FIG. 5 (a)) in the third order. The symbol is stopped and displayed. When the same third symbol is stopped in the left symbol column Z1 and the right symbol column Z3, it develops into a variable element of "normal reach" as "reach display" occurs, while the left symbol column Z1 and the right symbol column Z3. If a different third symbol is stopped in (excluding a chance eye symbol described later), the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, and the variation effect is finished (to "quasi-link" described later). Except when developing). In this variable element of "low speed fluctuation", the time when "reach display" is established and the middle symbol row Z2 changes by several frames, and the time when "reach display" is not established and the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped And are configured to have the same time.

  Therefore, in the effect modes other than the "non-reach (shortening)" effect mode, the variable elements of "low speed fluctuation" are changed after "13 seconds" of the variable elements of "high speed fluctuation (long)" or "high speed fluctuation". The variation element of "variation (short)" is performed for "3 seconds" and then "2 seconds". Then, in the variable element of "low speed fluctuation", each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 5A) is stopped in order, and "miss display", "reach display" or "chance symbol" described later is displayed. Appearing, the variable element of the "slow fluctuation" ends.

  In addition, in the variable element of "slow speed fluctuation", when "Loss display" is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation effect is finished and displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 (see FIG. 5B) of the cockpit display area Db. The execution pattern that is being deleted is deleted.

  The "quasi-link" variable element is a variable element that executes the "high-speed variable" variable element again when a predetermined stop line is provisionally displayed in the "low-speed variable" variable element. Say. That is, in the variable element of "low speed fluctuation", when the right symbol row Z3 is stopped, the third symbol of a number "+1" larger than the third symbol stopped and displayed in the left symbol column Z1 is stopped and displayed (for example, left symbol "7" in the row Z1, the third symbol of "8" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol column Z3), and then when the middle symbol column Z2 is stopped, it is the same as the third symbol stopped and displayed in the left symbol column Z1. The third symbol is a stop display (for example, "7" in the left symbol column Z1 and the middle symbol column Z2, the third symbol of "8" in the right symbol column Z3 is stopped and displayed (that is, the stop eye "778"). In the following, when the combination is referred to as a "chance eye symbol"), the variable element of "pseudo run" is executed, and the execution symbol (held symbol) displayed in the cockpit display area Db is not digested. , The fluctuation production will continue.

  This "pseudo-run" variation element is performed "5 seconds" after the "slow variation" variation element. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variable element of "pseudo-relation" is executed, the symbol that always generates "reach display" (for example, the stop symbol displayed in the left symbol column Z1 and the right symbol column Z3) The situation where the three symbols are the same and the fluctuation of the middle symbol column Z2 is continued. Hereinafter, referred to as "reach forming symbol".) Is displayed so that the variable element of "normal reach" described later is developed. It is configured. In addition, in the variable element of "pseudo-relation", the "reach forming symbol" may not be displayed, and the "miss display" may be displayed to end the variable effect.

  Therefore, before the variable element of “pseudo-relation” is executed, in the variable element of “slow speed fluctuation”, the chance pattern is stopped and displayed, so that the variable element of “high speed fluctuation” is changed again from the chance pattern. After the start, an effect as if the variable effect was started once again is executed.

  In the first embodiment, a maximum of one "pseudo-series" effect can be executed in the variable effect. It should be noted that in one variation effect, the variation element of “pseudo-relation” may be configured to be executed a plurality of times.

  The variable element of "normal reach" is the variable element of "low speed fluctuation" or the variable element of "pseudo-relation", and the two symbol rows that stop first (that is, the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3) It is a variable element that is performed when the "reach forming symbol" is stopped and displayed, and shows whether or not a big hit occurs depending on the variation result of the remaining symbol rows (that is, the middle symbol row Z2). The "normal reach" variation element is performed "10 seconds" after the "slow variation" variation element or the "pseudo-relation" variation element.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after executing the variable element of "normal reach", the pattern of directly displaying "miss display", the pattern of directly displaying "big hit display", and the "super reach" There are a pattern that develops into a variable element, a pattern that develops into a variable element of "Special Reach", and a pattern that executes a variable element of "re-variation" after displaying a temporary "miss display". Has been done.

  The variable element of "super reach" is developed and executed when the "miss display" in the variable element of "normal reach" is not stopped and the fluctuation of the remaining symbol sequence is continued, and in the third symbol display device 81. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit occurs by performing a predetermined effect (for example, "competition effect"). This "super reach" variation element is performed "10 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variation element.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of “super reach”, a pattern that directly displays “miss display”, a pattern that directly displays “big hit display”, and a temporary A pattern for executing the variable element of "re-variation" after displaying "missing display" is prepared.

  The variation element of "special reach" is developed and executed when variation of the remaining symbol row is continued without stopping "miss display" in the variation element of "normal reach", and in the third symbol display device 81. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit occurs by performing a special effect (for example, "battle effect") different from the above-mentioned predetermined effect. The variable element of "special reach" is performed "20 seconds" after the variable element of "normal reach" is executed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after executing the variable element of "special reach", a pattern that directly shows "miss display", a pattern that directly shows "big hit display", and a temporary A pattern of "re-changing" after displaying "missing display" is prepared.

  It should be noted that it is configured to develop into a "super reach" variable element or a "special reach" variable element after execution of the "normal reach" variable element, but instead of this configuration, reach formation after "slow fluctuation" When the symbol is stopped, the variable element of "normal reach" may not be passed and the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" may be suddenly developed. Further, the variable element of "special reach" may be configured to be executed after the variable element of "super reach" is executed.

  The variation element of “re-variation” is a variation element that is developed and executed after the “miss display” appears once in any of the “reach indications”, and the “big hit display” appears. The variation element of this "re-variation" is performed "10 seconds" after any "reach display".

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a pattern in which "big hit display" appears after the variable element "re-variation" is executed is prepared.

  In addition, the variable element of this "re-variation" is configured to occur only when the jackpot game is won. That is, in the case of "missing display", the changing element of "re-change" is not executed. This is because the variable element of "re-variation" is the variable element that changes the temporarily displayed "miss display" to any of the "big hit display", so in the case of "miss display" that is not won for the big hit If you go to, there will be discrepancies in the production. Therefore, this "re-variation" variation element is selected only in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 (see FIG. 14) and not selected in the loss variation pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 13).

  Returning to FIG. 13, the description will be continued. In the variation pattern table for loss 202e1, "E1: non-reach (normal)" has a variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + variation element of "low-speed variation" with an overall variation time of "15 seconds". One variation pattern (variation time; hereinafter, it is naturally possible to replace the “variation pattern” with “variation time”).

  In the example shown in FIG. 13, the variation pattern in "E1: non-reach (normal)" and the value of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with each other by the variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + variation of "low-speed variation". "0 to 99" for "element", and only "variable element of" high speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable element of" slow speed fluctuation "" is set to be selectable.

  That is, in any gaming state, when the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode is selected in the variation pattern table for loss 202e1 which is referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed, the variation type counter “Variable elements of“ high speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable elements of“ low speed fluctuation ”” are associated with all possible values of CS1 (“0 to 99”). That is, in the case of the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode in the variation effect of each special symbol, the variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + "variation element of" slow-speed variation "is always selected as the variation pattern. ..

  Next, in the variation pattern table 202e1 for loss, "E2: normal reach (normal)" has a variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + variation element of "low-speed variation" with an overall variation time of "25 seconds". + "Variable elements of" normal reach "" and "variable elements of" high-speed variation (long) "+ variation elements of" slow-rate variation "+ variation elements of" pseudo-relation "+" normal reach "with overall variation time of" 30 seconds " “Variation element of“ ”and two fluctuation patterns are selectably prepared, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13, the variation pattern in "E2: normal reach (normal)" and the value of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with each other by a variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + a variation element of "low-speed variation". + "Variables of" normal reach "", "0-29", "variables of" fast fluctuation (long) "+ variation of" slow fluctuations "+ variation of" pseudo-relation "+ fluctuations of" normal reach " “30-99” for “element”.

  That is, in the variation pattern table for loss 202e1 which is referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is selected, when the "normal reach" effect mode which is the normal effect mode is selected, "" high speed fluctuation (long ) ”Variable element +“ low speed variable element ”+“ normal reach ”variable element” fluctuation pattern is 30%, “high speed variable (long)” variable element + “low speed variable element” + “pseudo” The variation pattern of “variation element of“ run ”+ variation element of“ normal reach ”” is set to be selected at a rate of 70%.

  Next, in the variation pattern table for loss 202e1, the variation factor of "high-speed variation (long)" + variation of "low-speed variation" with the total variation time of "35 seconds" in "E3: super reach (normal)" "Factor +" Normal reach "variation element +" Super reach "variation element", "Overall variation time" 40 seconds "" Fast variation (long) variation element + "Slow variation" variation element + " Two variation patterns of "variation element of" pseudo-ren "+ variation element of" normal reach "+ variation element of" super reach "are prepared in a selectable manner, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. Has been.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13, the variation pattern in “E3: super reach (normal)” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with each other by the variation element of “high-speed variation (long)” + variation of “low-speed variation”. "0 to 49" for "element +" variable element of normal reach "+" variable element of super reach "", "variable element of" high speed variation (long) "+ variable element of" slow variation "+" pseudo-ren " "Variable element +" normal reach "variable element +" super reach "variable element" is "50 to 99".

  That is, in the variation pattern table for loss 202e1 which is referred to when executing the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, when the "super reach" effect mode, which is the normal effect mode, is selected, "" high speed fluctuation ( "Long)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Normal reach" fluctuation + "Super reach" fluctuation pattern: 50%, "High speed fluctuation (long) fluctuation + The variation pattern of “variation element of“ low speed variation ”+ variation element of“ pseudo-relation ”+ variation element of“ normal reach ”+ variation element of“ super reach ”is set to be selected at a rate of 50%.

  Next, in the variation pattern table 202e1 for loss, the variation factor of "high-speed variation (long)" + variation of "low-speed variation" with "E4: Special reach (normal)" having an overall variation time of "45 seconds" "Factor +" Normal reach "variation element +" Special reach "variation element" and "50 seconds" overall variation time "Fast variation (long) variation element +" Slow variation "variation element +" Two variation patterns of “variable element of“ pseudo-relation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ special reach ”” are prepared in a selectable manner, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. Has been.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13, the association between the variation pattern in “E4: Special reach (normal)” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “variation factor of“ high-speed variation (long) ”+ variation of“ low-speed variation ”. "0 to 79" for "element + variable element of" normal reach "+ variable element of" special reach "", variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "slow-speed fluctuation" + "quasi-link" “Fluctuation element of“ + variation element of “normal reach” + variation element of “special reach” ”is“ 80 to 99 ”.

  That is, when the "special reach" effect mode, which is the normal effect mode, is selected in the variation pattern table for loss 202e1 which is referred to when the variable effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed, "" high speed fluctuation ( 80% of the fluctuation pattern of “long fluctuation” + “low speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” fluctuation coefficient + “special reach” fluctuation element + “high speed fluctuation (long) fluctuation element +” The variation pattern of “variation element of“ low-speed variation ”+ variation element of“ pseudo-relation ”+ variation element of“ normal reach ”+ variation element of“ special reach ”is set to be selected at a rate of 20%.

  Next, in the variation pattern table for loss 202e1, "E5: normal reach (shortening)" has a variation element of "high-speed variation (short)" + variation element of "low-speed variation" with an overall variation time of "15 seconds". + "Variable elements of" normal reach "" and "variable elements of" high-speed variation (short) "+ variation elements of" slow variation "+ variation elements of" pseudo-relation "+" normal reach "with overall variation time of" 20 seconds " “Variation element of“ ”and two fluctuation patterns are selectably prepared, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13, the variation pattern in "E5: normal reach (shortening)" and the value of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with each other by a variation element of "high-speed variation (short)" + a variation element of "low-speed variation". + "Variable elements of" normal reach "", "0 to 29", "variable elements of" high speed fluctuation (short) "+" variable elements of low speed variation "+" variable elements of "pseudo-relation" + variation of "normal reach" “30-99” for “element”.

  That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode, which is the shortening effect mode, is selected in the variation pattern table for loss 202e1 which is referred to when the variable effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed, "" high speed fluctuation (short ) ”Variable element +“ low speed variable element ”+“ normal reach ”variable element” variation pattern is 30%, “high speed variable (short)” variable element + “slow variable” variable element + “pseudo” The variation pattern of “variable element of“ run ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”” is set to be selected at a rate of 70%.

  Therefore, in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of losing, "E2: normal reach (normal)", which is the normal effect mode, and "E5: normal reach (shortened)", which is the shortened effect mode, are variable factors of "high-speed fluctuation". The execution times of other variable elements are the same, and the lottery ratios of the presence / absence of variable elements of “pseudo-relation” are also the same. Therefore, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of losing is selected, the "normal reach" effect mode of the variable effect is changed according to the number of balls to hold the variable effect at the start of the variable effect that is the "normal reach" effect mode. It is determined whether or not the variation time is shortened by "10 seconds" (hereinafter, the function of reducing the variation time of the variation effect depending on the number of reserved balls may be referred to as "variation shortening function").

  Next, in the variation pattern table for loss 202e1, the variation factor of "high-speed variation (short)" + variation of "low-speed variation" with the total variation time of "25 seconds" in "E6: super reach (shortening)" "Factor +" Normal reach "variation element +" Super reach "variation element" and "30 seconds" overall variation time "Fast variation (short)" variation element + "Slow variation" variation element + " Two variation patterns of "variation element of" pseudo-ren "+ variation element of" normal reach "+ variation element of" super reach "are prepared in a selectable manner, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. Has been.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13, the variation pattern in “E6: super reach (shortening)” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with each other by a variation element of “high-speed variation (short)” + variation of “low-speed variation”. "0 to 49" for "element + variable element of" normal reach "+ variable element of" super reach ", variable element of" fast fluctuation (short) "+ variable element of" slow fluctuation "+" pseudo-ren " "Variable element +" normal reach "variable element +" super reach "variable element" is "50 to 99".

  That is, in the variation pattern table for loss 202e1 which is referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is selected, when the "super reach" effect aspect, which is the shortened effect aspect, is selected, "" high speed variation ( “Variable element of“ short ”+ variable element of“ slow fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ super reach ”is 50%, variable element of“ high speed fluctuation (short) ”+“ variable element of “high speed fluctuation (short)” The variation pattern of “variation element of“ low speed variation ”+ variation element of“ pseudo-relation ”+ variation element of“ normal reach ”+ variation element of“ super reach ”is set to be selected at a rate of 50%.

  Therefore, in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of loss, the "E3: super reach (normal)" which is the normal effect mode and the "E6: super reach (shortened)" which is the shortened effect mode are "high speed fluctuations". Only the execution times of the variable elements are different, and the execution times of the other variable elements and the lottery ratio of the presence / absence of the "pseudo-relational" variable elements are configured to be the same. Therefore, when the "super-reach" effect mode at the time of losing is selected, the "super-reach" effect mode is selected according to the number of balls to hold the variable effect at the start of the variable effect that is the "super-reach" effect mode. It is determined whether the variation time of the variation effect is shortened by "10 seconds".

  Next, in the variation pattern table for loss 202e1, the variation factor of "high-speed variation (short)" + variation of "low-speed variation" with the total variation time of "35 seconds" in "E7: Special reach (shortening)" "Factor +" Normal reach "variation element +" Special reach "variation element" and "Overall variation time of" 40 seconds "" Fast variation (short) "variation element +" Slow variation "variation element +" Two variation patterns of “variable element of“ pseudo-relation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ special reach ”” are prepared in a selectable manner, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. Has been.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 13, the association between the variation pattern in “E7: Special reach (shortening)” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is the variation element of “high-speed variation (short)” + variation of “low-speed variation”. "0 to 79" for "element +" variable element of normal reach "+" variable element of special reach "", "variable element of" high speed variation (short) "+ variable element of" slow variation "+" pseudo-ren " “Fluctuation element of“ + variation element of “normal reach” + variation element of “special reach” ”is“ 80 to 99 ”.

  That is, in the variation pattern table for loss 202e1 which is referred to when performing the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, when the "special reach" effect aspect that is the shortening effect aspect is selected, "" high speed variation ( 80% of the fluctuation pattern of “short fluctuation” + “low speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” fluctuation element + “special reach” fluctuation element + “high speed fluctuation (short) fluctuation element +” The variation pattern of “variation element of“ low-speed variation ”+ variation element of“ pseudo-relation ”+ variation element of“ normal reach ”+ variation element of“ special reach ”is set to be selected at a rate of 20%.

  Therefore, in the "special reach" effect mode at the time of losing, the "E4: special reach (normal)" that is the normal effect mode and the "E7: special reach (shortened)" that is the shortened effect mode are "high-speed fluctuation". Only the execution times of the variable elements are different, and the execution times of the other variable elements and the lottery ratio of the presence / absence of the "pseudo-relational" variable elements are configured to be the same. Therefore, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of losing is selected, it is the "special reach" effect mode in accordance with the number of balls reserved for the variable effect at the start of the variable effect that is the "special reach" effect mode. It is determined whether the variation time of the variation effect is shortened by "10 seconds".

  In this way, when each production mode is selected as the variation pattern of "reach display" at the time of losing, the time of the variable element of "high speed variation" is "10 seconds" in each normal production mode and shortened production mode. Only the difference is made, and the lottery ratios of other variable elements and fluctuation patterns are made equal. Therefore, in any of the "reach display", the variation time of the variation production that can be executed is "10 seconds" depending on the number of balls for the variation production held at the start of the variation production in which the "reach display" is executed. It is possible to change only.

  When the "non-reach" effect mode is selected as the change pattern at the time of losing, the effect mode is determined as the change pattern as it is, so that the change pattern is determined without using the change type counter CS1. You may comprise. Further, although the variation type counter CS1 alone is used for selection, a plurality of variation type counters may be used together for selection (presence or absence of advance notice display or the like).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the big hit variation pattern table 202e2, which is referred to when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are hit big, will be described. In the first embodiment, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a holding area of the first holding ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is a big jackpot, or in the second special symbol. When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area of the corresponding second holding ball storage area 203e is a jackpot value, the holding number table 202c is referred to and the game state at that time, The stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the number of reserved balls at that time, and the effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserved area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, the group to be referred to in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area is in the variation effect held in the holding area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern.

  In the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, the number of holding balls when the jackpot is not activated and the variation shortening function is not activated ("1 to 3" in "normal game state", "probability variation state" or "time reduction state" In the case of "E8: Normal reach (normal)", which is the normal effect mode selected in the case of "1". The same applies hereinafter), the entire fluctuation time of "25 seconds" and "high speed fluctuation (long)" "Fluctuation element +" Slow-speed fluctuation "fluctuation element +" Normal reach "fluctuation element", and "Fast fluctuation (long) fluctuation element +" Slow fluctuation "fluctuation element + with total fluctuation time of" 30 seconds " "Variation element of" quasi-ream "+ variation element of" normal reach "" and "variation element of" high-speed variation (long) "+ variation element of" slow-speed variation "+" normal reach "with overall variation time of" 35 seconds " Change factor + "re-change" change requirement ], "Variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "+ variable element of" pseudo-ren "+ variable element of" normal reach "+" re Four variation patterns of "variation element of" variation "are selectably prepared, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 14, the variation pattern in “E8: normal reach (normal)” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with each other by a variation element of “high-speed variation (long)” + a variation element of “slow-speed variation”. + "Variables of" normal reach "", "0-4", "variables of" fast fluctuation (long) "+" variables of low speed "+" variable of pseudo "+ fluctuations of" normal reach " "5-14" for "elements", "variable elements for" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable elements for" slow-speed fluctuation "+ variable elements for" normal reach "+ variable elements for" re-fluctuation " 15-34 ”,“ Variation element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuation” + fluctuation element of “pseudo-ren” + fluctuation element of “normal reach” + fluctuation element of “re-fluctuation” It is "35-99".

  That is, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 which is referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is selected, when the "normal reach" effect mode which is the normal effect mode is selected, "" high speed fluctuation (long ) ”Variable element +“ low speed variable element ”+“ normal reach ”variable element” fluctuation pattern is 5%, “high speed variable (long)” variable element + “low speed variable element” + “pseudo variable” 10% of the fluctuation pattern of “variable element of variable” + “variable element of“ normal reach ””, variation element of “high speed variation (long)” variation element of “slow variation” + variation element of “normal reach” + “revariation” The variation pattern of "variable element" is 20%, the variable element of "high-speed variation (long)" + the variable element of "slow-speed variation" + the variable element of "pseudo-ren" + the variable element of "normal reach" + "re-variation" " Fluctuation pattern 65 percent of variables ", is set to be selected at a rate of.

  Therefore, in the "normal reach" effect mode, which is the normal effect mode selected when the jackpot is hit, the "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "slow speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "pseudo continuous" fluctuation element + "normal reach" The variation pattern of “variation element of“ + variation element of “re-variation” ”is easily selected (65% of the whole). In addition, "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "+ variable elements of" normal reach "", "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "+ "Pseudo-ren" variation element + "normal reach" variation element "," high speed variation (long) "variation element +" slow variation "variation element +" normal reach "variation element +" re-variation "variation element By being configured so that each variation pattern of “” can be respectively selected, it is possible to provide a gaming property in which a big hit can be expected from any variation pattern.

  Next, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, when the jackpot is hit, and when the number of holding balls for which the variation shortening function is not activated is "E9: Super Reach (Normal)", which is a normal effect mode, the entire variation is included. "35 seconds" time "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable elements of" slow-speed fluctuation "+ variable elements of" normal reach "+ variable elements of" super reach "and the total fluctuation time "40 seconds" "Fast variable (long) fluctuation element +" Slow fluctuation "fluctuation element +" Pseudo-ren "fluctuation element +" Normal reach "fluctuation element +" Super reach "fluctuation element" "Fast change (long)" change factor + "Slow change" change factor + "Normal reach" change element + "Super reach" change element + "Re-change" change element" , "Variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "+ variable element of" pseudo-relation "+ variable element of" normal reach "+" super reach "with overall fluctuation time of" 50 seconds " Variable elements + variable elements of "re-variation" "are prepared in a selectable manner, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 14, the variation pattern in “E9: super reach (normal)” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with each other by the variation element of “high-speed variation (long)” + variation of “low-speed variation”. "0-9" for "element + variable element of" normal reach "+ variable element of" super reach "", variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "slow-speed fluctuation" + "pseudo-ren" "10-29", "Fast fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Slow fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" "Variable element +" super reach "variable element +" re-fluctuation variable element "" 30 to 59 "," high speed fluctuation (long) "fluctuation element +" slow fluctuation "fluctuation element + "Pseudo-ren" variable factors + "normal Change elements of the earth. "+ For the" variable factors + change elements of the "re-change" in the super reach "" has become "60 to 99", and.

  That is, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 that is referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is selected, when the "super reach" effect mode that is the normal effect mode is selected, "" high speed fluctuation ( "Long)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Normal reach" fluctuation + "Super reach" fluctuation pattern 10%, "High speed fluctuation (long) fluctuation +" 20% of the fluctuation pattern of "low speed fluctuation" + "quasi-relationship" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element "" high speed fluctuation (long) "fluctuation element +" The fluctuation pattern of "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element + "re-change" fluctuation element is 30%, and "high speed fluctuation (long) fluctuation" 40% of the fluctuation pattern of "elementary + fluctuation element of" slow fluctuation "+ fluctuation element of" quasi-ream "+ fluctuation element of" normal reach "+ fluctuation element of" super reach "+ fluctuation element of" re-change " It is set to be selected by.

  Therefore, in the "super reach" effect mode, which is the normal effect mode selected when the jackpot is hit, the "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "slow speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "pseudo continuous" fluctuation element + "normal reach" It is easy to select the variation pattern of “variation element of“ + variation element of “super reach” + variation element of “re-variation” ”(40% of the whole). In addition, "variable elements of" high speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable elements of" slow speed fluctuation "+ variable elements of" normal reach "+ variable elements of" super reach "," variable elements of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Pseudo-ream" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Super reach" fluctuation element "," High speed fluctuation (long) "fluctuation element +" Low speed fluctuation "fluctuation element Each variation pattern of "element +" normal reach "variation element +" super reach "variation element +" re-variation "variation element" can be selected, so that a big hit can be obtained from any variation pattern. Expected gameplay can be provided.

  Next, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, the entire variation is included in the "EA: Special Reach (Normal)" which is the normal effect mode selected when the jackpot and the number of holding balls in which the variation shortening function does not operate. "Variation factor of" high speed fluctuation (long) "+ fluctuation factor of" low speed fluctuation "+ fluctuation factor of" normal reach "+ fluctuation factor of" special reach "with time" 45 seconds "and total fluctuation time" "50 seconds" "Fast fluctuation (long) fluctuation element +" Slow fluctuation "fluctuation element +" Pseudo-ren "fluctuation element +" Normal reach "fluctuation element +" Special reach "fluctuation element" "Fast change (long)" change element + "Slow change" change element + "Normal reach" change element + "Special reach" change element + "Re-change" change "Factor", "Variable element of" High-speed fluctuation (long) "+ Variable element of" Slow-speed fluctuation "+ Variable element of" Pseudo-relation "+ Variable element of" Normal reach "+" Variable element of "60 seconds" Four variation patterns “variation element of“ special reach ”+ variation element of“ re-variation ”” are prepared in a selectable manner, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 14, the variation pattern in “EA: Special reach (normal)” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with each other by the variation element of “high-speed variation (long)” + variation of “low-speed variation”. "0-19" for "element + variable element of" normal reach "+ variable element of" special reach "", variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "slow-speed fluctuation" + "pseudo-ren" “Variable element +“ Normal reach ”variable element +“ Special reach ”variable element” vs. “20-39”, “High speed fluctuation (long)” variable element + “Slow speed fluctuation” variable element + “Normal reach” "Variable element + variable element of" special reach "+ variable element of" re-variation "", "40 to 69", variable element of "fast fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "slow fluctuation" + "Pseudo-ren" variation factors + " "70 to 99" for Marurichi "of variables +" variables + change elements of the "re-change" Special reach "", has become.

  That is, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 that is referred to when performing the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, when the "special reach" effect mode, which is the normal effect mode, is selected, "" high speed fluctuation ( "Long)" + "Slow fluctuations" + "Normal reach" fluctuations + "Special reach" fluctuations 20%, "Fast fluctuations (long) fluctuations +" 20% of the fluctuation pattern of “low speed fluctuation” + “quasi-relation” fluctuation element + “normal reach” fluctuation element + “special reach” fluctuation element + “high speed fluctuation (long)” fluctuation element + “ The variation pattern of "variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "+ variable elements of" normal reach "+ variable elements of" special reach "+ variable elements of" re-variation "is 30%," high-speed fluctuation (long) Variability factor + "slow variability" variability factor + "pseudo-relationship" variability factor ++ "normal reach" variability factor "special reach" variability factor + "re-variation" variability factor It is set to be selected by percentage.

  Therefore, in the "special reach" effect mode, which is the normal effect mode selected at the time of a big hit, the "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "slow speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" "Variable element +" re-variable "variable element" or "" high-speed variation (long) "variation element +" slow-speed variation "variation element +" pseudo-ren "variation element +" normal reach "variation element The variation pattern of “+ variable element of“ special reach ”+ variable element of“ re-variation ”” is easily selected (30% of the whole). In addition, "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable elements of" slow-speed fluctuation "+ variable elements of" normal reach "+ variable elements of" special reach "," variable elements of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + Each of the variation patterns of “variable element of“ slow variation ”+ variable element of“ pseudo-relationship + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “special reach” ”is configured to be selected. It is possible to provide a game that can expect a big hit from the variation pattern.

  Next, in the big hit variation pattern table 202e2, the entire variation time is included in the "EB: normal reach (shortening)" which is a shortening effect mode selected when the big hit occurs and the number of holding balls for which the variation shortening function is activated. Is "15 seconds", "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "+ variable elements of" slow-speed fluctuation "+ fluctuation elements of" normal reach "", and "" high-speed fluctuation ( “Variable element of“ short ”+ variable element of“ slow fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ pseudo-relation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”” and “high speed fluctuation (short)” with overall fluctuation time of “25 seconds” "Variable element +" slow-speed variation "variation element +" normal reach "variation element +" re-variation "variation element" and the overall variation time of "30 seconds" "high-speed variation (short) variation element" + Variable factors of "slow fluctuation" + "Suspect 4 variation patterns of “variation element of“ ren ”+ variation element of“ normal reach ”+ variation element of“ re-variation ”” are prepared in a selectable manner, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. ing.

  In the example shown in FIG. 14, the variation pattern in "EB: normal reach (shortening)" and the value of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with each other by a variation element of "high-speed variation (short)" + a variation element of "low-speed variation". + "Variables of" normal reach "", "0-4", "variables of" fast fluctuation (short) "+ variation of" slow fluctuations "+ variation of" pseudo-relation "+ fluctuations of" normal reach " "5-14" for "elements", "variable elements for" high-speed fluctuation (short) "+ variable elements for" slow-speed fluctuation "+ variable elements for" normal reach "+" re-variation variable " 15-34 ”,“ variable elements of “high-speed fluctuation (short)” + variable elements of “slow-speed fluctuation” + variable elements of “pseudo-ren” + variable elements of “normal reach” + variable elements of “re-fluctuation” It is "35-99".

  That is, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 that is referred to when performing the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, when the "normal reach" effect aspect that is the shortening effect aspect is selected, "" high speed variation (short ) "+" Slow fluctuation "fluctuation element +" Normal reach "fluctuation element" fluctuation pattern is 5%, "High speed fluctuation (short) fluctuation coefficient +" Slow fluctuation "fluctuation element +" Pseudo 10% of the fluctuation pattern of “variable element of variable” + “variable element of“ normal reach ””, variation element of “high speed variation (short)” variation element of “slow variation” + variation element of “normal reach” + “revariation” The fluctuation pattern of "variable element" is 20%, the variable element of "fast fluctuation (short)" + the variable element of "slow fluctuation" + the variable element of "pseudo-ren" + the variable element of "normal reach" + "re-variation" " Fluctuation pattern 65 percent of variables ", is set to be selected at a rate of.

  Therefore, in the "normal reach" effect mode, which is the shortening effect mode selected when the jackpot is hit, the "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "slow speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "pseudo continuous" fluctuation element + "normal reach" The variation pattern of “variation element of“ + variation element of “re-variation” ”is easily selected (65% of the whole). In addition, "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "+ variable elements of" normal reach "", "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "+ "Pseudo-ren" variation element + "normal reach" variation element "," high speed variation (long) "variation element +" slow variation "variation element +" normal reach "variation element +" re-variation "variation element By being configured so that each variation pattern of “” can be respectively selected, it is possible to provide a gaming property in which a big hit can be expected from any variation pattern.

  Further, in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of jackpot, the "E8: normal reach (normal)" which is a normal effect mode and the "EB: normal reach (abbreviated)" which is a shortened effect mode are variable elements of "high speed fluctuation". The execution time of other variable elements is different, and the lottery ratio of the presence or absence of the "quasi-relation" variable element or the presence or absence of the "re-change" variable element is also configured to be the same. There is. Therefore, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of jackpot is selected, the "normal reach" effect mode is selected according to the number of balls to hold the variable effect at the start of the variable effect that is the "normal reach" effect mode, as in the case of losing. It is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation effect is shortened by "10 seconds".

  Next, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, the entire variation is included in the "EC: Super Reach (shortening)", which is the shortening effect mode selected when the jackpot and the number of holding balls for which the variation shortening function is activated. "25 seconds" is the "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "+ variable element of" slow-speed fluctuation "+ variable element of" normal reach "+ variable element of" super reach ", and the total fluctuation time is" "30 seconds" "Fast fluctuation (short) fluctuation element +" Slow fluctuation "fluctuation element +" Pseudo-ren "fluctuation element +" Normal reach "fluctuation element +" Super reach "fluctuation element" "Fast fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "Slow fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Super reach" fluctuation element + "Re-fluctuation fluctuation" Element ”and "Fast fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "Slow fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Pseudo-relationship" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Super reach" fluctuation time of "40 seconds" Four variation patterns of “variation element + variation element of“ re-variation ”” are selectably prepared, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 14, the variation pattern in “EC: super reach (shortening)” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with each other by a variation element of “high-speed variation (short)” + variation of “low-speed variation”. "0-9" for "element +" variable element of normal reach "+ variable element of" super reach ", variable element of" high speed variation (short) "+ variable element of" slow variation "+" pseudo-ren " 10-29 "," Fast fluctuation (short) "fluctuation element +" Slow fluctuation "fluctuation element +" Normal reach " "Variable element +" super reach "variable element +" re-variation variable element "," 30 to 59 "," high-speed fluctuation (short) variable element + "slow fluctuation" variable element + "Pseudo-ren" variation factors + "normal Change elements of the earth. "+ For the" variable factors + change elements of the "re-change" in the super reach "" has become "60 to 99", and.

  That is, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 that is referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is selected, when the "super reach" effect mode that is the shortened effect mode is selected, "" high speed fluctuation ( “Variable element of“ short ”+ variable element of“ slow fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ super reach ”10%,“ high speed fluctuation (short) ”variable +“ 20% of the fluctuation pattern of "low speed fluctuation" + "quasi-relation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element + "high speed fluctuation (short) fluctuation coefficient +" 30% of the fluctuation pattern of "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element + "re-fluctuation fluctuation element", "high speed fluctuation (short) fluctuation" 40% of the fluctuation pattern of "elementary + fluctuation element of" slow fluctuation "+ fluctuation element of" quasi-ream "+ fluctuation element of" normal reach "+ fluctuation element of" super reach "+ fluctuation element of" re-change " It is set to be selected by.

  Therefore, in the "super reach" effect mode, which is the shortening effect mode selected at the time of a big hit, the "high speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "slow speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "pseudo continuous" fluctuation element + "normal reach" The variation pattern of “variable element of“ + variable element of “super reach” + variable element of “re-variation” ”is easily selected (40% of the whole). In addition, "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "+ variable elements of" slow-speed fluctuation "+ variable elements of" normal reach "+ variable elements of" super reach "," variable elements of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "pseudo-ren" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super-reach" fluctuation element "," high-speed fluctuation (short) fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element Each variation pattern of "element +" normal reach "variation element +" super reach "variation element +" re-variation "variation element" can be selected, so that a big hit can be obtained from any variation pattern. Expected gameplay can be provided.

  Further, in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of a big hit, the "E9: super reach (normal)" which is the normal effect mode and the "EC: super reach (shortened)" which is the shortened effect mode are "high speed fluctuation". Only the execution times of the variable elements differ, but the execution times of other variable elements, the presence or absence of the "quasi-relationship" variable elements, and the presence or absence of the "re-variation" variable elements are also equal. It is configured. Therefore, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of jackpot is selected, the "super reach" is selected according to the number of balls to hold the variable effect at the start of the variable effect, which is the "super reach" effect mode, as in the case of losing. It is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation production, which is the production mode, is shortened by “10 seconds”.

  Next, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, the entire variation is included in the "ED: Special reach (shortening)" which is the shortening effect mode selected when the jackpot is hit and the number of holding balls for which the variation shortening function is activated. "35 seconds" time "Fast change (short) fluctuation element +" Slow fluctuation "fluctuation element +" Normal reach "fluctuation element +" Special reach "fluctuation element" "40 seconds" "Fast change (short) fluctuation element +" Slow fluctuation "fluctuation element +" Pseudo-ren "fluctuation element +" Normal reach "fluctuation element +" Special reach "fluctuation element" "Fast change (short)" change factor + "Slow change" change factor + "Normal reach" change element + "Special reach" change element + "Re-change" change time "Fair", "Variable element of" high speed fluctuation (short) "+ Variable element of" Slow speed fluctuation "+ Variable element of" Pseudo-relation "+ Variable element of" Normal reach "+" Variable time of the whole fluctuation time is 50 seconds " Four variation patterns “variation element of“ special reach ”+ variation element of“ re-variation ”” are prepared in a selectable manner, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 14, the variation pattern in “ED: Special reach (shortening)” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with each other by the variation element of “high-speed variation (short)” + variation of “low-speed variation”. "0-19", "Fast change (short)" change element + "Slow change" change element + "Pseudo-relation" for "element +" normal reach "change element +" special reach "change element" 20 to 39 "," Fast fluctuation (short) "fluctuation element +" Slow fluctuation "fluctuation element +" Normal reach " "Variable element +" special reach "variable element +" re-variation variable element "against" 40-69 "," high-speed fluctuation (short) fluctuation element + "slow fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Pseudo-ren" variable + "70 to 99" for Marurichi "of variables +" variables + change elements of the "re-change" Special reach "", has become.

  That is, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 that is referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is selected, when the "special reach" effect mode that is the shortened effect mode is selected, "" high-speed fluctuation ( 20%, "Fast change (short)" + "Fast change (short)" + "Normal reach" change element + "Special reach" change element 20% of the fluctuation pattern of “low speed fluctuation” + “quasi-relationship” fluctuation element + “normal reach” fluctuation element + “special reach” fluctuation element + “high speed fluctuation (short) fluctuation coefficient +” 30% of the fluctuation pattern of "variable elements of" low speed fluctuation "+ variable elements of" normal reach "+ variable elements of" special reach "+ variable elements of" re-variation "," high speed fluctuation (short) " Variability factor + "slow variability" variability factor + "pseudo-relationship" variability factor ++ "normal reach" variability factor "special reach" variability factor + "re-variation" variability factor It is set to be selected by percentage.

  Therefore, in the "special reach" effect mode, which is the shortening effect mode selected at the time of a big hit, the variable elements of "high speed fluctuation (short)" + variable elements of "slow speed fluctuation" + variable elements of "normal reach" + "special reach" "Variable element +" re-variable "variable element" or "" high-speed variation (short) "variation element +" slow-speed variation "variation element +" pseudo-ren "variation element +" normal reach "variation element The variation pattern of “+ variable element of“ special reach ”+ variable element of“ re-variation ”” is easily selected (30% of the whole). In addition, “Fast change (short)” change factor + “Slow change” change factor + “Normal reach” change element + “Special reach” change factor ”,“ High speed change (short) ”change factor + Each of the variation patterns of “variable element of“ slow variation ”+ variable element of“ pseudo-relationship + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “special reach” ”is configured to be selected. It is possible to provide a game that can expect a big hit from the variation pattern.

  Further, in the "special reach" effect mode at the time of a big hit, the "EA: special reach (normal)" which is the normal effect mode and the "ED: special reach (shortened)" which is the shortened effect mode are "high speed fluctuations". Only the execution times of the variable elements differ, but the execution times of other variable elements, the presence or absence of the "quasi-relationship" variable elements, and the presence or absence of the "re-variation" variable elements are also equal. It is configured. Therefore, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of a big hit is selected, the "special reach" effect mode, which is the "special reach" effect mode, is changed depending on the number of reserved balls of the variable effect at the start of the variable effect as in the case of losing. It is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation production which is the production mode is shortened by “10 seconds”.

  In this way, when each effect mode is selected as the variation pattern of the “reach display” at the time of a big hit, the time of the variable element of “high speed fluctuation” is “10 seconds” in each of the normal effect mode and the shortened effect mode. Only the difference is made, and the lottery ratios of other variable elements and fluctuation patterns are made equal. Therefore, in any of the "reach display", the variation time of the variation production that can be executed is "10 seconds" depending on the number of balls for the variation production held at the start of the variation production in which the "reach display" is executed. It is possible to change only.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 16 to FIG. 18, when a big hit for opening the V winning device 72 occurs, the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened and the V winning opening 74a is opened by the allocating device 73. Whether or not a ball wins the V winning opening 74a will be described depending on the timing of the play. FIG. 16 is a timing chart showing whether or not a ball is detected by the V winning opening switch 74b at two timings of "timing A" and "timing B" in the case of "7 round V opening jackpot". Yes, FIG. 17 is a timing chart showing a situation in which a jackpot state occurs without shortening the variation time of the variation effect when the “7 round V open jackpot” occurs, and FIG. It is the timing chart which showed the situation where the variation time of this variation effect was shortened and the jackpot state occurred when "Round V open jackpot" occurred.

  In FIG. 16, when the “7 round V open jackpot” is won, the drive timing of the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is shown in the central portion of the drawing, and the “7 round V” is given at a predetermined “timing A” above the central portion of the drawing. A case in which an "open jackpot" has occurred is shown below the central portion of the drawing at a timing different from "timing A" (specifically, "10 seconds" after "timing A". Hereinafter referred to as "timing B". ) Indicates that a “7 round V open jackpot” has occurred.

  As described above, the V allocation drive solenoid 73c is switched on and off every "10 seconds", and a series of operations (that is, operations from being turned on to being turned on again) in a "20 second" cycle. ) Is performed repeatedly. The distribution plate 73a is opened and closed according to the turning on or off of the V distribution drive solenoid 73c, and the sphere can flow into either the left path 74 or the right path 75.

  Here, when "7 round V open jackpot" occurs at "timing A", a predetermined opening effect ("OP" in the figure; hereinafter, the opening effect may be referred to as "OP effect") is predetermined. The presentation time (“10 seconds” in the first embodiment) is performed, and then the V winning device opening / closing solenoid 72b is turned on in synchronization with the timing of starting the first round (1R. The same applies hereinafter). The V winning device opening / closing solenoid 72b is turned off after a predetermined opening time (5 seconds in the first embodiment) has passed since the V winning device opening / closing solenoid 72b was turned on. At this "timing A", while the V winning device opening / closing solenoid 72b is turned on, that is, at a timing when a ball can flow into the V winning device 72, the V sorting drive solenoid 73c is turned off. The distribution path 73a of the distribution device 73 closes the left path 74 and opens the right path 75. Therefore, if the player wins the "7 round V opening jackpot" at this "timing A", the ball can flow into the V winning device 72 based on the winning of the "7 round V opening jackpot". Since the left path 74 having the V winning opening 74a is not opened at the timing when the ball can flow into the winning device 72, the ball does not flow into the V winning opening 74a.

  On the other hand, when the “7 round V open jackpot” occurs at “timing B”, the OP effect is performed for a predetermined effect time (“10 seconds” in the first embodiment) as in the case of “timing A”, and thereafter. In synchronization with the timing when 1R is started, the V winning device opening / closing solenoid 72b is turned on. The V winning device opening / closing solenoid 72b is configured to be turned off after a predetermined opening time (5 seconds in the first embodiment) has passed. At this "timing B", while the V winning device opening / closing solenoid 72b is turned on, that is, at the timing when a ball can flow into the V winning device 72, the V sorting drive solenoid 73c is turned on, and The distribution path 73a of the distribution device 73 opens the left path 74 and closes the right path 75. Therefore, in the case of this "timing B", when the ball can flow into the V winning device 72 based on the winning of the "7 round V opening jackpot", to the left route 74 having the V winning opening 74a. The sphere flows in, and the sphere is detected by the V winning opening switch 74b.

  In the "7 round V open jackpot" at both timings, after the first R when the V winning device 72 is opened, after the 2R, the big winning opening solenoid 65c is repeatedly turned on or off to the variable winning device 65. While the ball is allowed to flow in, the V winning device 72 is not opened after the second round and the V winning device 72 is prevented from flowing into the V winning device 72. Then, after the end of the 7th round, a predetermined ending effect (“ED” in the figure. Hereinafter, the ending effect may be referred to as “ED effect”) is a predetermined effect time (“10 seconds” in the first embodiment). ) After performing, the jackpot state is terminated, and the special symbol variation effect can be executed.

  Here, when the ball is detected by the V winning hole switch 74b during the jackpot state, the gaming state after the jackpot state is finished is changed to the "probability variation state" while the ball is hit by the V winning hole switch 74b. If it is not detected, even if it is "7 round V open jackpot", it is configured to transition the game state after the jackpot state ends to "time reduction state".

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the jackpot to which the V winning device 72 is opened (that is, "7 round V opening jackpot" or "15 round V opening jackpot". Collectively, it may be referred to as "V open jackpot".) The V winning device 72 is opened 10 seconds after the opening effect is started, and the V winning device 72 is closed 5 seconds later. The period from the start of the big hit to the opening and closing of the V winning device 72 is fixedly set. Further, the drive cycle of the V allocation drive solenoid 73c is set longer than the opening time of the V winning device 72. Therefore, even if the player wins the V opening jackpot, depending on the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened, a situation where a ball can flow into the V winning opening 74a and the V winning opening 74a. There is a situation in which there is a mixture of a situation where the ball cannot flow in and a situation where the ball can and cannot flow into the V winning opening 74a. With such a configuration, whether or not the "probability variation state" is given is changed depending on the timing of a big hit, the variety of games can be made rich, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, referring to FIG. 17, in the case of winning the “7 round V open jackpot”, at the start of the fluctuating effect in which “7 round V open jackpot” occurs at the same timing as “timing A” in FIG. The number of reserved balls of the special symbol is less than “4”, the fluctuation shortening function does not operate in the fluctuation effect (that is, there is no shortening), and the fluctuation effect is executed in the normal effect mode, and the jackpot is a big hit. The situation that occurs will be described. In this situation, the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is not turned on at the timing (period) when the V winning device 72 is opened, and the ball is not detected by the V winning opening switch 74b.

  In the example shown in FIG. 17, first, in the "normal game state", the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "0", and a starting prize of 1 (hereinafter, referred to as "starting prize 1") occurs, and A start win is newly generated twice during execution of a variation (that is, "E0: non-reach (normal)") change effect ("change 1" in FIG. 17) for "15 seconds" based on start win 1 .. Of the two starting prizes, based on the previous starting prize (hereinafter, referred to as “starting prize 2”), a variation effect of a loss (that is, “E0: non-reach (normal)”) for “15 seconds” ( In FIG. 17, while the “variation 2” is extracted, the jackpot of the “7 round V open jackpot” (that is, “starting prize 3”) based on the subsequent start winning (hereinafter, “start winning 3”) jackpot (that is, The variation effect (“variation 3” in FIG. 17) of “E9: super reach (normal)” is extracted.

  Here, in the voice lamp control device 113, at the timing when the "start winning 2" and the "start winning 3" occur, the timing at the time of winning of the "start winning 2" and the "start winning 3", that is, each variation effect. It is configured to be able to execute advance win / failure determination of each variation effect at a timing before the start (hereinafter, the advance win / failure determination of the variation effect before the change effect is started is referred to as “prefetch determination”). .. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a delay after the fluctuating effect for 15 seconds is performed in the fluctuating effect based on the "starting winning 2" by the look-ahead determination at the time when the "starting winning 2" occurs. In addition, by the look-ahead judgment at the time of occurrence of the "starting prize 3", the "7-round V open jackpot" is generated after the fluctuation effect for "40 seconds" is performed in the fluctuation effect based on the "starting prize 3". I am aware of that.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, the main control device 110 recognizes the opening / closing drive timing (cycle) of the distribution device 73 in the V winning device 72 by a command (a V opening command described later) and is currently executing the command. The execution time of the variable effect, the execution time of each of the pending variable effects, the opening time due to the jackpot occurrence, and the opening timing (period) of the V winning device 72 are recognized. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 determines each of these times to open the V winning device 72 when "7 round V opening jackpot" occurs due to the variation effect based on "start winning 3". It becomes possible to recognize whether or not the ball can flow into the V winning opening 74a at the timing.

  In the example shown in FIG. 17, the voice lamp control device 113 does not generate an additional new start winning a prize in the situation (accumulation time of the change time of each variation effect) at the time when the “start winning a prize 3” occurs. When a jackpot based on "starting prize 3" occurs in a situation where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol does not activate the fluctuation reducing function, the ball flows into the V winning port 74a while the V winning device 72 based on the jackpot is opened. I am aware that it will be impossible. Therefore, when the "start prize 3" is generated, the voice lamp control device 113 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the "V prize chance effect" (see FIG. 46 described later), and wins the execution lottery. Displays a "shooting promotion suggestion (see FIG. 46 (b) described later)" that prompts the player to shoot a ball in the "V winning chance effect".

  Here, the "V winning opportunity effect" means whether or not a ball flows into the V winning opening 74a in the V winning apparatus 72 when the V winning apparatus 72 is opened when the jackpot is won. This is a production suggested to the player. In this "V winning opportunity effect", the variation time of the variation effect being executed, the variation time of the pending variation effect, the opening time at the time of a big hit, and the like are grasped at the time of starting winning of the variation effect that causes the big hit. Along with grasping the opening / closing cycle of the V winning opening 74a, when the jackpot game is executed with the current number of holding balls of the variable effect and the V winning device 72 is opened, a ball is won in the V winning opening 74a. It is configured to indicate whether or not to do.

  Specifically, in the "V prize chance effect", a variation effect that causes the jackpot is executed with the number of holding balls at the time of acquisition of the variation effect that can cause a jackpot, and the jackpot game is executed based on the result of the variation effect. When the ball is not executed in the V winning opening 74a even though it is executed and the V winning device 72 is opened, the player is prompted to shoot the ball in the "V winning chance effect". "Promotion suggestion" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 46B described later).

  In this "V winning chance production", "shooting promotion suggestion" does not cause the ball to flow into the V winning opening 74a even if a big hit occurs in this situation (in the normal production mode). Before starting the variation effect based on "Starting prize 3", obtain a new starting prize "3" or more (that is, the number of reserved balls is "4"), and perform the variation effect based on "Starting prize 3". This suggests that it should be executed in the shortening effect mode instead of the normal effect mode.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the variation effect, or when any of the "reach indicators" is extracted even when the loss is extracted, a predetermined ratio is obtained. Is configured to execute the "V winning chance effect". With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the operation of the pachinko machine 10 by urging the player to shoot a ball during the "V winning chance presentation" even in the variation presentation at the time of losing. In addition, it is not possible to determine whether or not a big hit occurs in the pending change effect only by executing the "V winning chance effect", so that the jackpot is won while the player is prompted to shoot a ball. It is possible to create a game property that predicts whether or not it will occur, and improve the interest of the game.

  In the example shown in FIG. 17, as a result of performing the “V winning chance effect”, a new starting winning does not occur in the “V winning opportunity effect”, and the variable effect based on the “starting winning 3” is started. Then, the number of holding balls, which is the variable effect amount based on the "start prize 3", is "1". Therefore, the variation effect based on the start winning a prize 3 is executed in the normal effect mode (that is, in the “E9: super reach (normal)” performed for “40 seconds”). At this time, the “V winning opportunity effect” ends in synchronization with the start timing of the variation effect based on the starting winning prize 3. After that, the variation effect based on the starting winning prize 3 is executed in the normal variation mode, the "7 round V opening jackpot" is generated in the variation effect, and the jackpot state is changed based on the occurrence of the "7 round V opening jackpot". To do. In this jackpot state, the V winning device opening / closing solenoid 72b is turned on through the OP effect that is executed for “10 seconds”, and the ball can flow into the V winning device 72.

  However, at the timing when the ball can flow into the V winning device 72 based on the "7 round V opening jackpot", the V sorting drive solenoid 73c is in the OFF state, the left path 74 is closed, and the right path 75 is open. It is in the state of being. Therefore, as suggested by the “V winning opportunity effect”, in the jackpot, the ball flows into the right path 75 and does not flow into the left path 74 when the V winning device 72 is opened. The ball is not detected (see FIG. 46 (h) described later), and the gaming state after the jackpot is finished is changed to the "time reduction state".

  Next, referring to FIG. 18, in the case of winning the “7 round V open jackpot”, the start of the variation effect in which the “7 round V open jackpot” occurs at the same timing as the “timing A” of FIG. Sometimes the special design has a number of holding balls of "4", the fluctuation effect is activated in the fluctuation effect (that is, there is shortening), and the fluctuation effect is executed in the shortened effect mode, and then a big hit occurs. The situation will be described. In this situation, the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is turned on at the timing (period) when the V winning device 72 is opened, and the V winning opening switch 74b can detect the ball.

  In the example shown in FIG. 18, like the example shown in FIG. 17, first, in the “normal game state”, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is “0”, the “start prize 1” occurs, and the “start” Based on "Win 1", a start win is newly generated twice during the "15 second" loss (that is, "E0: non-reach (normal)") variation effect ("Variation 1" in FIG. 18). .. Of the 2 starting prizes, the variation effect (“E0: non-reach (normal)”) for 15 seconds is changed based on the “starting prize 2” which is the preceding starting prize. The fluctuation 2 ") is extracted, and the jackpot of" 7 round V open jackpot "during" 40 seconds "(that is," E9: super reach (normal) "based on the later starting prize" starting prize 3 ". )) Variation effect (“variation 3” in FIG. 18) is extracted.

  Here, in the voice lamp control device 113, as in the example shown in FIG. 17, at the timing of the occurrence of the “start winning 2” and the “start winning 3”, the time when the “start winning 2” and the “start winning 3” are won. That is, the pre-reading determination of each variation production at the timing before the start of each variation production is performed, and the pre-reading determination at the time of occurrence of the "starting winning 2" is performed in the variation production based on the "starting winning 2". The variation effect for "40 seconds" is generated in the variation effect based on the "starting prize 3" by the look-ahead judgment at the time of occurrence of the "starting prize 3". We are aware that a "7 round V open jackpot" will occur after the event.

  In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 recognizes the opening / closing drive timing (cycle) of the distribution device 73 in the V winning device 72 by a command (a V opening command described later) from the main control device 110 and is currently executing the command. The execution time of the fluctuating effect, each execution time of the pending fluctuating effect, the opening time due to the jackpot occurrence, and the opening timing (period) of the V winning device 72 are recognized. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 determines each of these times to open the V winning device 72 when "7 round V opening jackpot" occurs due to the variation effect based on "start winning 3". It becomes possible to recognize whether or not the ball can flow into the V winning opening 74a at the timing.

  In the example shown in FIG. 18, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 17, the voice lamp control device 113 keeps a new start while maintaining the situation (accumulated time of the variation time of each variation effect) at the time when the “start prize 3” occurs. When a jackpot based on "starting prize 3" occurs in a situation where the number of balls with a special symbol is not activated and the variation effect function is not activated without a winning, the V winning opening is open during opening of the V winning device 72 based on the jackpot. We recognize that there will be a situation in which no sphere can flow into 74a. Therefore, when the "start prize 3" is generated, the voice lamp control device 113 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the "V prize chance effect" (see FIG. 47 described later), and wins the execution lottery. Displays a "shooting promotion suggestion (see FIG. 47 (b) described later)" that prompts the player to shoot a ball in the "V winning chance effect".

  Then, in the example shown in FIG. 18, as a result of performing the “V winning opportunity effect”, three new starting winnings are generated in the “V winning opportunity effect”, and the variable effect based on the “starting winning 3” is started. At the timing, the number of reserved balls of the variable effect including the variable effect based on the "start prize 3" becomes "4" (see FIG. 47 (d) described later). Therefore, the variable effect based on the "starting prize 3" is different from the time when the "starting prize 3" is generated, in the shortened effect mode (that is, "EC: Super reach (shortening)" performed for "30 seconds"). Will be executed. Then, the "V winning opportunity effect" suggests that the variation effect of "starting winning 3" activates the variation shortening function, and the ball is ready to win the V winning opening 74a (see FIG. 47 (described later). Refer to e)), and end in synchronization with the start timing of the variation effect based on "start prize 3". After that, the variation effect based on the "starting prize 3" is executed in the shortened variation mode in which the variation time is shortened by "10 seconds" from the normal variation mode which was grasped at the time of occurrence of the "starting prize 3". A "7 round V open jackpot" occurs in the fluctuating effect, and the jackpot state transitions based on the occurrence of the "7 round V open jackpot". In the jackpot state, the V winning device opening / closing solenoid 72b is turned on through the OP effect that is executed for “10 seconds”, and the ball can flow into the V winning device 72.

  In this case, the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is on, the left path 74 is open, and the right path 75 is closed at the timing when the ball can flow into the V winning device 72. Therefore, as suggested by the "V winning chance effect", in the jackpot, the ball flows into the left path 74 when the V winning device 72 is opened, and the ball is detected by the V winning opening switch 74b (Fig. 47 (h described later). )), The game state after the end of the jackpot transitions to the “probability variation state”.

  In this way, even though the V winning device 72 has won the jackpot to be opened, at the stage of the starting winning, even in the situation where the ball cannot be won in the V winning opening 74a, before the jackpot starts. By keeping the number of reserved balls of the special symbol in a state in which the variation shortening function is activated, the phase of the opening / closing timing of the V winning opening 74a at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened is shifted, and the ball is moved to the V winning opening 74a. Can create a situation in which a player can win. Therefore, by configuring the player's own operation (the number of starting winnings based on the launch) to be able to acquire whether or not the V winning hole 74a is won in the jackpot, the player can feel a sense of accomplishment when the V winning hole 74a is won. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by displaying the “promotion of launch” in the “V prize chance production”, the number of balls to be shot in the pachinko machine 10 can be increased and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. The ordinary figure hit counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of, for example, "0 to 99" and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99"). In addition, when the per-universal figure counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the per-universal figure counter C4.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the per-university counter C4 (value = “0 to 99”), and is set to 1 for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). It is updated once and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 36).

  The value of the counter C4 per ordinary drawing is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24)), and the timing at which it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. Then, it is stored in any one of the universal figure holding first to fourth area, which is provided in the universal figure holding ball storage area 203h of the RAM 203. Then, the data is sequentially shifted to the public figure holding sphere execution area 203i in the order stored in the public figure holding sphere storage area 203h, and the value of the counter C4 per public figure stored in the public figure holding sphere execution area 203i is compared with the value. The hit is determined.

  The value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the random number per universal table 202f (see FIG. 19 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 for each game state, and the universal symbol holding ball execution If the value of the per-universal-drawing per-playing counter C4 stored in the area 203i matches the value of the random number set as the per-universal-drawing random number table 202f, the hit is determined. Then, referring to the universal figure fluctuation time table 202g (see FIG. 19 (b)) according to the gaming state, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol is set, and after the variable display time has elapsed on the ordinary symbol display device 83, As a stop symbol (ordinary symbol), a symbol "○" is lit up and displayed. After that, the normal electric power combination control table 202h (see FIG. 19C) is referred to according to the game state, the opening time of the normal electric power 71a is set, and the normal electric power 71a is opened during the opening time. However, during that time, a ball can be won in the second starting opening 71.

  On the other hand, when the value of the per-universal-drawing counter C4 stored in the general-universal-drawing reservation area does not match the value of the random number per hit set by the per-universal-drawing random number table 202f (see FIG. 19A). It is determined that the game has been lost. Then, the variable display time is set by referring to the universal figure fluctuation time table 202g (see FIG. 19 (b)) according to the game state, and after the variable display time has passed in the normal symbol display device 83, the stop symbol (normal) The symbol "x" is displayed as a symbol).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 19A, the details of the random number table 202f per universal figure will be described. FIG. 19A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a random number table 202f per universal figure stored in the ROM 202.

  As described above, the random number table 202f per universal figure indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state of a normal symbol that is the "normal gaming state" (a period that is not the "probability variation state" or the "time reduction state" ( In case of "normal symbol low probability state" used in the case of special symbol big hit)), the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is higher than the "ordinary symbol low probability state". It is divided into two types: for "normal probability high probability state" used in the case of "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state". The number of random numbers included in each of the "normal symbol low probability state" and the "normal symbol high probability state" is set differently. In this way, the "normal symbol low probability state" and the "ordinary symbol high probability state" are different in the number of winning random numbers, so that the "normal symbol low probability state" and the "normal symbol high probability state" , The probability of winning in the variable display of normal symbols is changed.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of values of the per-universal figure counter C4, which is a hit in the “normal symbol low probability state”, is 10, and the value is “90”. ~ 99 "is defined (set) in the random number table 202f per ordinary figure. That is, the probability of hitting the normal symbol in the "normal symbol low probability state" (that is, the "normal game state") is set to be 10/100 = 1/10.

  On the other hand, the number of values of the per-universal-drawing counter C4 which is a hit in the case of "normal symbol high probability state" is 90, and the value "01 to 99" is defined (set) in the per-universal-drawing random number table 202f. ing. That is, the probability of hitting a normal symbol in the “normal symbol high probability state” (that is, “probability variation state” or “time shortening state”) is set to be 90/100 = 9/10.

  Thereby, by changing the winning probability of the normal symbol according to the game state, it is possible to cause a difference whether or not the normal electric role 71a is easy to open. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the ordinary electric power outlet 71a is likely to be opened, so that the second starting opening 71 side can be won, or the ordinary electric power outlet 71a is difficult to open. It is possible to create different game characteristics for each gaming state by changing whether the ball is difficult to win the second starting opening 71 depending on the gaming state.

  In particular, in the "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged, the "normal symbol high-probability state" is established, the normal electric officer 71a is easily opened, and the ball is shot by the right-handed game. Are configured so that it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 71. In other words, the ball that is hit to the right in the "probability variation state" and the "time reduction state" is configured to easily win the second starting opening 71 and to easily activate the variation reduction function of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is encouraged, the "normal symbol low probability state" is set, the normal electric officer 71a is difficult to open, and the ball fired by the right-handed game enters the second starting opening 71. It is configured to be difficult to do. Further, since the first starting opening 64 is not equipped with a device for assisting winning such as the ordinary electric power 71a, the ball launched by the left-handed game is also configured to be difficult to win in the first starting opening 64. ing. Therefore, in other words, in the "normal game state", even if a right-handed game is played, the right-handed ball is difficult to win in the second starting opening 71, and a ball launched in the left-handed game is also included. , It is difficult to win the first start opening 64, it is difficult to operate the variation reduction function of the special symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19B, details of the universal figure variation time table 202g for determining the variable display time of the normal symbol will be described. FIG. 19B is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the universal figure fluctuation time table 202g stored in the ROM 202.

  The universal figure fluctuation time table 202g is divided into two types, for "normal symbol low probability state" and "normal symbol high probability state", like the random number table 202f per universal figure. Then, for "normal symbol low probability state" (that is, for "normal gaming state") and for "normal symbol high probability state" (that is, for "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state"), it is set Normally, the variable display time of symbols is set differently. In this way, by varying the variable display time of the normal symbol in the "ordinary symbol low probability state" and the "ordinary symbol high probability state", the "normal symbol low probability state" and the "normal symbol high probability state", The time at which the result of winning or deciding the normal symbol is derived is changed.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol set in the case of the "ordinary symbol low probability state" is the normal symbol so that it is "10 seconds". It is defined by the variable time table 202g. That is, in the "normal symbol low probability state", the time from the start of variable display of the normal symbol to the derivation of the stop symbol is set to "10 seconds" without exception.

  On the other hand, the variable display time of the normal symbol set in the case of "ordinary symbol high probability state" is defined by the universal symbol fluctuation time table 202g so as to be "0.5 seconds". That is, in the "normal symbol high probability state", the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the derivation of the stop symbol is set to "0.5 seconds" without exception.

  Thus, by changing the variable display time of the normal symbol according to the gaming state, it is possible to change the period from the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 until the normal electric role 71a is opened. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the variable display due to the passage of the through gate 67 is a hit, and the normal electric power combination 71a is opened based on the fact that the ball passes through the through gate 67. Whether it can flow into the second starting port 71 as it is can be made different depending on the game state. Therefore, by changing the variable display time of the normal symbol for each gaming state, it is possible to make the winning mode of the one ball through the through gate 67 and the second starting opening 71 different, and the different gaming characteristics for each gaming state. Can be born.

  Next, the normal electric power combination control table 202h will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19C is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the normal electric power combination control table 202h stored in the ROM 202. The normal electric power combination control table 202h is referred to when the normal symbol hits, and based on the game state at the timing when the normal symbol hits, the opening time of the normal electric power combination 71a is defined.

  The normal electric power combination control table 202h is divided into groups based on the gaming state in which the normal symbols are drawn by lot. Specifically, for "normal symbol low probability state" referred to in "normal gaming state" and for "normal symbol high probability state" referred to in "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state" The opening mode (opening time) of the normal electric power combination 71a is changed.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "normal symbol low probability state", that is, the normal electric power combination 71a set when the normal symbol is won in the "normal game state" The opening time of is defined in the normal electric power combination control table 202h so that it is "0.1 seconds". That is, when the ordinary symbol is won in the "ordinary symbol low probability state", the ordinary electric power combination 71a is set to be opened for "0.1 seconds".

  On the other hand, in the "ordinary symbol high probability state", that is, in the "probability fluctuation state" or in the "time reduction state", the opening time of the ordinary electric power combination 71a set when the ordinary symbol is won is "3 seconds". Is defined in the normal electric power combination control table 202h. That is, when the normal symbol is won in the “normal electric-combination high probability state”, the normal electric-combination 71a is configured to be opened for “3 seconds”.

  Thus, by changing the opening mode of the normal electric power combination 71a according to the game state, it is possible to cause a difference in length of the period during which the normal electric power combination 71a is open. As a result, when a ball passes through the through gate 67, it is easy to win a prize on the side of the second starting port 71 due to the long period of time that the normal electric power outlet 71a is open, or the normal electric power outlet 71a is open. By varying whether the ball is difficult to win in the second starting opening 71 due to the short situation depending on the gaming state, it is possible to create different gaming characteristics for each gaming state.

  In particular, in the "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged, the "normal symbol high probability state" is established, the opening period of the normal electric officer 71a becomes long, and the right-handed game is launched. The ball is configured to easily enter the second starting opening 71. In other words, the sphere that has been hit to the right in the "probability variation state" and the "time reduction state" is likely to win the second starting opening 71, and the number of reserve balls for the variation effect of the second special symbol is likely to accumulate, so the variation The shortening function is configured to be easy to operate.

  In this way, by providing each gaming state that is a combination of the high-probability state or low-probability state of the special symbol and the high-probability state or the low-probability state of the ordinary symbol, the game property is changed to each gaming state, and variations It is possible to provide a variety of games and improve the enjoyment of games.

  In particular, in the "probability variation state" and the "time reduction state" in which it is easy to activate the variation reducing function, it is easy to select whether to activate the variation reducing function based on the player's intention. Therefore, in the "probability variation state" and the "time reduction state", when the corresponding variation effect is executed in the normal effect mode when the "V winning chance effect" is generated, the prize winning assist function is activated. By giving a ball to the second starting opening 71, the corresponding variable effect can be easily made into a shortening effect mode, and the ball can be easily made to flow into the V winning opening 74a.

  The hit probability of the variable display of the normal symbol and the variable display time of the variable display are not limited to those in the above embodiment, and can be changed appropriately. Specifically, any ratio may be used as long as the probability of winning a normal symbol is higher than that of the “normal gaming state” such as “probability fluctuation state”. For example, the probability of hitting a normal symbol in the “normal gaming state”. May be configured to be difficult to hit as about 1/100, or the winning probability of a normal symbol in the “probability variation state” may be about 50/100 = 1/2. Further, any time may be used as long as the variable display time is shorter in the "probability variation state" than in the "normal game state". For example, the variable display time of the normal symbol in the "normal game state" is "10 seconds" or more. May be a long time (for example, "30 seconds") or a short time less than "10 seconds" (for example, "1 second").

  Further, the opening time and the number of times of opening the normal electric power combination 71a are not limited to those in the above embodiment, and can be changed appropriately. Specifically, as the opening time of the normal electric power combination 71a, any opening time may be used as long as the "probability fluctuation state" is more advantageous for the player than the "normal game state", for example, "normal The opening time of the normal electric power combination 71a in the "gaming state" may be set to "0.1 seconds" or more (for example, "1 second"), or the number of times of opening is "1 time" or more (for example, "3 times"). ) May be set. Further, the opening time of the normal electric power combination 71a in the "probability variation state" may be a long time of "3 seconds" or more (for example, "5 seconds"), or a short time of less than "3 seconds" (for example, "1"). Seconds "). Further, the number of times of opening the regular electric power combination 71a in the “probability variation state” may be set to a large number of times of “1 time” or more (for example, “3 times”).

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in FIG. 7, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and input / output. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as output (Input / Output; hereinafter abbreviated as “I / O”) are stored. It should be noted that the RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on by eliminating power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before power-off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 36) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 35). The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, An NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 34) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 further includes a first holding sphere number counter 203a, a second holding sphere number counter 203b, a first holding sphere storage area 203d, a second holding sphere storage area 203e, a holding sphere execution area 203f, and a universal figure holding sphere number counter 203g. , At least a public figure holding sphere storage area 203h, a public figure holding sphere execution area 203i, a probability change transition flag 203j, and a V drive timer 203k.

  The first reserved ball number counter 203a, based on the start winning a prize to the first start opening 64 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) that is periodically executed every "4 milliseconds", The maximum number of holding balls (waiting number) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol performed on the special symbol display device 37 (variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol performed on the third symbol display device 81) It is a counter that counts up to four times.

  The first holding ball number counter 203a is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S915 in FIG. 35). Then, every time the winning a prize for the first starting opening 64 is detected and the number of reserved balls of the dynamic display (variable effect) regarding the first special symbol is increased, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (FIG. 26). See S203). On the other hand, the first reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol is executed (see S308 of FIG. 27).

  The second holding sphere number counter 203b is, like the first holding sphere number counter 203a, the second start detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) which is regularly executed every "4 milliseconds". Based on the start winning to the mouth 71, the dynamic display of the second special symbol performed on the special symbol display device 37 (variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol performed on the third symbol display device 81) It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of up to 4 times.

  Like the first holding ball number counter 203a, the second holding ball number counter 203b is set to "0" as an initial value by the initialization processing of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S915 in FIG. 35). Then, every time the winning award to the second starting opening 71 is detected and the number of reserved balls of the dynamic display (variable effect) regarding the second special symbol is increased, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (FIG. 26). See S206). On the other hand, the second holding ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the second special symbol is executed (see S305 in FIG. 27).

  The value of the first reserve sphere counter 203a (that is, the reserve sphere number of the first special symbol) or the value of the second reserve sphere number counter 203b (that is, the reserve sphere number of the second special symbol) is the reserve sphere number command. Is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 (see S210 in FIG. 26). The hold ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first hold ball number counter 203a or the second hold ball number counter 203b is incremented by one. Command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of reserved balls itself of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol suspended in the main control device 110 by the number of reserved balls command. it can. Thereby, in the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to manage the number of times of suspension of the dynamic display (variable effect) of each special symbol without accessing the main control device 110. In addition, each time the start winning is detected, the main control unit 110 transmits a reserve ball number command to the voice lamp control unit 113, thereby dynamically displaying (changing) the special symbols managed by the voice lamp control unit 113. Even if the number of holding balls for (production) deviates from the number of holding balls for actual dynamic display (fluctuation production) held in main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the next received hold The deviation can be corrected by the sphere number command.

  In addition, in the first embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits a holding ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113, the holding ball number command is incremented by 1 to the first holding ball number counter 203a or the first holding ball number counter 203a. The buffer 203c for the counter (see FIG. 6) along with the above-mentioned start winning that triggered the addition of not only the value of the 2 held ball number counter 203b but also the 1st held ball number counter 203a or the 2nd held ball number counter 203b. The values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 obtained by the above are also included.

  That is, when there is a start winning, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the main control device 110 is a holding ball. A few commands are transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect based on the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 transmitted by the hold ball number command is executed. A pre-reading determination is performed before the change effect is made, and what happens to the variation effect (whether it is a big hit, what the variation time is, etc.) is determined before the execution of the variation effect. Then, based on the result of the pre-reading determination, it is possible to determine execution of various effects, determine the effect mode of the "winning chance effect" described above, and determine the effect content of the "hold change notice". ing.

  In addition, you may comprise so that the command of the number of holding balls which shows the number of balls of change production and the command which shows the value of big hit random number counter C1 etc. may be transmitted separately. As the command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like different from the reserved ball number command, the reserved ball number command is generated at the timing of the ball entering the first starting opening 64 or the second starting opening 71, and A command similar to the variation pattern command and the stop type command based on the ball entering (the advance variation pattern command and the advance stop type command) may be generated and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, regarding the program for generating the advance variation pattern command and the advance stop type command, by diverting the program of the variation pattern command and the stop type command, it is possible to easily create the program.

  As described above, the first holding ball storage area 203d has a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3, which are obtained from the counter buffer 203c in accordance with the detection of the start winning to the first start opening 64. , A memory for storing each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first starting opening 64 (starting winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are output from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. The first holding sphere storage area 203d has four holdings so that the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to one start winning of the first special symbol can be stored (holding) up to four times. It has an area (1st reservation 1st-4th area) (refer FIG. 7).

  As described above, the second holding ball storage area 203e is a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3, which are acquired from the counter buffer 203c in accordance with the detection of the start winning to the second start opening 71. , A memory for storing each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the second starting opening 71 (starting winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are output from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. The second hold sphere storage area 203e is four hold so that the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to the start winning of one of the second special symbols can be stored (hold) up to four times. It has an area (2nd reservation 1st-4th area) (refer FIG. 7).

  As described above, the reserved ball execution area 203f starts the execution, or the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is being executed, and the movement of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. This is a memory for storing data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processing such as dynamic display and setting of variation effect.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display In order to execute the processing such as the dynamic display of the device 81 and the setting of the variable effect, the data corresponding to each start winning stored in the above-mentioned first reserved ball storage area 203d or second reserved ball storage area 203e ( Among the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1), when the data corresponding to the start winning relating to the second special symbol is stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, it corresponds to one starting winning of the data. The data is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, the data corresponding to the starting prize relating to the second special symbol is not stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the data corresponding to the starting prize relating to the first special symbol is stored in the first retaining ball storage area 203d. If so, the data corresponding to one of the starting prizes is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) regarding the second special symbol is preferentially executed, and the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) regarding the first special symbol relates to the second special symbol. It is configured to be executed on condition that the dynamic display (variable effect) is not held. The shift in the first embodiment refers to moving the data stored in one area to another area.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 7 again, the details of the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f will be described. The first reserve sphere storage area 203d, the second reserve sphere storage area 203e, and the reserve sphere execution area 203f are the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the movement of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform dynamic display and setting of variation effect.

  As described above, the jackpot random number counter used in the jackpot lottery for the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 and the setting of the variable effect. C1, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the effect mode of the variation effect, and a variation type counter CS1 used for determining the variation pattern are used. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball wins the first starting opening 64 (start winning), The second reserved ball storage area 203e stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball wins the second starting opening 71 (start winning).

  The first reserved sphere storage area 203d is composed of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas). Each of the four holding areas (first holding first to fourth areas) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter storage area that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2. 203d2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203d4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

  Further, the second reserved sphere storage area 203e is composed of four reserved areas (second reserved first to fourth areas) like the first reserved sphere storage area 203d. Each of the four holding areas (second holding first to fourth areas) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter C2, like the first holding ball storage area 203d. The jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter storage area 203e4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. Has been.

  In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage areas 203d1 and 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage areas 203d2 and 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage areas 203d3 and 203e3, and the fluctuation type counter storage areas 203d4 and 203e4 are set to one. Although they are collectively provided in the one reserved ball storage areas 203d and 203e, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1.

  As described above, in the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first starting opening 64 (start winning) is stored up to four times. However, in this case, among the four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) that are vacant, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). Remembered. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the starting winning in the first starting opening 64 that is older in time is stored, and in the first reserved first area, the first starting opening 64 that is earliest in time is stored. The data corresponding to the starting winning a prize will be stored.

  Further, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the second starting opening 71 (start winning) is stored up to four times. In that case, data is stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four holding areas (second holding first to fourth areas). It That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the start winning in the second starting opening 71 that is older in time is stored, and in the second holding first area, the second starting opening 71 that is earliest in time is stored. The data corresponding to the starting winning a prize will be stored.

  On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203f is composed of only one area. The holding ball execution area 203f includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter C2, like the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e. A jackpot type counter storage area 203f2 for storing a value, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 for storing a value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203f4 for storing a value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. There is.

  When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start execution of the variable effect, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) is stored in the second holding first area of the second holding ball storage area 203e. In this case, the data stored in the second holding first area is shifted to each of the areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the holding ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, the MPU 201 does not store data in the second holding first storage area 203e of the second holding ball storage area 203e at the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, and the first holding ball storage area 203d first When data is stored in the holding first area, the data stored in the first holding first area is shifted to each of the areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the holding ball execution area 203f.

  Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f is referred to in the variation start process (see FIG. 28), a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data and the game state, and a variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result. And the stop type. In the special symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, dynamic display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  The fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, by the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect is performed based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  Details of data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variable effect has come, it determines whether or not data is stored in the second holding first area of the second holding ball storage area 203e. When it is determined that the data is stored in the second holding first area, the random number of the big hit random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second holding first area is set to the big hit random number of the holding ball execution area 203f. Shift to the counter storage area 203f1. Similarly, the random number value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the second hold first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random number value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second hold first area is changed to It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and shifts the random number value of the variation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second holding first area to the variation type counter storage area 203f4.

  Then, when the shift of the data to the holding ball execution area 203f is completed, the second holding first area becomes empty, so that the second holding ball storage area 203e is stored in each area (second to fourth) (holding). The shift processing is performed so that the data stored in (1) to (3) is packed in an area having a smaller area number by 1 (first to third). In the first embodiment, in the second storage area 203e for storing reserved balls, data is shifted only for the second storage areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (held).

  Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the second holding ball storage area 203e will be described. For example, the value of the second holding ball number counter 203b when the start of the variation effect is determined is "4", and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the second holding ball storage area 203e. It has been done. In this state, when the data of the second holding first area is shifted to the holding ball execution area 203f and the second holding first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 sets the data of other areas (second to fourth). Are respectively shifted to areas having smaller area numbers by 1 (first to third). That is, the data in the second reserved second area is shifted to the second reserved first area, the data in the second reserved third area is shifted to the second reserved second area, and the data in the second reserved fourth area. To the second reserved third area.

  Further, for example, when the value of the second holding ball number counter 203b at the time when the start of the variation effect is determined to be “2”, the MPU 201 sets only the data of the second holding second area to the second holding second. Shift to one area and finish shifting the data. As described above, in the first embodiment, since the data shift processing is not performed for the second holding areas (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts is reduced. Therefore, the control load can be reduced.

  It should be noted that each data in the second holding area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area having a smaller area number by 1, regardless of the presence or absence of data. In that case, it is unnecessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the second holding area (second to fourth), and thus it is possible to easily create the program.

  On the other hand, when the MPU 201 determines that no data is stored in the second hold first area of the second hold ball storage area 203e at the execution start timing of the variable effect, then the first hold It is determined whether or not data is stored in the first holding first area of the sphere storage area 203d. As a result of the determination, if the data is stored in the first holding first area, the random number value of the big hit random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first holding first area is set to the big hit random number counter storage area 203f1 of the holding ball execution area 203f. Shift to. Similarly, the random number value of the big hit type counter storage area 203d2 of the first hold first area is shifted to the big hit type counter storage area 203f2, and the random number value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first hold first area is changed to The stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 is shifted, and the random number value of the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first holding first area is shifted to the variation type counter storage area 203f4.

  Then, when the shift of the data to the reserved ball execution area 203f is completed, the first reserved first area becomes empty, so that the first reserved ball storage area 203d is stored (reserved in each area (second to fourth)). The shift processing is performed so that the data stored in (1) to (3) is packed in an area having a smaller area number by 1 (first to third). In the first embodiment, in the first storage area 203d for storing reserved balls, data is shifted only for the first storage areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (held).

  Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the first holding ball storage area 203d will be described. For example, the value of the first reserved sphere number counter 203a at the time of the start judgment of the variation effect is "4", and the data is stored in all the areas (first to fourth) of the first reserved sphere storage area 203d. It has been done. In this state, when the data of the first holding first area is shifted to the holding ball execution area 203f and the first holding first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 sets the data of other areas (second to fourth). Are respectively shifted to areas having smaller area numbers by 1 (first to third). That is, the data in the first reserved second area is shifted to the first reserved first area, the data in the first reserved third area is shifted to the first reserved second area, and the data in the first reserved fourth area. Is shifted to the first reserved third area.

  Further, for example, when the value of the first holding ball number counter 203a at the time when the start of the variation effect is determined to be “2”, the MPU 201 sets only the data of the first holding second area to the first holding second. Shift to one area and finish shifting the data. As described above, in the first embodiment, since the data shift processing is not performed for the first holding areas (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts is reduced. Therefore, the control load can be reduced.

  It should be noted that each data in the first holding area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area having a smaller area number by 1, regardless of the presence or absence of data. In that case, since it is unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the first storage area (second to fourth), it is possible to easily create a program.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is the second from the variation effect of the first special symbol in the situation where the variation effect of the first special symbol and the variation effect of the second special symbol are both held. It is configured to preferentially execute the variation effect of the special symbol. Here, when executing the above-mentioned "V winning chance production" based on winning the V opening jackpot, for example, in the variation production of the first special symbol, winning the V opening jackpot, "V winning chance production" When the start winning of the second special symbol is newly generated, the variation effect of the new second special symbol is preferentially executed over the variation effect of the first special symbol. Therefore, there is a possibility that the effect time of the "V winning chance effect" and the start time of the variable effect that wins the V opening jackpot are deviated.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "normal game state", it is difficult to generate a variation effect of the second special symbol by making it difficult for the ball to enter the second starting opening 71, and the first special The variation effect of the second special symbol is configured to be less likely to occur while the variation effect of the symbol is being executed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the variable effect of the second special symbol from being interrupted during the "V winning chance effect" based on the starting winning of the first special symbol. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect time of the "V winning chance effect" from deviating from the start time of the variable effect that wins the V opening jackpot.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The ordinary figure holding sphere number counter 203g is normally based on the passage of the sphere to the through gate 67 detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) which is regularly executed every "4 milliseconds". It is a counter for counting the maximum number of times the number of holding balls (standby number) of variable display of the normal symbol performed on the symbol display device 83 is maximum.

  Like the holding ball number counters 203a and 203b, the ordinary figure holding ball number counter 203g is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S615 in FIG. 35). Then, whenever passage of the sphere to the through gate 67 is detected and the number of spheres for variable display relating to the normal symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (not shown). On the other hand, the universal figure holding ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 every time the variable display of the ordinary symbols is executed (not shown).

  The universal figure holding sphere storage area 203h is a memory for storing a universal figure counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of passage of a sphere to the through gate 67. When the MPU 201 detects that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), the MPU 201 acquires the value of the per-university-counter counter C4 from the counter buffer 203c and stores the per-university-drawing-reserved sphere. Store in area 203h. The ordinary figure holding sphere storage area 203h has four holding areas (universal figure) so that data (value of counter C4 per ordinary figure) corresponding to one holding sphere of a normal symbol can be stored (held) up to four times. (Holding first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 7).

  The ordinary figure holding sphere execution area 203i is a memory for storing data (value of counter C4 per ordinary figure) to be referred to in the process of starting execution or hitting lottery or variable display of the ordinary symbol being executed. is there.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display of the normal symbol, the normal symbol holding ball described above is executed in order to execute the process such as the hit lottery of the normal symbol and the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. Of the data stored in the storage area 203h (the value of the counter C4 per universal figure), one data is shifted to the universal figure holding sphere execution area 203i. The shift in the first embodiment refers to moving the data stored in one area to another area.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 7 again, details of the public figure reservation sphere storage area 203h and the public figure reservation sphere execution area 203i will be described. The public figure holding sphere storage area 203h and the public figure holding sphere execution area 203i are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform processing such as winning lottery of ordinary symbols and setting of variable display of the ordinary symbol display device 83. It

  As described above, the normal symbol hitting counter C4 used in the normal symbol hitting lottery is used to set the normal symbol hitting lottery and the variable display of the ordinary symbol display device 83. The universal figure holding sphere storage area 203h stores the value of the universal figure counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the sphere passes through the through gate 67.

  The universal figure holding sphere storage area 203h is composed of four holding areas (universal figure holding first to fourth areas). Each of the four holding areas (universal figure reservation first to fourth areas) is provided with a per-universal figure counter storage area (not shown) for storing the value of the per-universal figure counter C4.

  As described above, in the public figure reservation sphere storage area 203h, data (the value of the counter C4 per public figure) acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through the through gate 67 is stored up to four times. In that case, Data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four holding areas (universal figure holding first to fourth areas). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the passage of the sphere to the through gate 67 which is older in time is stored, and in the universal figure holding first area, the number of the sphere to the through gate 67 which is older in time is stored. The data corresponding to the passage will be stored.

  On the other hand, the universal figure holding sphere execution area 203i is composed of only one area. Similar to the public figure reservation sphere storage area 203h, the public figure reservation sphere execution area 203i is provided with a public figure per counter storage area (not shown) for storing the value of the per-university figure counter C4.

  When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to execute the variable display of the normal symbols, the data stored in the public figure holding first area of the public figure holding ball storage area 203h is stored in the public figure holding ball execution area 203i. shift.

  Then, the data shifted to the universal figure holding ball execution area 203i is referred to in the universal figure variation process (see S112 in FIG. 24), and based on the reference data and the game state, a winning lottery is performed and a variable display is performed. Determine the content of. In the normal symbol display device 83, variable display is performed based on the determined contents under the control of the main control device 110.

  Details of data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variable display of the ordinary symbols has been reached, the random number value of the universal figure counter storage area (not shown) of the universal figure holding first area of the universal figure holding ball storage area 203h is set. , And shifts to a per-universal-drawing counter storage area (not shown) in the general-university-drawing reserved ball execution area 203i.

  Then, when the shift of the data to the universal figure holding sphere execution area 203i is completed, the universal figure holding first area becomes empty, so that it is stored in each area (second to fourth) of the universal figure holding sphere storage area 203h. A shift process is performed in which the (held) data is packed into an area (area 1 to 3) having a smaller area number by one. In the first embodiment, in the universal figure holding sphere storage area 203h, data is shifted only for the universal figure holding areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (held).

  Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the universal figure holding sphere storage area 203h will be described. For example, the value of the universal figure holding ball number counter 203g at the time when the start of the variable display of the ordinary symbol is determined to be "4", and the entire universal figure holding ball storage area 203h (first to fourth) Assume that the data is stored. In this state, the data in the universal figure reservation first area is shifted to the universal figure reservation ball execution area 203i, and when the universal figure reservation first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 causes another area (second to fourth) Data of each area is shifted to an area having a smaller area number by 1 (first to third areas). That is, the data of the public figure reservation second area is shifted to the public figure reservation first area, the data of the public figure reservation third area is shifted to the public figure reservation second area, and the data of the public figure reservation fourth area. Is shifted to the universal map reservation third area.

  Further, for example, if the value of the universal figure holding ball number counter 203g at the time when the start of the variable display of the ordinary symbols is determined to be "2", the MPU 201 will only display the data of the ordinary figure holding second area. After shifting to the figure reservation first area, the data shift is completed. As described above, in the first embodiment, since the data shift processing is not performed for the universal figure holding areas (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts is reduced. Therefore, the control load can be reduced.

  It should be noted that, regardless of the presence / absence of data, each data in the universal figure holding area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area having an area number smaller by one. In that case, it is unnecessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the universal figure holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The probability variation transition flag 203j is a flag for indicating transition to the "probability variation state" in the ON state. The probability variation transition flag 203j is set to OFF as an initial value when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on (see S915 in FIG. 35). Then, when a ball is detected by the V winning opening switch 74b during the big hit (see S443 of FIG. 31: Yes), the probability variation transition flag 203j in the off state is set to on (see S445 of FIG. 31). Then, in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 33), when the probability variation transition flag 203j is turned on, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the "probability variation state", that is, the ST counter (described later) When the value of (not shown) is set to “100” (see S482 in FIG. 33), the probability variation transition flag 203j in the ON state is set to OFF (see S483 in FIG. 33).

  The V drive timer 203k is a timer for determining whether the V winning opening 74a is open or closed. The V drive timer 203k is set when the V distribution drive solenoid 73c that periodically opens and closes the V winning opening 74a is initialized in the startup process (see FIG. 35) performed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on ( The value of this V drive timer 203k is also initialized. Specifically, when the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is initially set to the off state, in order to count that the V winning opening 74a maintains the closed state for "10 seconds" from that timing, The drive timer 203k is cleared to "0".

  Then, the value of the V drive timer 203k is "Every time the V drive process (see S101) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) executed every" 4 milliseconds "in the main controller 110 is executed. 1 "is added by one. Then, when the value of the V drive timer 203k reaches "2500" (see S152: Yes in FIG. 25), the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is switched on or off (see S154 or S155 in FIG. 25). After that, the value of the V drive timer 203k is cleared to "0" based on that the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is switched on or off (see S157 in FIG. 25).

  In this way, the value of the V drive timer 203k is cleared to "0" at the timing when the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is switched on or off. After that, the value of the V drive timer 203k is incremented by "1" every "4 milliseconds", and it is determined whether or not the added value of the V drive timer 203k reaches "2500". Then, when the value of the V drive timer 203k reaches "2500", the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is turned on or off again, so that the V winning opening 74a is "2500 × 4 milliseconds = 10000 milliseconds". It is opened or closed every (that is, "10 seconds"), and by repeating it, the opening or closing of the V winning opening 74a is alternately switched every "10 seconds".

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the special symbol display device 37, the ordinary symbol display device 83, the ordinary symbol holding lamp 84, and the bottom of the special winning opening opening / closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 are provided. A state where the big winning opening solenoid 65c for driving to open and close as a shaft and the V winning device opening / closing plate 72a of the V winning device 72 are projected from the game board 13 (see FIG. 3) board surface (that is, closed state) or immersed. V winning device opening / closing solenoid 72b for opening / closing driving to a closed state (that is, open state), V distribution driving solenoid for opening / closing driving a distribution plate 73a for opening / closing a V winning opening 74a in the V winning device 72 73c, an ordinary electric outlet solenoid (not shown) for driving the ordinary electric outlet 71a, and another solenoid 209 are connected, and the MPU 201 is an input / output port. 05 through to these transmits various commands and control signals.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), a special winning opening switch 65d for detecting a ball winning the variable winning device 65, and a V winning opening 74a of the V winning device 72. The V winning opening switch 74b for detecting a winning ball is connected to a RAM erasing switch circuit 253, which will be described later, provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 outputs signals from various switches 208 and outputs from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253. Various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 34) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215. Further, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch 217 for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch 217 is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a ball, the ball launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. .. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, a fluctuating effect and “ This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the effect that is performed on the third symbol display device 81 such as "V winning chance effect" and "previous change notice".

  The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225. In the first embodiment, the command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only in one direction, and the command is not transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device 110. ing. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to be able to send and receive commands to and from each other.

  Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, To change the rear image such as the "super reach" effect mode, while controlling the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227, the display control device 114 displays the third pattern based on the depression of the frame button 22. The display device 81 is instructed to display.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 or “ The display control of "V winning opportunity effect" and "previous change notice" is executed.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout controller 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 34). The power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 20, a detailed electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The figure is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113. In the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, in addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221, as fixed value data, a big hit random number table 222a, a big hit type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, a change pattern table 222d, a V winning suggestion. At least a table 222e and a pending change table 222f are stored. Of these tables 222a to 222f, the tables 222a to 222d are the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot type table 202b, the stop pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. is there.

  The voice lamp control device 113 is a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type, which are acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the main controller 110 in response to the start winning and are transmitted by the hold ball number command. On the basis of each value of the counter CS1 and the big hit random number table 222a, the big hit type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the change pattern table 222d, the hold display setting process (see FIG. 40) that is the prefetch process is executed.

  Then, by this hold display setting process (see FIG. 40), what kind of effect the pending variable effect that is the target of the prefetching process will be as a result (whether it is a big hit, "reach display") Whether or not) is determined before execution of the variable effect, and execution of various effects is determined, or the content of the effect of "V winning chance effect" (execution presence or absence) is referred to by referring to the V winning suggestion table 222e. And its contents), and refers to the hold change table 222f to determine the effect contents of the "hold change notice". The details of the V winning suggestion table 222e and the pending change table 222f will be described later.

  In the RAM 223, the fluctuation start flag 223a, the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b, the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c, the sub V drive timer 223d, the V winning suggestion lottery counter 223e, the V winning chance effect flag 223f, the pending fluctuation time. An integrating counter 223g, an execution variation time counting counter 223h, a summing counter 223i, a remaining time timer 223j, a hold change counter 223k, a first holding information storage area 223m, a second holding information storage area 223n, and an execution information storage area 223o are provided at least. ing.

  The fluctuation start flag 223a is a flag indicating that the fluctuation effect should be started in the ON state. The fluctuation start flag 223a is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned ON when the stop type command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S1211 in FIG. 39). Then, it is turned off when the variation effect is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S1402 in FIG. 43).

  When the fluctuation start flag 223a is turned on, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, when the fluctuation effect in standby exists, the fluctuation effect process for executing the fluctuation effect in standby (FIG. 43).

  Sub 1st reserve sphere counter 223b, like the 1st reserve sphere counter 203a of main control device 110, fluctuation production of the 1st special design which is done with 3rd design indicator 81 (special design indicator 37) ( It is a dynamic display), and is a counter that counts up to four times the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation effect of the first special symbol that is held in the main control device 110.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, stores and updates the holding ball number of the variation effect of the first special symbol, and the sub first holding ball number counter 223b. Then, the number of reserved balls of the variation effect of the first special symbol is managed.

  Specifically, the voice lamp control device 113 adds the number of holding balls for the variation effect of the first special symbol by the ball entering the first starting opening 64, and the first holding ball number counter 203a in the main controller 110. When the number of holding balls command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received when the value of is added, the value after addition of the first holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, which is included in the holding ball number command. (That is, the number of holding balls of the variation effect of the first special symbol held in the main controller 110) is stored in the sub first holding ball number counter 223b (see S1204 in FIG. 39).

  Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110, and these When the mode of the variation effect of the first special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set in accordance with the reception, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1 (see S1409 in FIG. 43). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub first holding ball number counter 223b in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control device 110 in accordance with the update of the first holding ball number counter 203a. The value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b can be updated while synchronizing with the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the device 110.

  Sub second reserve sphere number counter 223c, similarly to the second reserve sphere counter 203b of the main control device 110, the variation effect of the second special symbol performed on the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) (motion) It is a counter that counts up to 4 times the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation effect of the second special symbol that is held in the main control device 110.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the second held ball number counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, stores and updates the holding ball number of the variation effect of the second special symbol, and the sub second holding ball number counter 223c. Then, the number of reserved balls of the variation effect of the second special symbol is managed.

  Specifically, the voice lamp control device 113 adds the number of holding balls of the variation effect of the second special symbol by the ball entering the second starting port 71, and the second holding ball number counter 203b in the main control device 110. When the number of holding balls command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received when the value of is added, the value after addition of the second holding ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110, which is included in the holding ball number command. (That is, the number of holding balls of the variation effect of the second special symbol held in the main controller 110) is stored in the sub second holding ball number counter 223c (see S1204 in FIG. 39).

  Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the second holding ball number counter 203b is subtracted in the main control device 110, and these When the mode of the variation effect of the second special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set in accordance with the reception, the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c is decremented by 1 (see S1406 in FIG. 43). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub second holding ball number counter 223c in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control device 110 in accordance with the update of the second holding ball number counter 203b. The value of the sub second reserved sphere number counter 223c can be updated while synchronizing with the second reserved sphere number counter 203b of the device 110.

  The value of the sub first reserved sphere counter 223b and the value of the sub second reserved sphere counter 223c are used to display the reserved symbol and the execution symbol in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the holding ball number indicated by the command in the sub first holding ball number counter 223b or the sub second holding ball number counter 223c in response to the reception of the holding ball number command (FIG. 39 (see S1204 in FIG. 39), at the timing of updating the value of the sub first reserved sphere number counter 223b or the sub second reserved sphere number counter 223c in response to the reception of the variation pattern command and the stop type command (S1409 of FIG. 43 or (See S1406), a display reserved ball number command is displayed to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c after storage or update. It is transmitted to the control device 114 (see S1311 of FIG. 40 or S1410 of FIG. 43).

  When the display control device 114 receives the display holding sphere number command, the value of the holding sphere number indicated by the command, that is, the sub first holding sphere number counter 223b and the sub second holding sphere of the voice lamp control device 113 are received. Drawing of an image is performed so as to display the holding symbol for the value of the number counter 223c and the execution symbol indicating the variation effect being executed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 5B) of the third symbol display device 81. To control.

  As described above, the sub first holding sphere number counter 223b or the sub second holding sphere number counter 223c, while synchronizing with the first holding sphere number counter 203a or the second holding sphere number counter 203b of the main control device 110, The value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 5B) of the third symbol display device 81 is also the first reserved sphere number counter 203a and the second reserved sphere number counter of the main controller 110. It can be changed while synchronizing with the value of 203b. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to accurately display the number of holding balls in which the variation effects of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are held.

  Like the V drive timer 203k of the main control device 110, the sub V drive timer 223d is a timer for the voice lamp control device 113 to recognize whether the V winning opening 74a is in the open state or the closed state. The sub-V drive timer 223d is initialized (for example, cleared to "0") in the initial setting (see S1001) of the startup process (see FIG. 37) of the voice lamp control device 113 performed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. It Then, when the V opening command indicating that the V winning opening 74a is opened is received from the main control device 110, "20000" is set (see S1202 in FIG. 39). After that, in the main process (see FIG. 38), the value of the sub V drive timer 223d is larger than “0” in the counter subtraction process (see FIG. 45) executed every “1 millisecond”. If it is determined (see S1601: Yes in FIG. 45), the value of the sub V drive timer 223d is decremented by “1” (see S1602 in FIG. 45).

  Thus, the value of the sub V drive timer 223d is set to "20000" at the timing when the V opening command indicating that the V winning opening 74a has been opened is received from the main control device 110, and then "1 millisecond" Each time, the value of the sub V drive timer 223d is subtracted by "1" and the subtracted value of the sub V drive timer 223d is discriminated, whereby the V winning opening 74a opened and closed with "20 seconds" as one cycle is The voice lamp control device 113 can recognize whether it is open or closed.

  Specifically, the V open command transmitted from the main control device 110 is transmitted at the timing when the V winning opening 74a is opened, and the value of the sub V drive timer 223d is set every "1 millisecond". The configuration is such that "1" is subtracted. Therefore, when the value of the sub-V drive timer 223d is equal to or smaller than "20000" and larger than "10000", "10 seconds" has not elapsed since the V winning opening 74a was opened. It becomes possible to recognize that the winning opening 74a is open. On the other hand, if the value of the sub V drive timer 223d is less than or equal to "10000" and greater than "0", "10 seconds" or more has elapsed since the V winning opening 74a was opened, and "20". Since the second “second” has not elapsed, the voice lamp control device 113 can recognize that the V winning opening 74a is closed.

  The V winning suggestion lottery counter 223e is a counter that performs a lottery as to whether or not to execute a "V winning chance production" that suggests winning of a ball to the V winning opening 74a when a big hit is achieved. In the first embodiment, in the case where the V-winning device 72 wins the jackpot, when the V-winning device 72 wins the jackpot that does not open, and when the lost “reach display” is extracted, “V Whether or not to execute the “winning chance production” is selected, and when the winning of the lottery is performed, the “V winning opportunity production” is executed. Hereinafter, in the case where the V winning device 72 is a big jackpot that is opened, when the V winning device 72 is a jackpot that is not opened, and when the lost "reach display" is extracted, The variable effect in which the "winning chance effect" can be executed may be referred to as "V winning chance effectable varying effect".

  The V winning suggestion lottery counter 223e is first initialized (for example, "0") in the initial setting (see S1001) of the startup process (see FIG. 37) of the voice lamp control device 113 performed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Cleared). Then, in the counter updating process (see S1113 of FIG. 38) of the main process of the voice lamp control device 113, the values are sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 99”), and the maximum value (for example, “0 In the case of a counter that can take a value of "~ 99", it reaches "99") and then returns to "0". The value of the V winning suggestion lottery counter 223e is updated once (for example, "1" is added) every time the main process loops once.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the V winning chance effect fluctuating effect is executed, the value of the V winning suggestion lottery counter 223e and the V winning suggestion table 222e are referred to. Whether or not to execute the “V winning chance effect” is determined.

  Here, the V winning suggestion table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the V winning suggestion table 222e. As described above, the voice lamp control device 113, when the V winning chance effect feasible variation effect can be executed, at the time of the start winning when the V winning opportunity effect feasible variation effect is performed, the V winning chance effect feasible variation. Based on the type of effect and the value of the V prize suggestion lottery counter 223e at that time, the V prize suggestion table 222e is referred to and whether or not to perform the “V prize chance effect” is determined.

  Specifically, the V winning suggestion table 222e is divided into "miss" and "big hit". Then, for each of the performance modes, that is, for the "non-reach" performance mode (when the "miss" is selected) and the "normal reach" performance mode is extracted for each of the performance modes for the divided groups. For "Normal Reach" in the case of "Reach", "Super Reach" in the case of extracting the "Super Reach" effect mode, and "Special Reach" in the case of extracting the "Special Reach" effect mode, "V prize" The value of the V winning suggestion lottery counter 223e that wins the execution lottery of "chance production" is associated with each other.

  In the V winning suggestion table 222e, the value of the V winning suggestion lottery counter 223e that wins the “V winning chance effect” is not associated with the “non-reach” effect mode at the time of “miss”. That is, in the "non-reach" effect mode, the "V winning chance effect" is not executed.

  In the V winning suggestion table 222e, "90-99" is associated with the value of the V winning suggestion lottery counter 223e that wins the "V winning chance effect" in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "miss". .. That is, when the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of “miss” is extracted, the “V winning chance effect” is executed with a probability of 10%.

  In the V prize suggestion table 222e, "70 to 99" is associated with the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "miss" as the value of the V prize suggestion lottery counter 223e that wins the "V prize chance effect". There is. That is, when the “super reach” effect mode at the time of “miss” is extracted, the “V winning chance effect” is executed with a probability of 30%.

  In the V prize suggestion table 222e, "50 to 99" is associated with the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "miss" as the value of the V prize suggestion lottery counter 223e that wins the "V prize chance effect". There is. That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "miss" is extracted, the "V winning chance effect" is executed with a probability of 50%.

  In this way, even when each "reach display" at the time of "miss" is extracted, the "V winning chance effect" is executed at a predetermined ratio. With such a configuration, by executing the “shooting promotion suggestion” in the “V winning chance effect”, even if the player is a variable effect at the time of “lost” in which the V winning device 72 is not opened. It is possible to prompt the ball to be launched and improve the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, in each “reach display”, the “reach display” with a higher jackpot deriving rate is more likely to execute the “V winning chance effect”. With such a configuration, when the "V winning chance production" that is meaningful when the jackpot is won is executed, the "reach display" with a high jackpot expectation can be executed. Can be suggested to the player before the occurrence of, and the “V winning chance production” and the “reach display” which can be expected to be a jackpot are simultaneously executed as indicated, so that each production is performed independently (that is, “ It is possible to expect the player to win a jackpot more than when the "reach display" or "V winning chance effect") is executed, and to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Next, in the V prize suggestion table 222e, "50-99" is associated with the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" as the value of the V prize suggestion lottery counter 223e that wins the "V prize chance effect". ing. In other words, regardless of the type of jackpot that was won, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "bonus" is extracted, the "V winning chance effect" is executed with a probability of 50%.

  In the V winning suggestion table 222e, "30 to 99" is associated with the "super reach" effect mode at the "big hit" as the value of the V winning suggestion lottery counter 223e that wins the "V winning chance effect". There is. In other words, regardless of the type of jackpot that was won, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "bonus" is extracted, the "V winning chance effect" is executed with a probability of 70%.

  In the V winning suggestion table 222e, "10-99" is associated with the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" as the value of the V winning suggestion lottery counter 223e that wins the "V winning chance effect". There is. In other words, regardless of the type of jackpot that was won, when the "special reach" effect mode for the "bonus" is extracted, the "V winning chance effect" is executed with a 90% probability.

  In this way, in each effect mode at the time of “big hit”, the “V winning chance effect” is executed at a predetermined ratio regardless of the result of the big hit type. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the "shooting promotion suggestion" in the "V winning chance effect". As a result, regardless of whether the V winning device 72 is opened or not, the player is urged to shoot a ball by the “promotion of launching” of the “V winning chance production”, and the pachinko machine 10 is operated. Can be improved.

  In addition, when the V-winning device 72 is won for the jackpot type to be opened, the "V-winning chance effect" can be executed, so that the player can operate whether or not the V-winning hole 74a has won the jackpot (based on the launch). It can be configured such that it can be acquired depending on the number of starting prizes. As a result, in the "V prize chance production", the player can shoot a ball based on his / her intention and activate the fluctuation reducing function, so that the player can move the ball to the V winning opening 74a based on his / her operation. It is possible to create a situation in which a prize can be won and feel a sense of accomplishment based on the creation, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, by making it easier to win the “V winning chance production” as the “reach display” with a higher jackpot expectation degree, it is possible to increase the possibility of winning the V winning opening 74a in the production mode in which the jackpot is easily won. .. Therefore, in the case of winning a big jackpot, the game value obtained can be changed depending on the effect mode of the extracted variable effect in addition to the jackpot type. It is possible to play the game while paying attention also to, and it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The V winning opportunity effect flag 223f is a flag indicating that the "V winning opportunity effect" is executed in the ON state. This V winning chance effect flag 223f is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and when the execution lottery of the "V winning chance effect" is won, that is, the value of the V winning suggestion lottery counter 223e and the V winning suggestion described above. It is turned on when the execution lottery of the “V winning chance effect” is won based on the table 222e (see S1303 in FIG. 40). Then, when the “V prize chance effect” is completed, that is, when the value of the remaining time timer 223j, which will be described later, indicating the execution time of the “V prize chance effect” is “0” (S1607 of FIG. 45: Yes). ), The V winning chance effect flag 223f is turned off (see S1608 in FIG. 45).

  As described above, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 uses the V winning chance effect flag 223f turned on to trigger the remaining time timer, which will be described later, indicating the execution time (remaining time) of the “V winning opportunity effect”. By updating the value of 223j, it is configured to perform the "V winning chance effect" until the variation effect that has triggered the execution of the "V winning chance effect" is started.

  The pending variable time integration counter 223g is based on the jackpot winning of the V winning device 72 being opened, that is, "15 round V opening jackpot" or "7 round V opening jackpot" in the pre-reading determination at the time of the start winning. When the "V prize chance effect" is performed, except for the remaining time of the variable effect being executed at the time of the occurrence of the start winning, the time of the variable effect held at the time of the occurrence of the starting prize and the time of the jackpot. It is a counter for storing an integrated time with the opening time (that is, a time until the V winning device 72 is opened).

  The value of the hold variation time integration counter 223g is first initialized (for example, “S1001” in the initial setting (see S1001) of the startup process (see FIG. 37) of the voice lamp control device 113 performed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. 0 ”is cleared). Then, when the jackpot that the V winning device 72 is opened (hereinafter, the jackpot that the V winning device 72 is opened may be referred to as “V opening jackpot”), a variation effect of the V opening jackpot is produced. The variable time and the variable time of the variable effect that is being held until the variable effect of the V opening jackpot are executed are extracted, and the total variable time of the extracted variable times is the reserved variable time integration counter. It is set to a value of 223 g (see S1352 in FIG. 41).

  Specifically, for example, when the "V winning chance effect" based on the V opening jackpot is won, and the only varying effect that is held at that time is the varying effect that causes the V opening jackpot, The variation time of the variation effect that causes the V opening jackpot is set in the pending variation time integration counter 223g. Further, for example, when the "V winning chance effect" based on the V opening jackpot is won, the variation effects that are held at that time are a variation effect that causes a V opening jackpot and a variation effect with a loss of 1. In this case, the total time of the fluctuation time of the fluctuating effect that causes the V opening jackpot and the fluctuation time of the fluctuating effect of 1 loss is set in the pending fluctuation time integration counter 223g. Further, for example, when the "V winning chance effect" based on the V opening jackpot is won, the variation effects that are held at that time are the variation effect that causes the V opening jackpot and the variation effect of 2 loss. In this case, the total time of the variation time of the variation effect that causes the V opening jackpot and each variation time of the variation effect of each of 2 is set in the pending variation time integration counter 223g. Further, for example, when the player wins the "V winning chance effect" based on the V opening jackpot, the variation effects that are held at that time are the variation effect that causes the V opening jackpot and the variation effect of 3 loss. In this case, the total time of the variation time of the variation effect that causes the V opening jackpot and each variation time of the variation effect of each of 3 is set in the pending variation time integration counter 223g.

  Then, with respect to the pending variation time integration counter 223g in which the variation time of the suspended variation effect is set, the time from the end of the variation effect corresponding to the V opening jackpot to the opening of the V winning device 72 after the jackpot start, that is, , A value (that is, "10000") corresponding to the effect time (that is, "10 seconds") of the opening effect of V open jackpot is added (see S1353 in FIG. 41). The value of the pending variable time integration counter 223g is cleared to “0” at the timing when the “V winning chance effect” ends, that is, when the value of the remaining time timer 223j described later is not greater than “0”. (See S1609 in FIG. 45).

  As a result, depending on the value of the pending variation time integration counter 223g set at the time of winning the "V winning opportunity effect" when the V winning device 72 is opened (that is, the processing of S1352 and S1353 of FIG. 41) Except for the variation time of the variation effect, the time from the start of variation of one or more variation effects being held until the V winning device 72 is opened in the jackpot state can be recognized on the voice lamp control device 113 side. ..

  The execution variation time counting counter 223h is a counter for counting the execution time of the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81.

  The value of the execution variation time counting counter 223h is initialized (for example, “0”) in the initial setting (see S1001) of the startup process (see FIG. 37) of the voice lamp control device 113 performed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Cleared). Then, the variation time of the variation effect to be executed is extracted at the timing when the variation effect is started, and the extracted variation time is set to the value of the execution variation time counting counter 223h.

  Specifically, for example, when the variation effect to be executed is a variation variation of "15 seconds", the value of the execution variation time counting counter 223h is set to "150,000". Further, when the variation effect to be executed is the variation effect of "40 seconds" for the jackpot, "40000" is set to the value of the execution variation time counting counter 223h.

  Then, in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 38), the value of the execution variation time counting counter 223h in the counter subtraction process (see S1110 of FIG. 38) executed every "1 millisecond". Is larger than "0" (S1603: Yes in FIG. 45), "1" is subtracted (see S1604 in FIG. 45).

  Accordingly, by referring to the value of the execution variation time counting counter 223h, the remaining variation time of the variation effect being executed can be grasped. Therefore, by referring to the value of the execution variation time counter 223h at the time of winning the "V winning chance production" based on the V opening jackpot, the variation production being executed during the time until the V winning device 72 is opened. The remaining fluctuation time of can be recognized on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

  The sum counter 223i is used to determine whether or not a ball wins the V winning opening 74a at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened, when the "V winning chance effect" based on the V opening jackpot is won. It is a counter that can be used. The summing counter 223i is first initialized (for example, cleared to "0") in the initial setting (see S1001) of the startup process (see FIG. 37) of the voice lamp control device 113 performed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. It When the player wins the execution of the “V winning chance effect” based on the V opening jackpot, first, the same total change time of the pending change effect and the opening effect stored in the hold change time integration counter 223g described above is the same. The summed time (summed value) with the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect being executed, which is stored in the execution fluctuation time counting counter 223h, is set in the summing counter 223i (see S1354 in FIG. 41).

  Thereby, when the start winning of the variable effect that wins the V opening jackpot, the variable time of the pending variable effect, the effect time of the opening effect, and the execution time of the variable effect being executed are added to the sum counter 223i. Then, in the voice lamp control device 113, the opening start timing of the V winning device 72 can be grasped from the starting winning timing.

  Then, when the time corresponding to the value of the total counter 223i has elapsed from the timing of the start winning, that is, at the timing when the opening of the V winning device 72 is started, is the V winning opening 74a in the open state? In order to determine whether or not it is determined, first, the value of the sub V drive timer 223d at that time is subtracted from the value of the sum counter 223i (see S1355 in FIG. 41). The sub V drive timer 223d is configured to be set to "20000" at the timing when the V winning opening 74a is opened, and is decremented by "1" every 1 millisecond. Therefore, by subtracting the value of the sub-V drive timer 223d from the value of the sum counter 223i, the timing at which the opening of the V winning opening 74a is started after the start winning is generated is once extracted.

  Next, the value obtained by subtracting the value of the sub V drive timer 223d from the value of the sum counter 223i is divided by the value corresponding to 20 seconds which is the opening / closing cycle of the V winning opening 74a (that is, "20000"). The value obtained by subtracting the value of the sub-V drive timer 223d from the value of the sum counter 223i is divided by the value corresponding to the drive cycle of the V winning opening 74a, so that the opening of the V winning opening 74a is started from the start winning timing ( Timing).

  Then, the value obtained by subtracting the value of the sub-V drive timer 223d from the value of the sum counter 223i is divided by the value corresponding to the opening / closing cycle of the V winning opening 74a to determine the remainder value, whereby the above-mentioned start winning At the timing, it is possible to determine whether or not a ball can win the V winning opening 74a when the V winning device 72 is opened. Specifically, since the opening time of the V winning device 72 is "5 seconds" (that is, "5000 milliseconds"), the value of the remainder of the above divided value (hereinafter, a symbol indicating the remainder value after dividing). Is in the range of “0 ≦ X <5000”, the V winning opening 74a is open and the V winning opening 74a is open while the V winning device 72 is opened. It becomes a situation where the ball can be won. On the other hand, if the remainder of the divided value is within the range of “10000 ≦ X <15000”, the V winning opening 74a is closed while the V winning device 72 is open, and the V winning is achieved. The situation is that the ball cannot be won in the mouth 74a. Further, if the remainder of the divided value is within the range of “5000 ≦ X <10000” or within the range of “15000 ≦ X <20000”, while the V winning device 72 is opened, Opening and closing of the V winning opening 74a are mixed, and there are cases where a ball wins the V winning opening 74a and cases where the ball does not win.

  As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can win a ball into the V winning opening 74a at the timing when the V winning device 72 based on the V opening jackpot is opened, when the start winning of the variation effect in which the V opening jackpot is generated. It is possible to understand whether or not the situation will occur. Specifically, the value of the sum counter 223i is set at the start of the "V winning chance effect", the value of the sub V drive timer 223d is subtracted from the value of the sum counter 223i, and the subtracted value is the V winning opening. If the remainder when divided by the opening / closing cycle of 74a (that is, "20000") is within the range of "10000≤X <15000", the ball cannot be won in the V winning opening 74a. In this case, the player is prompted to shoot a ball during the "V winning chance effect", and the variable effect is held until the number of holding balls at which the fluctuation reducing function is activated is reached, and at least the V opening jackpot fluctuation effect is started. By activating the fluctuation reducing function up to the previous time, it is possible to change from a situation in which the ball cannot win the V winning opening 74a to a situation in which the ball can win the V winning opening 74a.

  The remaining time timer 223j is a counter for counting the presentation time of the "V winning chance presentation". The value of the remaining time timer 223j is first initialized (for example, “0”) in the initial setting (see S1001) of the startup processing (see FIG. 37) of the voice lamp control device 113 performed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Cleared). When the execution lottery of the “V prize chance effect” is won, the change time and the change in execution of each change effect held before the change effect which is the trigger for winning the “V prize chance effect”. The remaining time of the effect is extracted, and a value corresponding to the accumulated time of the fluctuation times is set in the remaining time timer 223j (see S1305 in FIG. 40).

  After that, in the main process (see FIG. 38), in the counter subtraction process (see FIG. 45) executed every “1 millisecond”, the “V winning chance effect” is being executed, that is, the V winning chance effect flag. When it is determined that the value of the remaining time timer 223j is larger than “0” when the 223f is turned on (see S1606: Yes in FIG. 45), the value of the remaining time timer 223j is “1”. Is subtracted (see S1606 in FIG. 45). Then, when the value of the remaining time timer 223j is not larger than "0" (see S1607 in FIG. 45: No), the "V winning chance effect" is finished.

  In this way, when the "V prize chance effect" is won, the change time of each change effect that is held before the change effect that triggers the execution of the "V prize chance effect" and the change effect that is being executed. The value corresponding to the remaining time of is set in the remaining time timer 223j, and the "V winning chance effect" is executed based on the value of the remaining time timer 223j, which serves as a trigger for executing the "V winning chance effect". The start timing of the fluctuating effect and the end timing of the "V winning chance effect" are matched, and a series of effects are performed in synchronization (immediately after the "V winning opportunity effect" is finished, the V winning chance effectable fluctuating effect is generated. By starting it), it is possible to execute an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

  The hold change counter 223k is a counter for lottery a display mode of "hold change notice" in the hold symbol and the execution symbol in the cockpit display area Db. In the first embodiment, as the "holding change notice", the display color of the holding symbol and the execution symbol is changed from white (that is, "none") which is a normal display mode to "blue" of a blue display mode, or The display mode of red is changeable to "red".

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 according to the holding ball number command received from the main control device 110, and the jackpot. The prefetch processing is configured to be executable based on the random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the variation pattern table 222d. In the prefetching process, by grasping the effect mode of the fluctuating effect indicated by the hold ball number command, and referring to the value of the hold change counter 223k and the hold change table 222f based on the effect mode, the "hold change notice" is given. Whether or not to perform is drawn by lot.

  The hold change counter 223k is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99") in the counter updating process (see S1113 of FIG. 38) of the main process of the voice lamp control device 113, and the maximum value is obtained. (For example, in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 99", "99" is reached and then it is returned to "0". The value of the pending change counter 223k is updated once (for example, 1 is added) every time the main process loops once.

  Here, the pending change table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the pending change table 222f. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the hold change table 222f based on the value of the hold change counter 223k at that time, and displays the "hold change notice". The aspect is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 22, in the pending change table 222f, the variation effect of each special symbol is divided into a case of "miss" and a case of "big hit". Then, the divided groups are further divided into effect modes, and the values of the hold change counters 223k corresponding to the display mode of "Hold change notice" are respectively assigned thereto.

  Specifically, at the time of the "miss" of the variable effect, the "non-reach" effect mode, the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode, which can be selected at the "miss" time, It is divided into groups for "Special Reach" performance mode. In addition, at the time of a big hit, it is divided into a group for "normal reach" effect mode, a "super reach" effect mode, and a "special reach" effect mode. The possible values of the pending change counter 223k are associated with the divided groups.

  In the hold change table 222f, in the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of "miss", the color of the hold design or the execution design changes to "none" which does not change from the normal display form ("white") and blue. Two display modes of "blue" are prepared in a selectable manner, and the value of the pending change counter 223k is associated with each display mode. In the first embodiment, when “none” that does not change the color of the hold design or the execution design is selected, the “hold change change notice” is not executed.

  In addition, in the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of "miss", and the "normal effect mode" at the time of "miss" to be described later, the display pattern of "red" in which the color of the pending symbol or the execution symbol changes to red The value of the pending change counter 223k is not associated so that is not selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "holding change notice", if the color of the pending symbol or the execution symbol is "red", in the variation effect indicated by the pending symbol or the execution symbol, "super" This is to confirm that the effect mode of “more than reach” is executed. Therefore, in the "non-reach" effect mode in which "greater than or equal to super reach" does not appear, "red" in the "hold change notice" is set not to be selected.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22, the value of the hold change counter 223k and the "hold change change notice" in the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of "miss" are associated with "0-98", " It is "99" for "blue". A value is not assigned to "red", and thus "-" is indicated.

  That is, when the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of "Loss" is selected, 99% of the display modes are "None", "%" are the display modes of "Blue", and "Red". The display mode of is set to be selected at a rate of 0%.

  Therefore, in the "holding change notice" selected at the time of "non-reach" at the time of "miss", the display mode of "none" is easily selected (99%), and the "holding change notice" itself does not easily occur. It is set.

  In the hold change table 222f, in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "missing", the color of the hold design or the execution design does not change from the normal display form ("white") to "none", and the color changes to blue. Two display modes such as "blue" are prepared in a selectable manner, and the value of the pending change counter 223k is associated with each display mode. In the "normal reach" effect mode when "missing", "super reach or higher" and "big hit display" do not appear, as in the "non-reach" effect mode when losing. Therefore, the value of the pending change counter 223k is not associated so that the display mode of "red" in which the color of the pending symbol or the execution symbol changes to red is not selected.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223k and the “hold change change notice” in the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of “miss” is “0 to 89” and “blue” for “none”. Is "90 to 99". A value is not assigned to "red", and thus "-" is indicated.

  That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "miss" is selected, the display mode of "notice of pending change" is 90%, the display mode of "blue" is 10%, and the display mode of "red" is displayed. The mode is set to be selected at a rate of 0%.

  Therefore, in the "hold change notice" selected in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "miss", the display mode of "none" is easily selected (90%), but the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of "miss" The setting is such that the display mode of “blue” is easier to select (1% → 10%).

  In the hold change table 222f, in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "miss", the color of the hold design or the execution design changes to "none" which does not change from the normal display form ("white") and blue. Three display modes of "blue" and "red" that changes to red are selectably prepared, and the value of the pending change counter 223k is associated with each display mode. In addition, the "Super Reach" effect mode at the time of "Loss" executes the variable element of "Super Reach", so that the display mode of "Red" suggesting "Super Reach or more" is selected so that the change is on hold. The value of the counter 223k is associated.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22, the value of the hold change counter 223k and the "hold change notice" in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "miss" are associated with "0-49", " “Blue” is “50 to 89”, and “Red” is “90 to 99”.

  That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "miss" is selected, the display mode of "notice of pending change" is "none", 50%, the display mode of "blue" is 40%, and the display mode of "red" is The display mode is set to be selected at a rate of 10%.

  Therefore, in the "hold change notice" selected in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "miss", the display mode of "blue" is more than the "non-reach" effect mode or the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "miss". The setting is easy to select (1% / 10% → 40%). Also, the display mode of "red", which has a higher jackpot expectation than the display mode of "blue", is set to be selectable.

  In the hold change table 222f, in the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "miss", the color of the hold design or the execution design does not change, "none (white)", "blue" that changes to blue, and red. Three display modes of changing “red” are prepared in a selectable manner, and the value of the pending change counter 223k is associated with each display mode. Note that the "Special Reach" effect mode at the time of "Loss" executes the variable element of "Special Reach", so the display mode of "Red" suggesting "Super Reach or more" is selected so that the change is on hold. The value of the counter 223k is associated.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22, the value of the hold change counter 223k and the “hold change change notice” in the “special reach” effect mode at the time of “miss” are associated with “0 to 29” and “without hold”. “Blue” is “30 to 79” and “Red” is “80 to 99”.

  That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "miss" is selected, the display mode of "no change" is "30%", the display mode of "blue" is 50%, and "red" is "red". The display mode is set to be selected at a rate of 20%.

  Therefore, in the "reserve change notice" selected in the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "miss", as in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "miss", the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of "miss" or The display mode of "blue" is set to be more easily selected (1% / 10% → 30%) than the "normal reach" effect mode. In addition, a setting (0% / 10% → 20%) in which it is easier to select the display mode of "red" than the "non-reach" effect mode, the "normal reach" effect mode or the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "miss" Is becoming

  In this way, even in the case of a "miss" variation effect, by executing an effect equivalent to the "holding change notice" that can occur even during a "big hit", a "big hit" may occur. It is possible to enhance the player's expectation for the jackpot and improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to be capable of simultaneously executing the “holding change notice” and the “V winning chance effect”.

  Conventionally, when a look-ahead effect such as "Hold change notice" is executed, the player expects a jackpot in the variable effect corresponding to the "Hold change notice" at the stage when the "Hold change notice" is displayed, Until the variation effect is executed, there is a tendency to stop the ball firing and wait for the game. In this case, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 may decrease until the result of stopping the variable effect corresponding to the “holding change notice” is derived.

  Therefore, as in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, even when the "holding change notice" and the "V winning chance effect" are configured to be executable at the same time and the "holding change notice" is displayed. The player can be prompted to shoot a ball by the "V winning chance presentation", and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In addition, by overlapping the “reservation change notice” and the “V winning chance production”, it is possible to further enhance the player's expectation for the jackpot and improve the interest of the game.

  Then, in the hold change table 222f, in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit", the color of the hold design or the execution design does not change from the normal display form ("white") to "none" and changes to blue. Two display modes such as "blue" are selectably prepared, and the value of the pending change counter 223k is associated with each display mode. In the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of jackpot, since "super reach or above" does not appear, the hold change counter is selected so that the display mode of "red" in which the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol changes to red is not selected. The value of 223k is not associated.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22, the value of the hold change counter 223k and the "hold change change notice" in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" are "0 to 29" and "blue" for "none". Is “30 to 99”. A value is not assigned to "red", and thus "-" is indicated.

  That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" is selected, the display mode of "no change" is 30%, the display mode of "blue" is 70%, and the display mode of "red" is displayed. The mode is set to be selected at a rate of 0%.

  Therefore, in the "holding change notice" selected in the "normal reach" effect mode during the "big hit", the "blue" display mode is more easily selected than the "none" display mode (70%), and the "miss" It is set so that the "preliminary change notice" is more likely to occur than in the case of the "normal reach" effect mode.

  In the hold change table 222f, in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit", the color of the hold design or the execution design changes to "none" which does not change from the normal display form ("white") and blue. Three display modes of "blue" and "red" that changes to red are selectably prepared, and the value of the pending change counter 223k is associated with each display mode.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22, the value of the hold change counter 223k and the "hold change change notice" in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" are "0-19" and " "20-79" for "blue" and "80-99" for "red".

  That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" is selected, the display mode of "absence change notice" is 20%, the display mode of "blue" is 60%, and the display mode of "blue" is 60%. The display mode is set to be selected at a rate of 20%.

  Therefore, in the "holding change notice" selected in the "super reach" effect mode during the "big hit", the "blue" display mode is more easily selected than the "none" display mode (60%), and It is set so that it is easier to select "Hold change notice" of the display mode of "Blue" and "Red" than in the case of "Super reach" effect mode of "" ("Blue": 30%-> 60%, " "Red": 10% → 20%).

  In the hold change table 222f, in the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit", the color of the hold design or the execution design changes to "none" which does not change from the normal display form ("white") and blue. Three display modes of "blue" and "red" that changes to red are selectably prepared, and the value of the pending change counter 223k is associated with each display mode.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22, the value of the hold change counter 223k and the "hold change change notice" in the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" are associated with "0-9" and "without". It is "10-49" for "blue" and "50-99" for "red".

  That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" is selected, the display mode of "absence change notice" is "none", the display mode of "blue" is 40%, and the display mode of "red" is "red". The display mode is set to be selected at a rate of 50%.

  Therefore, in the "hold change notice" selected in the "special reach" effect mode during "big hit", the "red" display mode is more easily selected than the "none" display mode or the "blue" display mode (50 %), And it is set so that the “holding change notice” of the display mode of “red” can be selected more easily than in the case of the “special reach” effect mode at the time of “miss” (20% → 50%).

  In this way, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holding-balls command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 recognizes whether or not the variation effect indicated by the number-of-holding-ball command is correct and the effect mode, and based on the result or the effect mode. By configuring so as to determine whether or not to execute the "holding change notice" and the display mode, the result of the variation effect is suggested to the player by the hold symbol before the execution of the variation effect, and the variation effect is executed. Until then, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game by making the player predict whether or not the pending variable effect will be a big hit.

  Also, by making it easy to execute the "holding change notice" in the case of a variation effect of "big hit", the player has an expectation for the jackpot due to the appearance of the "holding change notice", The interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the variation effect of "big hit", by simultaneously executing "preliminary change notice of pending" and "production of V winning chance", the display mode of "preliminary change notice of pending" is confirmed to predict the jackpot expectation degree. Based on the prediction result, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball can be fired in the “V winning chance effect”. Therefore, it is possible to enrich the variations of the game and improve the interest of the game.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The first hold information storage area 223m is information for performing a variation effect of the first special symbol that is being held, that is, is acquired from the counter buffer 203c in accordance with the start winning in the main control device 110, and the hold ball number command. This is an area for storing the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 related to the variation effect of the first special symbol transmitted by.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first holding information storage area 223m and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to change the first special symbol. It is configured to execute a performance.

  The second hold information storage area 223n is information for performing the variable effect of the second special symbol that is being held, that is, is acquired from the counter buffer 203c in accordance with the start winning in the main controller 110, and the hold ball number command. This is an area for storing the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 related to the variation effect of the second different symbol transmitted by.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second holding information storage area 223n and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to change the second special symbol. It is configured to execute a performance.

  Execution information storage area 223o, the information of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is being executed in the third symbol display device 81, that is, the main control device 110 is acquired from the counter buffer 203c with the start winning. The area for storing the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 transmitted by the number of reserved balls command.

  When the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, in order to execute the setting of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the above-mentioned first hold information storage Information for performing a variation effect stored in the first holding information storage first area of the area 223m or the second holding information storage second area of the second holding information storage area 223n (counters C1 to C3, CS1, etc.). Value) is shifted to this execution information storage area 223o.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 23, details of the first suspension information storage area 223m, the second suspension information storage area 223n, and the execution information storage area 223o will be described. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the first suspension information storage area 223m, the second suspension information storage area 223n, and the execution information storage area 223o.

  The first hold information storage area 223m has four areas, that is, first hold information storage first to fourth areas. In each of the first to fourth areas for storing first pending information, a jackpot random number counter storage area 223m1 in which the value of jackpot random number counter C1 is stored and a jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of jackpot type counter C2 is stored 223m2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223m3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223m4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored are provided at least.

  The second hold information storage area 223n, like the first hold information storage area 223m, has four areas, the second hold information storage first to fourth areas. A jackpot random number counter storage area 223n1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored and a jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in each of the second pending information storage first to fourth areas. 223n2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223n3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223n4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored are provided at least.

  Further, in the execution information storage area 223o, a jackpot random number counter storage area 223o1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is currently being executed is stored, and a jackpot type counter. The jackpot type counter storage area 223o2 in which the value of C2 is stored, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223o3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and the variation type counter storage area in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored. And 223o4 are provided at least.

  Specifically, the execution information storage area 223o is an area corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is currently being executed.

  Further, the first hold information storage first area is an area corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol that is temporally held first in the variation effect of the first special symbol that has been suspended, and the first suspension The information storage second area is an area corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol which has been secondly retained in the oldest temporally in the variation effect of the suspended first special symbol, and the first suspension information storage third The area is an area corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol that was held in the third oldest temporally among the variable effects of the held first special symbol, and the first reserved information storage fourth area is reserved. This is an area corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol that was held in the fourth oldest time in the variation effect of the first special symbol.

  Further, the second hold information storage first area is an area corresponding to the change effect of the second special symbol which is temporarily held first in the change effect of the held second special symbol, and the second hold The information storage second area is an area corresponding to the variation effect of the second special symbol that is secondly held in the second oldest temporally among the variation effects of the second special symbol that has been held, and the second holding information storage third The area is an area corresponding to the variation effect of the second special symbol which is held in the third oldest time temporally among the variation effects of the held second special symbol, and the second reserved information storage fourth area is reserved. This is an area corresponding to the variation effect of the second special symbol that has been held in the fourth oldest in terms of time of the variation effect of the performed second special symbol.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holding-balls command from the main control device 110, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the corresponding special symbol. Is extracted from the reserved ball number command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the extracted values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the corresponding first holding information storage first to fourth areas or the second holding information storage first to fourth areas, respectively. Big hit random number counter storage areas 223m1, 223n1, big hit type counter storage areas 223m2, 223n2, stop pattern selection counter storage areas 223m3, 223n3, variable type counter storage area 223m4 of areas corresponding to the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball number command. , 223n4.

  Specifically, if the number of holding balls included in the holding ball number command is X (1 ≦ X ≦ 4) and corresponds to the first special symbol, the first special held at that time is held. The number of variable effects of the symbol is X, and the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the number-of-holding-ball command are suspended in the X-th time of the suspended variable effect of the first special symbol. Since it corresponds to the variation effect of the first special symbol, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the counter storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the first reserved information storage X area are stored. At this time, the main controller 110 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball number command in the first reserved X area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. That is, the same value as each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first reserved X area of main controller 110 is stored in the first reserved information storage X area.

  On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives from the main control device 110 a variation pattern command and a stop type command meaning the start of variation production, it is stored in the first suspension information storage area 223m or the second suspension information storage area 223n. The information is shifted to the execution information storage area 223o. In other words, if there is the hold information regarding the second special symbol, the execution of the variation effect of the second special symbol that has been held first in time is started, so the second special symbol that is held first Value of each of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in each storage area 223n1 to 223n4 of the second holding information storage first area corresponding to the variation effect of the execution information storage area 223o corresponding to the variation effect currently being executed. To each storage area 223o1 to 223o4. On the other hand, if there is no hold information regarding the second special symbol and only there is hold information regarding the first special symbol, the execution of the variation effect of the first special symbol that has been temporally held first is started. Therefore, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the first reserved information storage first area corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol that is suspended first are It is moved to each of the storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the execution information storage area 223o corresponding to the variation effect being executed.

  When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223n1 to 223n4 of the second hold information storage first area are moved to the storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the execution information storage area 223o, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223n1 to 223n4 of the second reservation information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223n1 to 223n4 of the second reservation information storage first area, respectively. 2 The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223n1 to 223n4 of the second suspension information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223n1 to 223n4 of the second suspension information storage second area, The counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223n1 to 223n4 of the hold information storage fourth area The value is moved to the storage area 223n1~223n4 second holding information storage third area.

  Furthermore, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the first reserved information storage first area are moved to the storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the execution information storage area 223o, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the first reservation information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the first reservation information storage first area, respectively. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the 1st hold information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the 1st hold information storage second area, respectively. Each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS stored in the storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the hold information storage fourth area The value is moved to the storage area 223m1~223m4 the first holding information storage third area.

  As a result, the same value as that of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f of the main controller 110 is stored in the execution information storage area 223o. Further, the first holding information storing first to fourth areas and the second holding information storing first to fourth areas respectively include the first holding first to first holding areas 203d of the first holding ball storage area 203d of the main controller 110. The same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the four areas and the second holding first to fourth areas of the second holding ball storage area 203e are stored. That is, in the voice lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the variation effects of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that are being executed and are being held by the main controller 110 are the execution information storage areas. 223o and the first reservation information storage area 223m and the second reservation information storage area 223n.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the pre-reading processing such as the "holding change notice" or the "V winning chance production" described above is performed, the sub first holding ball number counter 223b and the sub second holding ball number counter 223c are held. Understand the number of variable effects of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (the number of holding balls). Then, based on the number of reserved balls, the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved among the first reserved information storing first to fourth areas and the second reserved information storing first to fourth areas. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the area are pre-read, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a big hit in the variation effect, the variation time, and the like.

  Specifically, for example, if the value of the sub first holding sphere number counter 223b is "1" and the value of the sub second holding sphere number counter 223c is "0", the variation effect of the first special symbol Since the number of holding balls is 1 and the number of holding balls for the variation effect of the second special symbol is 0, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored for the first holding information storage first area Is pre-read and the judgment is made. Moreover, if the value of the sub first holding ball number counter 223b is "0" and the value of the sub second holding ball number counter 223c is "4", the holding ball number of the variable effect of the first special symbol is Since it is 0 times and the number of reserved balls in the variation effect of the second special symbol is 4, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored for the second reserved information storing fourth area are prefetched and determined. I do.

  The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only in one direction, and the voice lamp control device 113 can access the RAM 203 or the like of the main control device 110. I can't. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with the first holding information storage area 223m and the second holding information storage area 223n, and the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol held by the main controller 110. Since the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the effects are also stored in the voice lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first holding information storage area 223m and the second holding information storage area 223n are stored. By referring to, the pre-reading process can be executed by the voice lamp control device 113. That is, when the variation effect of the first special symbol or / and the second special symbol that has been held is executed, what is the result of the variation effect (whether it is a big hit, the variation time is Etc.) can be determined before execution of the variable effect, and execution of various effects can be determined.

  Further, the voice lamp control device 113 pre-reads the effect mode of each variable effect stored in the first hold information storage area 223m and the second hold information storage area 223n, thereby starting the variable effect in which the V opening jackpot is generated. When a winning occurs, it is possible to know whether or not a situation where a ball can win the V winning opening 74a at the timing when the V winning device 72 based on the V opening jackpot is opened. Then, when the player wins the V opening jackpot, the "V winning chance production" is executed at a predetermined rate, and when the ball cannot be won in the V winning opening 74a as it is, the "V winning chance production" is performed. Prompt the player to shoot a ball. As a result, when the variation effect is suspended until the number of balls for which the variation reduction function is activated reaches the number of holding balls, the variation reduction function is activated at least before the variation effect of the V open jackpot is started, so that the V winning is achieved. It is possible to change from a situation in which a ball cannot be won in the mouth 74a to a situation in which a ball can be won in the V winning opening 74a.

  The shift processing in the first holding information storage area 223m or the second holding information storage area 223n and the execution information storage area 223o is performed by the number of holding balls when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received (variation pattern. First reserve information storage first to fourth areas based on the values of the sub first reserve sphere counter 223b and the sub second reserve sphere counter 223c) before the update based on the reception of the command and the stop type command In addition, the data is moved (shifted) only in the areas corresponding to the pending variable effect among the first to fourth areas for storing the second pending information.

  For example, when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b before updating is “4”, and the entire first reserved information storage area 223m (first reserved information storage It is assumed that data is stored in the first to fourth areas). In this case, the data in the first reserved information storing first area is shifted to the execution information storing area 223o, the data in the second reserved information storing second area is shifted to the first reserved information storing first area, and the first reserved information is stored. The data in the storage third area is shifted to the first reservation information storage second area, and the data in the first reservation information storage fourth area is shifted to the first reservation information storage third area.

  On the other hand, if the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b before updating when the variation pattern command and the stop type command is received is “2”, the data in the first reserved information storage first area is changed to the execution information storage area. 223o, the data in the first reserved information storage second area is shifted to the first reserved information storage first area, and the data shift is completed. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift processing is not performed for the first and second hold information storage third and fourth areas in which the variation effect is not held, the number of data shifts can be reduced. The control load can be reduced.

  Regardless of the presence / absence of data, each data of the first to fourth areas for storing the first reservation information or the first to fourth areas for storing the second reservation information is stored in an area with an area number smaller by one (execution information storage area 223o or It may be configured to shift to the first to third areas for storing the first hold information or the first to third areas for storing the second hold information, respectively. In that case, it is unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) for each of the first to fourth areas for storing the first holding information or the first to fourth areas for storing the second holding information. Therefore, it is possible to easily create a program.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 39) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, a variation effect of the special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 or “V”. This is for controlling a continuous announcement effect such as "winning chance effect" or "reservation change announcement".

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 24 to 36. The process of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a regular process (in this embodiment, a cycle of 2 milliseconds). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Here, for convenience of description, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the startup process and the main process will be described.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds. By the MPU 201 executing this timer interrupt process, various processes that should be executed periodically are performed.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a V drive process for opening and closing the V winning opening 74a in the V winning device 72 is executed (S101). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the V winning opening 74a is opened and closed in a cycle of 20 seconds. Specifically, it is configured to change the drive mode of the distribution plate 73a that opens and closes the V winning opening 74a by switching the V distribution driving solenoid 73c on and off every "10 seconds". ..

  Here, the V drive processing (S101) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the V drive processing (S101) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller.

  In this V drive process (S101), first, the value of the V drive timer 203k is incremented by "1" (S151). Since the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) of the main control device 110 is executed every "4 milliseconds", the value of the V drive timer 203k is also "4 milliseconds" by performing the process of S151. Each time it increases by "1".

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the V drive timer 203k added in S151 becomes larger than "2500" (S152). As a result of the determination, if the value of the V drive timer 203k is not a value larger than "2500" (S152: No), it means that the switching timing of the drive mode of the V allocation drive solenoid 73c has not arrived yet. The process is skipped, and the V drive process (S101) ends. After the V drive process (S101) is completed, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

  On the other hand, in the process of S152, when it is determined that the value of the V drive timer 203k is larger than “2500” (S152: Yes), at least “2500 × 4 mm after the V drive timer 203k is initialized. Since "second = 10 seconds" has elapsed, it means that the switching timing of the V allocation drive solenoid 73c has arrived. Therefore, next, in order to switch the drive mode of the V allocation drive solenoid 73c, it is first determined whether or not the V allocation drive solenoid 73c is on (S153). If it is determined that the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is on (S153: Yes), it is the timing when 10 seconds have elapsed since the V distribution drive solenoid 73c was turned on. The drive solenoid 73c is turned off (S154), the value of the V drive timer 203k is cleared to "0" (S157), and this V drive process (S101) is ended. After the V drive process (S101) is completed, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). By turning off the V distribution drive solenoid 73c in the process of S154, the distribution device 73 closes the left path 74 and opens the right path 75.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S153, when it is determined that the V allocation drive solenoid 73c is not on, that is, when the V allocation drive solenoid 73c is off (S153: No), the V allocation drive solenoid 73c is turned on. Since it is the timing when "10 seconds" have passed since it was turned off, the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is turned on (S155), and the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is turned on to open the V winning opening 74a ( A V-opening command indicating that it is the time when the sphere can flow in (S156) is set, and the process proceeds to S157. When the V distribution drive solenoid 73c is turned on in the process of S155, the distribution device 73 closes the right path 75 and opens the left path 74.

  The V open command set here is immediately transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S102 of FIG. 23) of the timer interrupt process described later. As described above, by immediately transmitting the V opening command to the voice lamp control device 113 immediately after the V winning port 74a is opened, the opening timing of the V winning port 74a and the voice lamp which are grasped by the main control device 110 are recognized. It is possible to synchronize (substantially synchronize) with the opening timing of the V winning opening 74a grasped by the control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this V opening command, the sub V drive timer 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to "20000" (see S1202 in FIG. 39), and the timing when the V winning opening 74a is opened. It is configured so that it can be understood.

  Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. After the V drive process (S101) is completed, external output process is then executed (S102). In the timer interrupt process and the main process, a command or the like to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, or the like is generated based on various processes and is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. .. In the external output process of S102, the output data such as the command stored in the command transmitting ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

  For example, as described above, the V open command set in the V drive process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, it transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 a reserve ball number command set in a start winning process (see FIG. 26) described later. Further, the voice pattern control device executes the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. set in the special figure variation processing (see FIG. 27) and the variation start processing (see FIG. 28) which is one of the special figure variation processing. Send to 113. Also, an opening command, a V winning device opening command, a V winning device closing command, a variable winning device opening command, a variable winning device closing command, a V acquisition command, an ending command, etc., which are set in a jackpot process (see FIG. 29) described later. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the sphere emission signal set when the sphere is emitted in the emission control process (see S113 of FIG. 24) described later is transmitted to the emission control device 112. In the external output process (S102), the V open command which may be directly connected to the game value (“probability change state”) may be preferentially output.

  Next, the prize ball count signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S103), and then the jackpot process for executing the process at the time of the jackpot of the first symbol (third symbol) is executed (S104). .. This big hit process (S104) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After S104, the normal electric power combination control process for executing the drive control process for the normal electric power combination 71a is executed (S105). Briefly, the variable display of the normal symbol is carried out on the normal symbol display device 83 on condition that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, and as a result of the variable display of the normal symbol, the winning symbol of the normal symbol (for example, " When the “(○) symbol” appears and is in a hit state, the normal electric power combination 71a is opened for a predetermined time, while when a lost symbol (for example, “x” symbol) of the normal symbol appears, the normal electric power combination 71a. Keep closed.

  After the processing of S105, subsequently, the processing of reading various winning switches is executed (S106). That is, the states of the various switches 208 connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches 208 are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the winning detection information is set in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, a predetermined prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S102) of the timer interrupt process executed next. Further, on the basis of the ball detection information in the V winning opening switch 74b, a command acquisition ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is issued to the voice lamp control device 113 with a V acquisition command indicating that the ball has won at the V winning opening 74a. Set to. As a result, the V acquisition command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S102) of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S107). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“899” in the first embodiment), it is cleared to “0”. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“99” in the first embodiment), it is cleared to “0” and the second initial value thereof is set. The updated value of the random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

  Next, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the common figure counter C4 are updated (S108). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the common figure counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are the maximum values (the first embodiment. Then, when each reaches "899", "99", "99", "99", "99"), each is cleared to "0". Further, when the big hit random number counter C1 or the public figure hit counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the big hit random number counter C1 or the common figure hit counter C4. Is read as the initial value of, and the initial value is set to the jackpot random number counter C1 or the universal figure counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

  Next, the start winning process associated with winning in the first starting opening 64 or the second starting opening 71 is executed (S109). The details of the start winning process (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a gate passage process for determining whether or not a ball has passed through the through gate 67 is executed (S110). When it is determined in this gate passage process (S110) that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, the value of the counter C4 for ordinary drawing is acquired from the counter buffer 203c, and the value of the counter C4 for ordinary drawing is obtained. While being stored in the storage ball storage area 203h, the normal symbol holding lamp 84 displays the number of normally held variable displays.

  After performing the gate passage process (S110), the process for dynamically displaying each special symbol by the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the processing content of the starting winning process (S109). The special figure variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol, etc. is executed (S111). The details of the special figure variation process (S111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, based on the processing contents of the gate passage processing (S110), it is a setting process for determining whether or not a normal symbol is valid, and performing a variable display of a normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 83 based on the determination result. The diagram variation process is executed (S112). In the universal symbol variation process (S112), the winning / decreasing lottery of the ordinary symbol is performed depending on whether the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is the high probability state or the low probability state. Then, the normal symbol is variably displayed based on the result of the win / no win lottery, and the normal symbol display device 83 displays the display result according to the hit / no hit result.

  After executing the universal figure changing process (S112), the firing control process is executed (S113), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S114), and the timer interrupt process is ended. ..

  In the firing control process (S113), the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of the firing of a sphere. Then, when the sphere launch is on, the information of the sphere launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in order to transmit the sphere launch signal to the launch control device 112. As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S102) of the timer interruption process to be executed next.

  Next, with reference to a flowchart of FIG. 26, a start winning process (S109) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S109).

  In the start winning process (S109), it is determined whether or not there is a ball winning at the first starting opening 64 or the second starting opening 71, and if there is a winning, the value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is won. A process of storing (holding) in the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e corresponding to the mouths 64 and 71 is executed. In addition, the processing for transmitting the values of the respective held counters C1 to C3, CS1 to the voice lamp control device 113 together with the number of holding balls is executed.

  In the starting winning process (S109), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won the first starting opening 64 (starting winning) (S201). Here, based on the output signal of the first starting port switch (not shown) that detects the ball (winning) into the first starting port 64, which is read in the switch reading process (see S106 in FIG. 24), A ball entering the first starting opening 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes (see FIG. 24).

  When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting opening 64 (there is a starting winning) (S201: Yes), the value of the first holding ball number counter 203a (the first holding ball held by the main controller 110). It is determined whether or not the number of operation-holding balls N1 of the dynamic display (variable effect) of the 1 special symbol is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the first embodiment) (S202). Then, if there is a winning in the first starting opening 64 but the number N1 of operation reserve balls is not <4 (S202: No), the starting winning process (S109) is ended, and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). Return to.

  On the other hand, if the number N1 of operation reserve balls <4 (S202: Yes), the value of the first number of reserve balls counter 203a (the number N1 of operation reserve balls) is incremented by 1 (S203). Then, this time, since it is a winning in the first starting opening 64 corresponding to the first special symbol, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination of each random number value C1 to C3, CS1 (S204), and the processing. To S209.

  In the processing of S201, when it is determined that the ball has not won the first starting opening 64 (S201: No), it is then determined whether or not the ball has won the second starting opening 71 (start winning). (S205). Here, as with the first starting port 64, a second starting port switch (not shown) for detecting a ball entering the second starting port 71 (prize) read in the switch reading process (see S106 in FIG. 24). Based on the output signal of, the entry into the second starting port 71 is detected over three timer interruption processes (see FIG. 24).

  When it is determined that the ball has won the second starting opening 71 (there is the starting winning) (S205: Yes), the value of the second holding ball number counter 203b (the number of the balls held by the main controller 110). It is determined whether or not the number of operation-holding balls N2 of the dynamic display (variable effect) of the two special symbols is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the first embodiment) (S206). If there is no winning in the second starting opening 71 (S205: No) or if there is a winning in the second starting opening 71 but the number N2 of operation reserve balls is not less than 4 (S206: No), this The start winning process (S109) is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

  On the other hand, if the number N2 of operation-holding balls <4 (S206: Yes), the value of the second number-of-holding-balls counter 203b (number N2 of operation holding balls) is incremented by 1 (S207). Then, this time, since it is a prize to the second starting opening 71 corresponding to the second special symbol, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination of each random number value C1 to C3, CS1 (S208), and the processing. To S209.

  In the process of S209, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 7) and set as the storage destination in S204 or S208. Of the first reserved first to fourth areas or the second reserved first to fourth areas provided in the first reserved sphere storage area 203d or the second reserved sphere storage area 203e, the first reserved sphere storage area 203d is When designated as the storage destination, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3, and the variation type counter of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the first reserved sphere number counter 203a Reserved (stored in storage area 203d4) To (S209). If the second reserved ball storage area 203e is designated as the storage destination, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2, and the area corresponding to the value indicated by the second reserved ball number counter 203b are stopped. It is reserved (stored) in each of the pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 and the variation type counter storage area 203e4 (S209).

  Specifically, for example, the first reserve ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination in the process of S204 based on the winning on the first starting opening 64, and the first reserve ball number counter after the addition in the process of S203 is performed. If the value of 203a is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in the respective storage areas of the first reservation first area. If the value of the first reserved sphere number counter 203a after addition is "2", the value of the first reserved sphere number counter 203a after addition is "3" in each storage area of the first reserved second area. If there is, the storage areas of the first reservation third area, if the value of the first reservation ball counter 203a after addition is "4", the storage areas of the first reservation fourth area, the counters C1 to C3, respectively. , CS1 values are reserved.

  Further, for example, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination in the process of S208 based on the winning of the second starting opening 71, and the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after the addition in the process of S207. Is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in the respective storage areas of the second reservation first area. If the value of the second holding sphere number counter 203b after addition is “2”, the value of the second holding sphere number counter 203b after addition is “3” in each storage area of the second holding second area. If there is, the storage area of the second storage third area, if the value of the second storage number counter 203b after addition is "4", the storage areas of the second storage fourth area, the counters C1 to C3 respectively. , CS1 values are reserved.

  Next, the value of the first holding ball number counter 203a or the second holding ball number counter 203b (the operation holding ball number N1 or the operation holding ball number N2) after addition by the processing of S203 or S207 and the first by the processing of S209. A reservation ball number command including the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored (held) in the holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e is voiced. In order to transmit to the lamp control device 113, the reserved ball number command is set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S210). As a result, the number-of-holding-balls command is transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113 by the external output process (see S102 of FIG. 24) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. When the process of S210 is completed, the start winning process (S109) is completed and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

  Note that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the number-of-holding-balls command in the process of S210 may be the values themselves read from the counter buffer 203c in the process of S209, or the first hold in the process of S209. You may use what read the value stored (held) in the sphere storage area 203d or the 2nd reservation sphere storage area 203e.

  In addition, in the processing of S201 and S205, when a ball is simultaneously won in the first starting opening 64 and the second starting opening 71, the winning processing of the ball in the first starting opening 64 is preferentially executed and the second starting is performed. Wait for the ball winning process to the mouth 71, and execute the waiting ball winning process to the second starting mouth 71 in the starting winning process (S109) in the next timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). You may comprise.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the special figure variation process (S111) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special figure variation process (S111).

  This special figure fluctuation processing (S111), the dynamic display in the special symbol display device 37 regarding the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and performs the control regarding the variation effect performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special figure variation process (S111), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is currently a big hit (S301). As the jackpot, during the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37 at the time of jackpot, and during the predetermined time before the jackpot game start (that is, jackpot opening), After the jackpot game is over (that is, during the jackpot ending), the predetermined time is included. As a result of the determination in S301, if one of the special symbols is in a big hit (S301: Yes), the special symbol variation process (S111) is finished as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

  In the process of S301, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S301: No), then it is determined whether the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is in dynamic display (S302), the special symbol. If the display mode of the display device 37 is not during dynamic display (S302: No), then, after the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 is stopped, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (S303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the stop of the dynamic display (S303: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). As a result, the stop symbol in the dynamic display (variable effect) is displayed on the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol. ..

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S303, if the predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the dynamic display (S303: Yes), the value of the second reserved sphere number counter 203b (the second special reserved in the main controller 110). It is determined whether or not the number of operation-holding balls N2) of the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the symbol is larger than "0" (S304). As a result, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operation reserved ball number N2) is not "0" (S304: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) regarding the second special symbol. First, the value of the second holding ball number counter 203b (the operation holding ball number N2) is decremented by 1 (S305). This is because the change start processing (S310) described later starts execution of one dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the suspended dynamic display (fluctuation effect) related to the second special symbol. This is because the number of reserved balls related to the special symbol decreases by one.

  Next, the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e is subjected to shift processing (S306). The data shift process (S306) is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the second holding first to fourth areas of the second holding ball storage area 203e toward the holding ball execution area 203f, 2 hold 1st area-> hold ball execution area 203f, 2nd hold 2nd area-> 2nd hold 1st area, 2nd hold 3rd area-> 2nd hold 2nd area, 2nd hold 4th area-> 2nd hold The data in each area is shifted such as the third area.

  On the other hand, in the process of S304, if it is determined that the value of the second holding ball number counter 203b (operation holding ball number N2) is "0" (S304: No), then the first holding ball number counter 203a. The value of (the number N1 of operation reserve balls of the dynamic display (variable effect) relating to the first special symbol which is held in the main controller 110) is determined to be larger than "0" (S307). As a result, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (the operation reserved ball number N1) is not "0" (S307: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display (variable effect) regarding the first special symbol. First, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (the operation reserved ball number N1) is decremented by 1 (S308). This is because the execution of one dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) that has been suspended is started by the fluctuation start process (S310) described later, and thus the holding ball This is because the number decreases by one.

  Next, the data stored in the first reserved sphere storage area 203d is shifted (S309). The data shift process (S309) is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reserved first to fourth areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d toward the reserved ball execution area 203f, 1 hold 1st area → hold ball execution area 203f, 1st hold 2nd area → 1st hold 1st area, 1st hold 3rd area → 1st hold 2nd area, 1st hold 4th area → 1st hold The data in each area is shifted such as the third area.

  After the data shift process of S306 or S309, based on the values of various counters stored in the holding ball execution area 203f by the data shift process, the variation start process for the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed. (S310), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). The fluctuation start process (S310) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S307, when it is determined that the value of the first holding ball number counter 203a (the operation holding ball number N1) is “0” (S307: No), the demonstration effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81. It is determined whether or not it is in the state of being held, that is, whether or not it is in the demonstration (S311). In this determination processing, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the first holding ball number counter 203a or the second holding ball number counter 203b (operation holding ball number N1 or operation It is determined that the demonstration is in progress until any value of the number of reserved balls N2) is determined to be larger than “0”.

  When it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S311: No), the demo command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S312), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration is in progress (S311: Yes), the process directly returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). The demo command set in the process of S312 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process of the timer interrupt process to be executed next (see S102 of FIG. 24), It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, it transmits a display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 demos it on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demo command. Control is performed to display the effect.

  Here, as described above, the demo command is set when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop. Therefore, if the variation effect is not started even after the lapse of a predetermined time after the variation is stopped, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, when it is determined that the demonstration is not in progress in the process of S311 (S311: No), a process of further determining whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped is executed. After executing the change and stopping the fluctuation, the process of S312 may be executed and the demo command may be set when the second predetermined time has elapsed. Accordingly, after the fluctuation stop, when there is no holding ball, it is possible to show the stopped symbol of the stopped fluctuation effect to the player for a relatively long time without immediately starting the demonstration effect.

  In the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is being dynamically displayed (S302: Yes), it is determined whether the dynamic display time (variation time) has passed (S313). ). The display time during the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this dynamic display time If (variation time) has not elapsed (S313: No), the display of the special symbol display device 37 is updated (S314), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

  In the first embodiment, in the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, until the change time elapses after the dynamic display is started, for example, the second LED group 37b (corresponding to the changing special symbol) That is, the display mode in which the upper LED group 37b1 or the lower LED group 37b2) is turned on or off in a predetermined lighting pattern is set.

  On the other hand, if the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 has passed (S313: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set for the special symbol display device 37. Yes (S315). The stop symbol is preset by a fluctuation start process (S310) described later with reference to FIG. In the fluctuation start process (S310), whether or not a big hit is determined according to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the pending ball execution area 203f by the process of S306 or S309, and if it is a big hit, a big hit type counter The value corresponding to C2 determines the symbol corresponding to the jackpot type.

  In the first embodiment, when the determination result is a loss, only the leftmost LED is lit and displayed, and when the determination result is a big hit, each of the lighting patterns corresponds to the type of the big hit. The LED group is lit up and displayed.

  When the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S315, the stop symbol of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed by the second LED group 37b on the special symbol display device 37. A confirmation command is set for synchronous confirmation display (S316), and the process proceeds to S317. The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Upon receiving this confirmation command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display confirmation command to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 is configured to stop the variation effect of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display confirmation command, and to confirm and display the stop symbol.

  In the processing of S317, it is determined whether or not the value of the ST counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is larger than "0" in order to determine whether or not it is the "probability variation state" (S317). This ST counter indicates that when the probability variation transition flag 203j is set to ON in the jackpot ending process (see S411 of FIG. 29) in the jackpot process described later, that is, when the "probability variation state" is started. It is configured such that "100" is set (see S482 in FIG. 33).

  In the process of S317, if the value of the ST counter is not “0” (S317: Yes), it is a “probability variation state”, and the dynamic display (variation effect) of one of the special symbols has ended once, The value of the ST counter is decremented by 1 (S318), and the process proceeds to S319. On the other hand, in the process of S317, if the value of the ST counter is equal to or less than “0” (S317: No), it means the “normal game state” or the “time reduction state”, so the process of S318 is skipped and the process is executed. The process proceeds to S319. In addition, when the value of the ST counter subtracted in the process of S318 becomes "0", the gaming state is changed from the "probability variation state" to the "normal gaming state" (not shown). ..

  In the processing of S319, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is greater than "0" in order to determine whether or not it is the "time shortening state" (S319). This time saving counter is set to "100" (see S484 of FIG. 33) when the probability variation shift flag 203j is off in the jackpot ending process (see S411 of FIG. 29) in the jackpot process described later.

  In the process of S319, if the value of the hour / hour counter is not “0” (S319: Yes), it is in the “time reduction state”, and the dynamic display (variable effect) of one of the special symbols has ended once, The value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (S320), the special figure changing process (S110) ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). On the other hand, in the process of S319, if the value of the time saving counter is equal to or less than “0” (S319: No), it is not the “time reduction state”, and therefore the process of S320 is skipped and the special figure variation process (S111). And ends the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24). The game state is configured to shift from the "time reduction state" to the "normal game state" at the timing when the value of the time saving counter subtracted in the process of S320 becomes "0" (not shown). ..

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, a variation start process (S310) that is one process of the special figure variation process (S111) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process (S310). This variation start processing (S310), based on the values of the various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f according to the game state, while performing a jackpot or lost lottery (jackpot lottery), the special symbol display device 37 and the The dynamic pattern (variation pattern and stop type) of dynamic display and variation effect performed by the three-symbol display device 81 are determined.

  In the fluctuation start process (S310), first, in order to determine the game state, it is determined whether or not the value of the ST counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is larger than "0" (S321). As a result of the determination, if the value of the ST counter is “0” (S321: No), the gaming state is the “normal gaming state” or the “time reduction state”, and the jackpot probability of each special symbol is the low probability state. Therefore, the jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability state is set (S322), and the process proceeds to S324. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the ST counter is greater than “0” (S323: Yes), the gaming state is a “probability variation state” and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is a high probability state. Therefore, the jackpot random number table 202a for high probability state is set (S323), and the process proceeds to S324.

  In the process of S324, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the big hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 8) set in S322 or S323. The big hit lottery (judgment judgment) processing is performed (S324).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the big hit random number counter C1 and the game state (mode) at that time. As described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is a normal low probability state (“normal gaming state” or “time reduction state”), “7,307” , 582 ”is defined as a big hit random number value. Further, when the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in a high probability state (“probability variation state”), “28,122,298,390,486,567,656,750,866” is a big hit. Specified as a random number value.

  In the process of S324, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the jackpot random number values defined in these jackpot random number table 202a, and when they match, the jackpot is determined. It is determined that As a result of the process of S324, when it is determined that it is a big hit (S324: Yes), the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the holding ball execution area 203f and the special figure 1 big hit type corresponding to the first special symbol. Based on the table 202b1 (see FIG. 9 (a)) or the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 (see FIG. 9 (b)) corresponding to the second special symbol, the display mode at the time of jackpot is set (S325).

  In this processing, the jackpot type table 202b indicates a jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the holding ball execution area 203f, that is, "15 round V open jackpot" or "7 round V open." It is determined whether it is a “big hit”, a “15 round V closed big hit”, or a “7 round V closed big hit”. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode at the time of the jackpot in the special symbol display device 37 (display mode of the second LED group 37b) is set.

  Specifically, when the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is data shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f. And the jackpot type is determined based on the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 (see FIG. 9A). When the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type table 202b2 in FIG. 2 (see FIG. 9B).

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S326), and the process proceeds to S329. Specifically, the jackpot type (display mode) determined in S325, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, and the first reserved ball number counter 203a or (and) second A rough effect mode is selected based on the value of the reserved ball number counter 203b and the current game state, and a specific dynamic display is selected from the selected rough effect modes based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The dynamic time (fluctuation time) of (variation effect) is determined. In determining the variation pattern at the time of the jackpot, first, the stop pattern table 202d to be used is selected according to the jackpot type (display mode).

  Specifically, in the process of S326, in the C table 202d3 or the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d provided for the big hit, the value is associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f. The selected performance mode is selected. Then, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 provided for each selected effect mode, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time that are defined in advance.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S324 that it is not a big hit (S324: No), the display mode at the time of losing is set (S327). In the process of S327, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the first reserved ball number counter stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f are set. 203a or (and) based on the value of the second holding ball number counter 203b and the current game state, as a production mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, "non-reach (shortening)" production mode, "non-reach" (Normal) ”production mode,“ Normal reach (shortened) ”production mode,“ Normal reach (normal) ”production mode,“ Super reach (shortened) ”production mode,“ Super reach (normal) ”production mode,“ Special reach (shortened) ” ) ”Effect mode or“ special reach (normal) ”effect mode. In the first embodiment, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the “probability variation state”, the “time reduction state”, or the “normal gaming state”, the stop corresponding to each effect mode The stop pattern table 202d is set so that the value range of the pattern selection counter C3 is different.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of losing is determined (S328), and the process proceeds to S329. In the process of S328, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the variable time until stop display with the lost symbol is determined. Specifically, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f in the group of the fluctuation pattern table 202e provided for each display mode (effect mode) at the time of losing determined in the process of S327. The variation pattern associated with is selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time that are defined in advance.

  In this way, the effect mode and the variation pattern setting process at the time of a big hit and the effect mode and the variation pattern setting process at the time of losing are determined and determined by the same determination program using the same random number values C3 and CS1. Thus, the programs can be shared and the development man-hours at the time of development can be reduced.

  In the process of S329, based on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the processes of S326 and S328, the variation that notifies the variation time according to the variation pattern to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113. A pattern command is set (S329). Specifically, for example, if the jackpot is a lottery, the jackpot is “15 round V open jackpot”, and the variation pattern of “40 seconds” “super reach” is selected, the jackpot is -"15 round V open jackpot" -Variation pattern command indicating "40 seconds" "super reach" is set. Further, if the player loses the jackpot lottery and the "super reach" variation pattern of "35 seconds" is selected, the variation pattern command indicating "miss" "35 seconds" "super reach" is set. .. In this way, even if the fluctuation effects have the same fluctuation time, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the fluctuation pattern command together with whether or not the fluctuation effect is correct and the contents of the rough fluctuation pattern, so that the sound lamp control device 113 includes the effect mode. By grasping the content and the variation time, it is possible to determine the variation pattern of the variation effect in detail based on the information.

  Further, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S325 or S327 is set (S330), and the special figure variation process (see FIG. 24). ) Return to. Specifically, for example, if the jackpot is won and the contents of the jackpot are “15 round V open jackpot”, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (eg, “7” symbol etc.) is not specified. Is set to the stop type command indicating "15 round V open jackpot". If the jackpot is won, and the content of the jackpot is “7 round V open jackpot”, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, “3” symbol etc.) is not specified, but “7 round A stop type command indicating "V open jackpot" is set.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won and the "super reach (normal)" effect mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "787" etc.) is not specified, and the game is lost. A stop type command indicating that the mode is the "super reach (normal)" effect mode is set. If the jackpot is not won and the "normal reach (shortening)" effect mode is selected, the specific third symbol stop mode (for example, "737" or the like) is not specified, and when the player loses the game. The stop type command indicating the "normal reach (shortening)" effect mode is set. Furthermore, if the jackpot is not won, and if the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "258" etc.) is not specified, and the game is lost. A stop type command indicating that it is a "non-reach (normal)" presentation mode at the time is set.

  In this way, by setting the rough stop type based on whether the variation effect is valid or not in the stop type command, the audio lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) grasps the stop type based on the validity and The stop result of the fluctuating effect can be determined in detail based on this information.

  These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are stored in the process of S102 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) executed next. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the variation pattern command and the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display variation pattern command and a display type command based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command, and transmits the display variation pattern command and the display type command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the jackpot process (S104) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this jackpot processing (S104).

  This jackpot processing (S104), when the jackpot of the special design occurs, sets the open frequency (the number of rounds) of the variable winning a prize device 65 and / or the V winning a prize device 72 according to the kind of the jackpot, and the variable winning device 65 and / or the opening time of the V winning device 72 is set. Then, in the case of the jackpot state, the winning device opening / closing control process (S409) for opening or closing the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 72 is executed, and the jackpot state ends at the timing when the jackpot state ends. The jackpot end process (S411) to be set is executed.

  In the jackpot process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S401). If the result of the determination is that the jackpot is not in progress (S401: No), then it is determined whether or not the dynamic display (variable effect) of the special symbol has ended (S402). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display (variable effect) of the special symbol is not finished (S402: No), the jackpot process (S104) is finished and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). If the dynamic display (variable effect) of the special symbol is finished (S402: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won in the dynamic display (variable effect) (S403).

  As a result of the determination in S403, when it is determined that the jackpot is not won in the dynamic display (variable effect) (S403: No), the jackpot process (S104) is terminated and the timer interrupt process (FIG. 24) is performed. Refer to). On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is won in the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) (S403: Yes), first, the number of rounds of the jackpot won is 15R in order to execute the control related to the jackpot. It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not the jackpot type “15 round V open jackpot” or “15 round V close jackpot” is won (S404).

  As a result of the determination in S404, if the number of winning jackpot rounds is 15R (S404: Yes), the round counter is set to "15" so as to perform the opening control of the variable winning a prize device 65 or the V award winning device 72 15 times in this jackpot. Is set (S405), and the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if the winning jackpot round number is not 15R, that is, if the winning jackpot round number is 7R (S404: No), the opening control of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 72 is 7 in this jackpot. In order to perform the round, "7" is set in the round counter (S406), and the process proceeds to S407. The MPU 201 confirms the value of the round counter, and when the value is set in the round counter (that is, "1" or more), the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 72 is controlled to be opened, and the round. The value of the counter is decremented by 1. Then, when the value of the round counter becomes “0”, the jackpot in execution is ended.

  In the process of S407, the opening command is set in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in order to transmit the opening command, which means the start of the jackpot, to the voice lamp control device 113 (S407), and then the jackpot. Opening time (in the first embodiment, "10 seconds" is common to all jackpot types) (S408), the jackpot processing (S104) is terminated, and the processing returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24). ..

  In the processing of S401, if it is determined that the jackpot is already in progress (S401: Yes), the prize winning apparatus opening / closing control processing (S409) for executing the opening / closing control of the variable winning apparatus 65 or the V winning apparatus 72 is executed.

  Now, with reference to FIG. 30, a description will be given of a winning device opening / closing control process (S409) which is one process of the jackpot process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the prize winning device opening / closing control process (S409). As described above, in the winning device opening / closing control process (S409), the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 72 is opened based on the number of times of opening the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 72 set in the jackpot process (S104). Open / close control of.

  In this winning device opening / closing control processing (S409), first, it is determined whether or not the V winning device 72 is open (S421). As a result of the determination, if the V winning device 72 is open (S421: Yes), the V winning device opening process for controlling the opening and closing of the V winning device 72 being opened is performed (S422). The step S409) is ended. After completion of the winning device opening / closing process (S409), the process returns to the jackpot process (see FIG. 29). The details of this V winning device opening process (S422) will be described later.

  In the processing of S421, if it is determined that the V winning device 72 is not open (S421: No), then it is determined whether the variable winning device 65 is open (S423). As a result of the determination, if the variable winning device 65 is open (S423: Yes), the variable winning device opening process for controlling the opening and closing of the open variable winning device 65 is performed (S424), and this winning device opening / closing process ( The step S409) is ended. After completion of the winning device opening / closing process (S409), the process returns to the jackpot process (see FIG. 29). The details of this variable winning device opening process (S424) will be described later.

  In the processing of S423, when it is determined that the variable winning device 65 is not open (S423: No), next, the timing when the opening time set in S408 of the jackpot processing (see FIG. 29) has passed (that is, It is determined whether or not it is immediately after the end of the opening time (S425). As a result of the determination, if the opening time has passed (S425: Yes), whether or not the jackpot type in this jackpot is the V opening jackpot, that is, the V winning device 72, in order to start the first round of the jackpot game. It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot to be opened (that is, "15 round V opening jackpot" or "7 round V opening jackpot") (S426).

  As a result of the determination in S426, if it is determined that the V opening jackpot, that is, "15 round V opening jackpot" or "7 round V opening jackpot" (S426: Yes), 1 round In order to open the V winning device 72 to the eyes, first, the opening setting of the V winning device 72 (for example, turning on the V winning device opening / closing solenoid 72b) is performed (S427). Next, a V winning device opening command indicating that the V winning device 72 is opened is generated and set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S428), and the process proceeds to S429.

  The V winning device opening command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S102 of FIG. 24). Upon receiving this V winning device opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes various controls indicating that the V winning device 72 is opened (for example, generation of a display V winning device opening command). It is configured.

  In the process of S429, the maximum opening time of the V winning device 72 (“5 seconds” in the first embodiment) is set (S429). Then, "10" is set to the value of the winning counter (not shown) for counting the number of winning balls to the V winning device 72 or the variable winning device 65 (S430), and this winning device opening / closing processing (S409) is performed. finish. After completion of the winning device opening / closing process (S409), the process returns to the jackpot process (see FIG. 29).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S426, when it is determined that it is not the V opening jackpot, that is, when it is determined that the "15 round V closing jackpot" or the "7 round V closing jackpot" (S426: No), In order to open the variable winning device 65 in the first round, first, the variable winning device 65 is set to be opened (for example, the special winning opening solenoid 65c is turned on) (S431). Next, a variable winning device open command indicating that the variable winning device 65 is opened is generated and set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S432), and the process proceeds to S433.

  The variable winning device opening command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S102 of FIG. 24). Upon receiving the variable winning device opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes various controls indicating that the variable winning device 65 is opened (for example, generation of a display variable winning device opening command). It is configured.

  In the process of S433, the maximum opening time of the variable winning device 65 (“30 seconds” in the first embodiment) is set (S433), and the process proceeds to S430.

  In the process of S425, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the opening time set in S408 of the jackpot process (see FIG. 29) has elapsed (S425: No), the V winning device opening process (see FIG. 31) described later is performed. It is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the interval time set in S453 or S470 of the variable winning device opening process (see FIG. 32) described later has elapsed (S434). As a result of the determination, if the interval time has elapsed (S434: Yes), the process proceeds to S431 to start any of the second and subsequent rounds of the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the processing of S434, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the interval time has elapsed, the winning device opening / closing control processing (S409) is ended. After completion of the winning device opening / closing process (S409), the process returns to the jackpot process (see FIG. 29).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 31, a V winning device opening process (S422) which is one process of the winning device opening / closing control process (S409) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the V-winning device opening process (S422). In this V winning device opening processing (S422), it is determined whether or not a ball has been detected by the V winning opening switch 74b, and whether or not the closing condition of the V winning device 72 being opened is satisfied. Perform processing, etc.

  In the V winning device opening process (S422), first, it is determined whether or not the V winning port switch 74b is turned on, that is, whether or not a ball has won the V winning port 74a (S441).

  In the processing of S441, if the V winning opening switch 74b is not turned on (S441: No), there is no ball in the V winning opening 74a, so the processing of S442 to S444 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S445. To do.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S441, when the V winning opening switch 74b is turned on (S441: Yes), the sphere has already won in the V winning opening 74a while the V winning device 72 is open, and the probability change transition flag 203j is turned on. It is determined whether it has been done (S442). If the probability variation transition flag 203j is not turned on as a result of the determination (S442: No), the probability variation transition flag 203j is set to on because it is the first time that the V winning device 72 has been opened and the ball has won the V winning opening 74a. Yes (S443). Next, a V acquisition command indicating the winning of a ball to the V winning opening 74a is generated and set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S444), and the process proceeds to S445.

  The V acquisition command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S102 in FIG. 24). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this V acquisition command, various controls relating to the fanfare effect indicating that a ball wins the V winning opening 74a and a "probability variation state" is given after the jackpot ends (for example, It is configured to execute a display V acquisition command).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S442, when it is determined that the probability variation shift flag 203j is turned on (S442: Yes), the ball has already been won in the V winning opening 74a, so the processing of S443 and S444 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S445.

  In the process of S445, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the V winning device 72 set in S429 of the winning device opening / closing control process (S409) has passed (S445). As a result of the determination, if it is the timing when the opening time of the V winning device 72 has elapsed (S445: Yes), the closing condition of the V winning device 72 is satisfied, and it is the closing timing of the V winning device 72 in the round, and thus the winning is achieved. The value of the counter is cleared to "0" (S446), and the process proceeds to S450 in order to close the V winning device 72. The closing processing of the V winning device 72 from S450 will be described later.

  On the other hand, in the process of S445, if it is not the timing when the opening time of the V winning device 72 has elapsed (S445: No), then a ball is won in the V winning device 72, and before the sorting in the V winning device 72. It is determined whether or not a V winning device switch (not shown) provided on the path 72c (see FIG. 4) is turned on (S447). As a result of the determination, if the V winning device switch is turned on (S447: Yes), it means that a sphere has flowed into the V winning device 72, so the value of the winning counter (not shown) is decremented by 1 (S448). ) Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter after subtracting 1 is greater than "0" (S449). When the value of the winning counter is not larger than "0" (S449: No), that is, when the value of the winning counter is "0" or less, 10 or more balls are won in the V winning device 72 to win the V winning. Since the condition for closing the device 72 is satisfied, the process proceeds to S450 in order to close the V winning device 72.

  In the process of S447, if it is determined that the V winning device switch is not turned on (S447: No), or in the process of S449, it is determined that the value of the winning counter is larger than “0”. When (S449: Yes), the closing condition of the V winning device 72 is not satisfied, and in order to continue the opening of the V winning device 72, the processes of S450 to S453 are skipped and the V winning device is opened. The middle processing (S422) is ended. After the completion of the V winning device opening process (S422), the process returns to the winning device opening / closing control process (see FIG. 30).

  In the closing processing of the V winning device 72 from S450, first, the V winning device 72 is set to be closed (for example, the V winning device opening / closing solenoid 72b is turned off) (S450), and then the V lamp device 113 is set to V. A V winning device closing command indicating that the winning device 72 is closed is set (S451), and the process proceeds to S452. The V winning device closing command set in the process of S451 is stored in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process of the timer interrupt process to be executed next (see S102 of FIG. 24). ), It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  Next, in the process of S452, since the V winning device 72 is opened and closed to complete one round (that is, the first round), the value of the round counter is decremented by one (S452), and the next round (that is, The interval time (for example, “2 seconds”) until the start of the second round) is started (the variable winning device 65 is opened) is set (S453), the V winning device opening process (S422) is ended, and the winning is made. The process returns to the device opening / closing control process (see FIG. 30).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a variable winning device opening process (S424) which is one process of the winning device opening / closing control process (S409) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a process (S424) during opening of the variable winning device. In the process of opening the variable winning device (S424), a process of determining whether or not the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 being opened is satisfied is executed.

  In this variable winning device opening processing (S424), first, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the variable winning device 65 set in S433 of the above-described winning device opening / closing control processing (S409) has elapsed (S461). As a result of the determination, if it is the timing when the opening time of the variable winning device 65 has passed (S461: Yes), the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 is satisfied, and it is the closing timing of the variable winning device 65 in the round, so the winning is made. The value of the counter is cleared to "0" (S462), and the process proceeds to S466 to close the variable winning a prize device 65. The process of closing the variable winning device 65 from S466 will be described later.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S461, if it is not the timing when the opening time of the variable winning a prize device 65 has elapsed (S461: No), then, a special winning opening switch (not shown) provided in the special winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65. No.) is turned on, that is, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the special winning opening 65a (S463).

  In the process of S463, if a ball has been won in the special winning opening 65a (S463: Yes), the value of the winning counter is decremented by 1 (S464), and the value of the winning counter decremented by 1 is less than "0". It is determined whether the value is large (S465). When the value of the winning counter is not greater than "0" (S465: No), that is, when the value of the winning counter is "0" or less, 10 or more balls are won in the special winning opening 65a and the variable winning is performed. Since the condition for closing the device 65 is satisfied, the process proceeds to S466 in order to close the variable winning device 65.

  In the process of S463, if it is determined that no ball has been won in the special winning opening 65a (S463: No), or in the process of S465, the value of the winning counter is greater than “0”. When it is determined (S465: Yes), the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 is not established, and in order to continue the opening of the variable winning device 65, the processes of S466 to S470 are skipped and the variable winning device 65 is skipped. The device opening process (S424) is ended. After the processing of opening the variable winning device (S424) is completed, the process returns to the opening / closing control of the winning device (see FIG. 30).

  In the closing processing of the variable winning a prize device 65 from S466, first, the closing setting of the variable winning a prize device 65 (for example, turning off the special winning opening solenoid 65c) is performed (S466), then the variable winning a prize controller 113 to the variable winning a prize. A variable winning device closing command indicating that the device 65 has been closed is set (S467), and the process proceeds to S468. The variable winning device closing command set in the process of S467 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process of the timer interrupt process to be executed next (see S102 of FIG. 24). ), It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  Next, in the process of S468, one round of the variable winning device 65 has been exhausted, so the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S468), and the value of the round counter after decrementing by 1 is greater than "0". It is determined (S469). When the value of the round counter is larger than "0" (S469: Yes), the number of rounds in the jackpot (the number of remaining open times of the variable winning device 65) remains. Therefore, the interval time (for example, "2 seconds") until the next variable winning a prize device 65 is opened is set (S470), the variable winning award opening process (S424) is ended, and the award winning device opening / closing control process ( Return to FIG. 30).

  On the other hand, in the process of S469, when the value of the round counter is not larger than “0” (S469: No), that is, when the value of the round counter is “0” or less, the V winning device 72 in this jackpot and Since all the opening operations of the variable winning device 65 have been completed, the interval time is not set (that is, S470 is skipped) in order to end the jackpot state, and the variable winning device opening processing (S424) is ended. Then, the process returns to the prize winning device opening / closing control process (see FIG. 30).

  Returning to the jackpot processing (S104) of FIG. 29, the description will be continued. After the winning device opening / closing control process of S409 (see FIG. 30) is finished, it is then determined whether or not the value of the round counter is greater than “0” (S410). As a result of the determination, if the round counter has a value larger than “0” (S410: Yes), the jackpot state is continued, and thus the jackpot end setting processing of S411 is skipped and the jackpot processing (S104). To finish.

  On the other hand, in the process of S410, when the value of the round counter is not larger than “0” (S410: No), that is, when the value of the round counter is “0” or less, the V winning device 72 and Since all the opening operations of the variable winning device 65 have been completed, in order to end the big hit state, a big hit ending process is performed (S411), and this big hit process (S104) is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 33, a jackpot end process (S411) which is one process of the hit process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending process (S411). In this jackpot ending process (S411), a process of setting an ST counter and a time saving counter is executed based on the jackpot type that has been won.

  In this jackpot ending process (S411), first, it is determined whether or not a ball has won the V winning opening 74a during the jackpot and the probability variation transition flag 203j is turned on (S481). As a result of the determination, if the probability change transition flag 203j is turned on (S481: Yes), the ball has been won in the V winning opening 74a, so the game state after the jackpot is finished is dynamically displayed as a special symbol (fluctuation effect). ) Is executed for 100 times, the value of the ST counter is set to "100" (S482), the probability change transition flag 203j is set to OFF (S483), and the process proceeds to S485. Transition.

  On the other hand, in the process of S481, if the probability variation transition flag 203j is not turned on (S481: No), since there is no ball in the V winning opening 74a during this jackpot, the transition condition to the "probability variation state" is set. Has not been established. Therefore, in order to set the gaming state after the jackpot is over to the "time saving state" until the dynamic display (variable effect) of the special symbol is executed 100 times, "100" is set to the value of the time saving counter (S484). ), The process proceeds to S485.

  Next, in the process of S485, an ending command indicating the start of the jackpot ending effect is set to the voice lamp control device 113 (S485). Then, the jackpot end setting process for setting the ending time and the like is performed (S486), the jackpot end process (S411) is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot process (see FIG. 29). The ending command set in the process of S485 is stored in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process of the timer interrupt process to be executed next (see S102 of FIG. 24). Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice indicating that the jackpot is over, controls the lamp, and transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. Based on the reception of the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 is controlled to display an ending effect (for example, a suggestion of the gaming state after the end of the big hit).

  In this way, in the jackpot process (see FIG. 29), whether or not the game state after the jackpot game is the “probability variation state” is set depending on whether or not the ball wins the V winning opening 74a. Therefore, it is possible to create a game of how to win a ball in the V winning opening 74a which is driven to open and close at a constant cycle, enrich a variety of games, and improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the NMI interrupt processing executed in main controller 110 when a power failure or the like occurs will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like.

  By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The MPU 201, to which the power failure signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal, interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, and stores the power cut occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power cut occurrence information (S801). ), And ends the NMI interrupt process.

  Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

  In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Then, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a wait process (“1 second” in the first embodiment) is performed. ) Is executed (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S913. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of shutting off the power supply did not end normally, the process proceeds to S913 also in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S913.

  Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, which will be described in S926 of FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S913, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S913). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization processing (S914, S915) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the start-up process, the initialization process (S914, S915) of the RAM 203 is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S914, S915) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S914, S915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to "0" (S914), and then the initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S915). After the initialization processing of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Then, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the game state at the time of cutting off the drive power is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the ball payout control can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, the V allocation drive solenoid 73c is initialized (that is, turned off) (S910), and the value of the V drive timer 203k is initialized (that is, initialized) with the initialization of the V distribution drive solenoid 73c. "0" is cleared), and the process proceeds to S912. In this way, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the processing is started from the state where the V allocation drive solenoid 73c is turned off, that is, the state where the V winning opening 74a is closed. Even when the V winning opening 74a is opened by turning on the V sorting drive solenoid 73c, the game can be started from the state where the V winning opening 74a is always closed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent occurrence of drive abnormality of the V distribution drive solenoid 73c and the like, and it is possible to prevent a ball from winning at the V winning opening 74a due to the drive abnormality.

  When a momentary power failure or voltage drop (so-called momentary power failure) occurs, the V distribution drive solenoid 73c and the V drive timer 203k are not initialized, and the state before the momentary power failure is maintained. You may. When a momentary power failure occurs, the control content of the voice lamp control device 113 may be maintained. In that case, the opening / closing mode of the V winning opening 74a recognized by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device. If there is a discrepancy between the opening / closing manner of the V winning opening 74a recognized in 113, there is a possibility that the "V winning opportunity effect" may not be properly executed. Therefore, when a momentary power failure occurs, the values of the V allocation drive solenoid 73c and the V drive timer 203k are maintained in the state before the momentary power failure to open and close the V winning opening 74a recognized by the voice lamp control device 113. Can be consistent with.

  In the process of S912, the interrupt is permitted (S912). Then, the process shifts to a main process (see FIG. 36) described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In the main process, the counter update process and the power-off process are roughly performed.

  In the main process, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S921). Then, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S921: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 does not output the power failure signal SG1 and the power source is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S922, S923).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S922). Specifically, when the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and the counter value reaches the maximum value (“899”, “99” in the first embodiment). , Clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are respectively stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c areas of the RAM 203. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S108 (see FIG. 24) (S923), and the process proceeds to S921.

  Here, while the main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 24 is activated and executed at predetermined time intervals (“4 milliseconds” in the first embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed depending on the game state. For example, during the big hit, execution to control the opening and closing of the special winning opening 65a is performed, and if there is a passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the display control relating to the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 83 is performed. . Further, in the jackpot lottery executed when starting the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37, the number of jackpot random numbers to be compared with the obtained jackpot random number counter C1 differs depending on whether it is a high-probability state or a low-probability state. Come on. Therefore, the time required to execute the timer interrupt process once changes depending on the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, and changes depending on the state of the game at that time.

  The processing of S922 and S923, which is one of the main processing, is executed in the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing. That is, since the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI1 are updated. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1 and the initial value of the universal figure counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the jackpot random number counter C1 and the universal figure counter C4 that use these as initial values for updating are randomly updated. It can have sex.

  Further, in the processing of S921, if the RAM 203 stores the information on occurrence of power failure (S921: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 34 is executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S924 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S924), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S925). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S926), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S927), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

  The process of S921 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S922 and S923 performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) is completed. As a result, in the main process of the main controller 110, various settings by the timer interrupt process are completed, and the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when the counters CINI1, CINI2, CS1 are updated. .. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S921 after the start-up process (see FIG. 35) is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S921, similarly to the case where the process is initialized in the startup process.

  Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the power-off process, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S921 can be started. As a result, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  In addition, in the first embodiment, the process that is executed periodically is executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and in the main process, each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is updated at the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. Although the case has been described above, a part or all of the process executed in the timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined time (for example, “2 milliseconds”) in the main process described later. You may comprise. For example, the prize ball count signal, the payout abnormality signal reading process (S103), the jackpot process (S104), the normal electric power combination control process (S105), and the switch reading process (which are executed in the timer interrupt process in the first embodiment) ( A part or all of S106) may be configured to be executed every 2 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

  In this case, a step of determining whether or not a predetermined time (“2 milliseconds”) has elapsed in the main process is provided, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process to be executed every predetermined time is executed. The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, the update of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 will be executed in the remaining time of the process executed every predetermined time, but the process executed every predetermined time is executed depending on the state of the game. Since the time required for the above changes, each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 can be updated at random even with such a configuration.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 45. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a startup process (see FIG. 37) that is started when the power is turned on and a main process (see FIG. 38) that is executed after the startup process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 37, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1001). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1117 is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous stop") in the current startup processing (see FIG. 38). It is determined whether or not the process is started during the execution of () (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 38, the voice lamp control device 113, upon receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110, executes the power-off process of S1117. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1117 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

  If the power-off process in progress flag is off (S1002: No), the startup process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process of S1117 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

  The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not “55AAh”, it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

  If the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to power shutdown). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, the startup process this time was started after the momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off process of S1117 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S1008.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1117, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1004, and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, and it is confirmed whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to “0”.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read / write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You can

  In the processing of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1117 is executed (see S1116 of FIG. 38). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1117 is executed, the process of S1008 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S1117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing the commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the process of S1008 with the power-off flag turned off is that the present startup process is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of S1004 to S1006 is performed and the process of S1008 is performed. This is the case where the processing has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) and started due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1009, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and then the interrupt permission is set. Then (S1011), the process proceeds to the main process.

  It should be noted that the clear processing of S1009 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1004 when the processing of S1008 is reached through the processing of S1004 to S1006. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this main processing.

  When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not "1 msec" or more has elapsed since the process of S1101 was executed last time (S1101), and if "1 msec" or more has not elapsed ( S1101: No), the process proceeds to S1111 without performing the processes of S1102 to S1110. In the processing of S1101, it is not necessary to perform processing in a short cycle (within “1 millisecond”) in S1102 to S1110 to determine whether “1 millisecond” has elapsed, whereas in S1111 This is because it is preferable to execute the variation effect process and the command determination process of S1112 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to make the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

  In the process of S1101, if it is determined that “1 millisecond” or more has elapsed since the process of S1101 was executed last time (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to S1102. If the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the startup process shown in FIG. 37, the process directly proceeds to the process of S1102.

  In the process of S1102, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1103 to S1113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1107 described later is set (S1103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1104). .. The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, “30 seconds”) when the power is turned on, and the notification is the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device. 227. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process goes to S1105 without the power-on notification process.

  Next, in the process of S1105, a jackpot effect process for executing an effect related to the jackpot set by the command determination process of S1112 to be described later is performed (S1105), and the process proceeds to S1106. Details of this big hit production process (S1105) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, in the processing of S1106, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1106). In this frame button input monitoring / rendering process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed is monitored during the effective period of the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the effect, and within the valid period. This is a process of setting to produce an effect corresponding to the confirmation of the input of the frame button 22.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1106) is finished, the ramp edit process is then executed (S1107), and then the sound edit / output process is executed (S1108). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound edit / output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1108, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1110. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1107 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound edit / output process of S1108 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81. Run in time.

  Next, in the processing of S1110, the counter (that is, the sub-V drive timer 223d and the execution variation time) provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 and set in the command determination processing (S1112) and the variation effect processing (S1111) described later. The counter (223h) and the timer (that is, the remaining time timer 223j) are decremented (updated) by "1" every "1 millisecond" (S1110), and the process proceeds to S1111. Details of this counter subtraction processing (S1110) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1111, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect process which is a process for starting the variation effect based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110. Is executed (S1111), and the process proceeds to S1112. Details of this variation effect process (S1111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1112, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1112), and the process proceeds to S1113. Details of this command determination processing (S1112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In S1113, a counter updating process of updating various counters provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S1113). For example, updating the counter that determines the detailed variation pattern of the variation effect, updating the V winning suggestion lottery counter 223e that randomly selects “V winning chance effect”, and updating the hold change counter 223k that randomly selects “Hold change notice”. The counter updating process is performed. The counter is updated by sequentially incrementing it by 1 within a predetermined range (“0 to 99” in this embodiment), and returning to “0” after reaching the maximum value (“99”).

  After the processing of S1113 is finished, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1114 (S1114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S1116), and the power-off process is executed (S1117). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1118), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1114 (S1114: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1115: No), the process returns to S1101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1115: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes.

  Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he or she can call a clerk in the hall or the like to request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, a command determination process (S1112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1112). This command determination processing (S1112) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp controller 113, and is received from the main controller 110 or the display controller 114 as described above. Determine the command that did.

  In the command determination processing (S1112), first, of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read and analyzed, and the main control device 110 It is determined whether or not the V open command is received (S1201). When it is determined that the V opening command has been received (S1201: Yes), it is the timing when the V winning opening 74a is opened, so "20000" is set to the value of the sub V drive timer 223d (S1202). ), The command determination process (S1112) ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 38).

  The sub-V drive timer 223d set here is decremented by 1 every "1 millisecond" in the counter subtraction processing (see FIG. 45) described later (see S1602 in FIG. 45 described later). The voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the opening / closing mode (opening / closing timing) of the V winning opening 74a by determining the value of the sub V driving timer 223d. Specifically, if the value of the sub-V drive timer 223d is less than or equal to "20,000" and greater than "10000", the voice lamp control device 113 can know that the V winning opening 74a is open, If the value is "10000" or less and greater than "0", the voice lamp control device 113 can know that the V winning opening 74a is closed.

  In the processing of S1201, if it is determined that the V open command is not received (S1201: No), then it is determined whether or not the holding ball number command is received from the main control device 110 (S1203). Then, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (S1203: Yes), the reserved ball number of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the first reserved ball number counter 203a and / or the second reserved ball number counter 203a). The value of the reserved ball number counter 203b) is extracted and stored in the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b and / or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1204).

  Then, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 which are also included in the holding ball number command are updated in S1204 to the sub first holding ball number counter 223b. Alternatively, the first to fourth storage areas 1 to 4 of the first storage area 223m, or the second storage area 223n, of the first storage area 223m, or the second storage area of the second storage area 223n. ~ Stored in the fourth area (S1205).

  That is, when the value of the sub first reserved sphere number counter 223b (reserved sphere number) is X (1 ≦ X ≦ 4), the extracted jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, The respective values of the variation type counter CS1 are stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223m1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223m2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223m3, and the variation type counter storage area 223m4 of the first pending information storage X area, respectively. It

  Therefore, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the command of the number of reserved balls based on the winning in the first starting opening 64 are the main controller 110 when the balls win the first starting opening 64 (start winning). When the number of holding balls of the first special symbol included in the holding ball number command is X, the holding number of the first holding ball storage area 203d of the main controller 110 This is the value stored in the X area. That is, the same information (values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) as that of the first holding ball storage area 203d of the main control device 110 is stored in the first holding information storage area 223m of the voice lamp control device 113. Become.

  Further, when the value of the sub second holding ball number counter 223c (the number of holding balls) is X (1 ≦ X ≦ 4), the extracted jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, The respective values of the variation type counter CS1 are stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223n1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223n2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223n3, and the variation type counter storage area 223n4 of the second suspension information storage X area, respectively. It

  Therefore, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3, CS1 included in the command for the number of reserved balls based on the winning in the second starting opening 71 are the values of the main controller 110 when the balls win the second starting opening 71 (start winning). When the number of holding balls of the second special symbol included in the holding ball number command is X, the holding number of the second holding ball storage area 203e of the main controller 110 This is the value stored in the X area. That is, the same information (values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) as that of the second hold ball storage area 203e of the main controller 110 is stored in the second hold information storage area 223n of the voice lamp controller 113. Become.

  Here, since the number of reserved balls command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the balls win the first starting opening 64 or the second starting opening 71 (start winning), every time there is a starting winning. , S1204, the value of the sub first holding ball number counter 223b and / or the sub second holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the first holding ball number counter 203a or the second holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of the reserved ball number counter 203b. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the sub first holding ball number counter 223b and / or the sub second holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the first holding ball number counter 203a and / or the main control device 110. Alternatively, even if the value deviates from the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b and / or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected at the time of detecting the winning a prize. , And can be adjusted to the value of the first holding sphere number counter 203a and / or the second holding sphere number counter 203b of the main controller 110.

  In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first holding information storage area 223m and the second holding information storage area 223n, respectively, to refer to a pre-reading setting process (FIG. 40) described later. The read-ahead determination (processing) can be performed in (see). That is, when the suspended variable effect is executed, the result of the variable effect is determined (whether it is a big hit or not, what is the change time, etc.) before execution of the variable effect. The voice lamp control device 113 executes controls such as determining execution of various effects, determining whether or not to execute "preliminary change notice" and display mode, and determining execution of "V winning chance effect". can do.

  After the processing of S1205, the look-ahead setting processing (S1206) is performed to determine the display mode of the reserved symbols and the execution of the "V winning chance effect" based on the various information indicated by the reserved ball number command received this time. Returning to the processing (see FIG. 38). Details of the prefetch setting process (S1206) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1203, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S1203: No), it is then determined whether or not the variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1207). If it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1207: Yes), the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S1208).

  The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in a variation effect process (see FIG. 43) described later, a display variation pattern for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type. Used when setting a command. After that, the command determination process (S1112) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 38).

  In the process of S1207, when it is determined that the variation pattern command is not received (S1207: No), it is then determined whether the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S1209). When it is determined that the stop type command is received (S1209: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1210).

  The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and when a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect is set in the variable effect process (see FIG. 43) described later. Used for. After that, the fluctuation start flag 223a indicating that the fluctuation effect is started is set to ON (S1211), the command determination processing (S1112) is ended, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 38).

  The stop type command indicates the stop type of the fluctuating effect whose fluctuation pattern is indicated by the fluctuation pattern command after the main control device 110 transmits the fluctuation pattern command when starting the fluctuating effect. This command is always sent from 110. By setting the fluctuation start flag 223a to ON by the processing of S1211, in the fluctuation effect processing (see FIG. 43) executed later, the fluctuation start flag 223a is extracted based on the value of each counter C1 or the like included in the reserved ball number command first. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern type of the variation effect and the variation pattern type of the variation effect extracted from the received variation pattern command match. Further, whether or not the stop type of the fluctuating effect extracted based on the value of each counter C1 or the like included in the reserved ball number command previously matches the stop type of the fluctuating effect extracted from the received stop type command Is determined. As a result of these determinations, in the variation effect of 1, when the variation pattern based on the hold ball number command does not match the variation pattern based on the change pattern command, or the stop type and the stop type command based on the hold ball number command When the stop type based on the above does not match, it is determined that some abnormality (for example, command reception abnormality due to noise) has occurred, and error processing for indicating the abnormality is performed.

  As a result of the processing in S1209, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S1209: No), it is then determined whether the confirmation command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1212). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81. If it is determined that the confirmation command has been received (S1212: Yes), the display confirmation command for notifying the display control device 114 of the reception of the confirmation command is set (S1213), and the command determination processing is executed. The process ends (S1112) and returns to the main process (see FIG. 38).

  As a result of the processing in S1212, if it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received (S1212: No), then a command related to the jackpot, that is, an opening command, a V winning device opening command, a V winning device closing command, and a V acquisition command. It is determined whether or not a variable winning device opening command, a variable winning device closing command, an ending command, etc. have been received (S1214). Then, when it is determined that the above command regarding the jackpot has not been received (S1214: No), the process according to the other command is executed (S1216), the command determination process (S1112) is ended, and the main Returning to the processing (see FIG. 38). On the other hand, when it is determined that the command related to the big hit has been received (S1214: Yes), the process corresponding to the command related to the big hit is executed, and the process shifts to the big hit command process (S1215). After the jackpot command process (S1215) is finished, the command determination process (S1112) is finished and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 38).

  Next, the prefetch setting process (S1208) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the prefetch setting process (S1208). As described above, this prefetch setting process (S1208) is executed when the number of reserved balls command is received from main controller 110. Then, in the prefetch setting process (S1208), it is determined whether or not to execute the "V winning opportunity effect", and in the "V winning opportunity effect", whether it is a timing at which a ball can win the V winning opening 74a. The "launch promotion suggestion" that suggests is executed. Further, in the prefetch setting process (S1208), it is determined whether or not to execute the "holding change notice" in the holding symbol, and the display holding ball number command is set according to the determined content.

  In the prefetch determination process (S1208), the MPU 221 first determines whether or not the V winning chance effect flag 223f is turned on (S1301). As a result of the determination, if the V winning chance effect flag 223f is turned on (S1301: Yes), the setting process of "V winning chance effect" has already been executed, so the processes of S1302 to S1307 are skipped and the process is performed. To S1308.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1301 that the V winning chance effect flag 223f is not turned on (S1301: No), the “V winning suggestion table 222e and the V winning suggestion lottery counter 223e are used for the“ V winning prize ”. It is determined whether or not the lottery of “Chance production” has been won (S1302). As described above, the lottery for “V winning chance production” is performed based on the value of the V winning suggestion lottery counter 223e and the V winning suggestion table 222e, and if the “V winning chance production” lottery has not been won. (S1302: No), “V winning chance effect” is not set, the processes of S1303 to S1307 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1308.

  In the process of S1302, if the "V winning chance effect" lottery has been won (S1302: Yes), the "V winning chance effect" setting is made. Therefore, first, the duplicate "V winning chance effect" setting is made. In order to prevent the processing, the V winning chance effect flag 223f is set to ON (S1303), and then the V winning chance effect command for notifying the display control device 114 that the "V winning opportunity effect" will be executed. Is set (S1304), and the process proceeds to S1305.

  The V winning chance effect command set in the process of S1304 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). Sent. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the V winning chance effect command executes the process of displaying the “V winning chance effect” on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, in the processing of S1305, the variation stored in each of the pending information storage areas 223m and 223n up to the one immediately before the pending information storage areas 223m and 223n in which the variation effects won in the execution of the “V winning chance production” are stored. Each variation time of the effect and the remaining variation time indicated by the execution variation time count counter 223h at the present time are respectively extracted, and the accumulated time is set in the remaining time timer 223j. As a result, the accumulated time of each variable effect that is executed until the variation effect that is won in the execution of the "V winning chance effect", that is, the execution time of the "V winning chance effect" is set in the remaining time timer 223j. Will be done.

  Specifically, for example, when the "V winning chance effect" is won in the third suspension of the variation effect of the first special symbol, and the variation effect of the second special symbol is not suspended, that is, the first In the case where the hold information winning the "V winning chance effect" is stored in the first hold information storing third area of the first hold information storing area 223m, and the hold information is not stored in the second holding information storage area 223n, One time before the third area for storing the first hold information, that is, the change time of each change effect stored in the first area for storing the first hold information and the second area for storing the first hold information is extracted and extracted. A value corresponding to the accumulated time of each fluctuation time is set in the remaining time timer 223j.

  Then, according to the value of the remaining time timer 223j set in S1305, a remaining time command for notifying the execution time of the "V winning chance effect" to the display control device 114 is set (S1306), and V is set. If the player has won the open jackpot, a V winning chance effect setting process for setting whether or not to execute an accurate “fire promotion suggestion” for the player is performed (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1308.

  The remaining time command set in the process of S1306 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). It As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the remaining time command performs “remaining time display” according to the remaining time command, and the execution time of the “V winning chance effect” executed by the third symbol display device 81. Execute the processing to display.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 41, the V winning chance effect setting process (S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the V winning chance effect setting process (S1307).

  In the V winning chance effect setting process (S1307), when the variation effect won for the V opening jackpot is held, the V winning port 74a is opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 based on the V opening jackpot is opened. It is determined whether it is a timing at which the ball can win. Then, as a result of the determination, when the variation effect is executed at a timing when the ball cannot be won in the V winning opening 74a, the variation shortening function is activated before the variation effect for winning the V opening jackpot is executed. That is, in order to collect four reserved balls of the special symbol, in the “V winning chance production”, the player is caused to display a “shooting promotion suggestion” that suggests the ball to be launched.

  In the V winning chance effect setting process (S1307), first, it is determined whether or not there is a V opening jackpot in the pending variable effects (S1351). In this determination, the jackpot is won in the first holding information storage area 223m and the second holding information storage area 223n, and the jackpot type is "15 round V opening jackpot" or "7 round V opening jackpot". This is performed by determining whether or not the value of the counter is stored.

  As a result of the processing of S1351, when it is determined that the V variation big jackpot is present in the pending variation effect (S1351: Yes), when the V winning device 72 is opened, a ball is won in the V winning port 74a. In order to accurately determine whether or not the V opening jackpot is stored, first, the variation time of each variation effect stored in each of the pending information storage areas 223m and 223n up to the pending information storage areas 223m and 223n is extracted. The accumulated time is set in the pending variable time integration counter 223g (S1352), and the process proceeds to S1353.

  In the process of S1352, for example, when the V opening jackpot is stored in the third suspension of the variation effect of the first special symbol, and the variation effect of the second special symbol is not suspended, that is, the first suspension information. When the V open jackpot holding information is stored in the first holding information storage third area of the storage area 223m and the holding information is not stored in the second holding information storage area 223n, the first holding information storage first to The variation time of each variation effect stored in the third area is extracted, and a value corresponding to the integrated time of each extracted variation time is set in the pending variation time integration counter 223g. By the process of S1352, the time from the start of the suspended special effect variation effect to the end of the V open jackpot variation effect is set in the pending variation time integration counter 223g, excluding the time of the variation effect being executed. Will be done.

  In the process of S1353, "10000" that is a value corresponding to the execution time of the opening effect is added to the value of the pending variable time integration counter 223g set in the process of S1352 (S1353), and the process proceeds to S1354. By the process of S1353, the pending variation time integration counter 223g indicates the end timing of the variation effect of the V opening jackpot, that is, the time from the start timing of the V opening jackpot to the opening of the V winning device 72 in the first round. Will be added. Therefore, the data set (stored) in the pending variation time integration counter 223g at the time when the processing of S1353 is performed is the first round of the V opening jackpot from the start of the pending variation presentation of the special effect. The value corresponding to the time until the V winning device 72 is opened is set.

  Next, in the process of S1354, the sum value of the value of the pending variable time integration counter 223g and the value of the execution variable time counter 223h is set in the sum counter 223i (S1354), and the process proceeds to S1355. In other words, in the processing of S1354, the time from the start of the pending special effect variation effect to the opening of the V winning device 72 in the first round of the V opening jackpot, and the remaining time of the variation effect being executed. The total time is set in the total counter 223i. Therefore, the value indicated by the sum counter 223i at the time when the processing of S1354 is performed is from the time when the start winning corresponding to the V opening jackpot is generated until the V winning apparatus 72 based on the V opening jackpot is opened. It becomes a value corresponding to time.

  Then, in the process of S1355, the value of the sub V drive timer 223d at that time is subtracted from the value of the sum counter 223i set in S1354 (S1355), and the process proceeds to S1356. The value indicated by the summing counter 223i at the time when the processing in S1355 is performed is in a state in which the time until the V winning opening 74a is opened next is subtracted from the time set in S1354.

  Next, in the process of S1356, the value of the sum counter 223i after the process of S1355 is divided by the time corresponding to the opening / closing cycle of the V winning opening 74a, that is, “20000”, and the remainder value X (X is It is determined whether or not the (natural number) is within the range of “10000 ≦ X <15000” (S1356). When the value of the remainder is “10000 ≦ X <15000” (S1356: Yes), the V winning opening 74a is completely closed by the distribution plate 73a at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened. Even if the V winning device 72 is opened, the ball cannot enter the V winning opening 74a. Therefore, in this state (as in the normal effect mode), even if a big hit occurs, the ball does not flow into the V winning opening 74a. Therefore, in the "V winning chance effect", the player is prompted to launch the ball. A display firing promotion suggestion command for displaying "promotion suggestion" is set (S1357), the V winning chance effect setting process (S1307) is ended, and the process returns to the prefetch setting process (see FIG. 40).

  The display promotion prompting command set in the process of S1357 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 of FIG. 38). Sent. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the display promotion prompting command prompts the player to launch a ball in the “V winning chance effect” by using “shooting suggestion (see FIGS. 46 (b) and (c) described later, or , FIG. 47 (b) and (c)) ”is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1356, when the value of the remainder is not “10000 ≦ X <15000” (S1356: No), that is, the value of the remainder is “0 ≦ X <10000”, or In the case of “15000 ≦ X <20000”, it means that there is at least the timing when the V winning opening 74a is opened, so that a ball can win the V winning opening 74a even in this situation. Therefore, in the "V prize chance effect", in order not to display the "shooting promotion suggestion", the process of S1357 is skipped, the V prize chance effect setting process (S1307) is terminated, and the prefetch setting process (see FIG. 40). ) Return to.

  In this way, the opening timing of the V winning device 72 and the opening timing of the V winning opening 74a are determined, and the V winning jackpot is won. In spite of the above, even if the ball cannot be won in the V winning opening 74a, by prompting the player to shoot the ball in the “V winning chance production” and generating the starting winning, The fluctuation shortening function can be activated before the execution of the fluctuation effect that wins the open jackpot. Then, the phase of the opening / closing timing of the V winning opening 74a at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened can be shifted to create a situation in which a ball can win the V winning opening 74a. Therefore, by configuring the player's own operation (the number of starting winnings based on the launch) to be able to acquire whether or not the V winning hole 74a is won in the jackpot, the player can feel a sense of accomplishment when the V winning hole 74a is won. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by displaying the “promotion of launch”, it is possible to increase the number of shot balls in the pachinko machine 10 and improve the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, in the process of S1351, when it is determined that the V variation jackpot is not stored in the pending variation effect (S1351: No), the process proceeds to S1357, and in the "V winning chance effect", the player Set a display promotion suggestion command for displaying "promotion suggestion" for prompting the ball to be launched. When no V opening jackpot is stored in the pending variable effect, the “V winning chance effect” that is executed is a so-called gaze effect and is executed even if the V winning device 72 is not opened. .. Therefore, also in this case, the "promotion of launching suggestion" is displayed to prompt the player to launch a ball. The player who has seen the "launch promotion suggestion" wants a ball to win the V winning opening 74a in the case of a big hit, so whether or not the "V winning chance presentation" is a so-called gaze presentation. , Try to move the ball into a situation in which the fluctuation reduction function can be activated. For this reason, by displaying the “promotion of launch” in the so-called “G prize production”, it is possible to increase the number of shot balls in the “V prize production” and improve the operation of the pachinko machine 10. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 40, the description will be continued. In the process of S1308, it is determined whether or not the execution lottery of the "holding change notice" has been won based on various information indicated by the currently held ball number command (S1308). As described above, the execution lottery of the "holding change notice" is based on the holding ball number command received this time, and each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first holding information storage area 223m or the second holding information storage area 223n. Based on the value of CS1, the winning / prohibiting state and the effect mode are extracted. Then, based on the extracted winning / prohibiting and effect modes, referring to the value of the pending change counter 223k at that time and the pending change table 222f (see FIG. 22), whether or not to execute the "hold pending change notice" and display. Determine the mode.

  As a result of the processing of S1308, if the execution lottery of the "holding change notice" is won (S1308: Yes), the hold indicating the display mode (for example, "blue") that is the execution lottery result of the "holding change notice" is held. The change information is stored in the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b or in the reserved display information storage area (not shown) provided corresponding to each of the first reserved information storage area 223m or the second reserved information storage area 223n. It is stored in the hold display information storage area indicated by the value of the sub second hold number counter 223c (S1309), and the process proceeds to S1311. On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S1308, if the execution lottery of the "holding change notice" is not won (S1308: No), the holding change information (that is, Null data) indicating that the "holding change notice" is not executed is It is stored in the hold display information storage area indicated by the value of the sub first holding ball number counter 223b or the sub second holding ball number counter 223c (S1310), and the process proceeds to S1311. This makes it possible to store in the hold display information storage area whether or not to execute the "hold change notice" for each variation effect.

  In the process of S1310, by writing Null data to the corresponding pending display information storage area, it is possible to prevent the duplicated use of the information about the "preceding change notice" stored in the pending display information storage area before writing, for example. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a production discrepancy (for example, the "hold change notice" is "red" even though it is a variation production in the "non-reach" production mode).

  Next, in the process of S1311, the display control device 114 is notified of the values of the sub first holding sphere number counter 223b and the sub second holding sphere number counter 223c, and the holding change information stored in the holding display information storage area. A display reserved ball count command for setting is set (S1311), the prefetch setting process (S1208) is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 39).

  The display reserved sphere count command set in the process of S1304 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). Sent. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the display holding sphere number command displays the holding symbols according to the holding sphere number and the holding change information indicated by the display holding sphere number command, in the cockpit display of the third symbol display device 81. Processing for displaying in the area Db (see FIG. 5B) is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the jackpot command processing (S1215) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the jackpot command processing (S1215). In this jackpot command processing (S1215), as described above, the command regarding the jackpot received from the main control device 110 (opening command, V winning device opening command, V winning device closing command, V acquisition command, variable winning device opening command, Variable winning device closing command or ending command, etc.) is executed.

  In this jackpot command processing (S1215), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command is received from the main control device 110 (S1371). As a result of the determination, if the opening command is received from the main control device 110 (S1371: Yes), the display opening command is set (S1372), and then the jackpot effect flag (Fig. (Not shown) is turned on (S1373). After the processing of S1373, the jackpot command processing (S1215) is terminated, and the processing returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 39).

  The display opening command set in S1372 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). .. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the opening command for display recognizes the start of the big hit and executes processing so as to display an effect (for example, an opening effect) that starts the big hit on the third symbol display device 81. To do.

  In the process of S1371, when the opening command is not received from the main control device 110 (S1371: No), it is then determined whether or not the V winning device opening command is received from the main control device 110 (S1374). As a result of the determination, if the V winning device opening command is received from the main control device 110 (S1374: Yes), the display V winning device opening command is set (S1375), and this jackpot command processing (S1215) is ended. Then, the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 38).

  The display V winning device release command set in S1375 is temporarily stored in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). Sent. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the display V winning device opening command recognizes that the V winning device 72 has been opened during the V opening jackpot, and suggests that the V winning device 72 is opened. Processing is executed so that the effect (see FIG. 46 (g) or FIG. 47 (g) described later) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1374, when the V winning device opening command is not received from the main control device 110 (S1374: No), it is then determined whether or not the V winning device closing command is received from the main control device 110 ( S1376). As a result of the determination, if the V winning device closing command is received from the main control device 110 (S1376: Yes), the display V winning device closing command is set (S1377), and this jackpot command processing (S1215) is ended. Then, the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 38).

  The display V winning device closing command set in S1377 is temporarily stored in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). Sent. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the display V winning device closing command recognizes that the V winning device 72 has been closed at the time of the V opening jackpot, and suggests that the V winning device 72 has been closed. The processing is executed so that the effect to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1376, when the V winning device closing command is not received from the main control device 110 (S1376: No), it is then determined whether or not the V acquisition command is received from the main control device 110 (S1378). .. If the result of determination is that a V acquisition command has been received from main controller 110 (S1378: Yes), a display V acquisition command is set (S1379), this jackpot command processing (S1215) is terminated, and command determination is performed. Returning to the processing (see FIG. 38).

  The display V acquisition command set in S1379 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). It As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the display V acquisition command recognizes that a ball has been won in the V winning opening 74a at the time of the V open jackpot, and the ball is won in the V winning opening 74a. After the jackpot is over, processing is executed so as to display an effect (see FIG. 47 (h) described later) that suggests that the “probability variation state” is given on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1378, if the V acquisition command is not received from the main control device 110 (S1378: No), then it is determined whether or not the variable winning device opening command is received from the main control device 110 (S1380). .. As a result of the determination, if the variable winning device opening command is received from the main control device 110 (S1380: Yes), the display variable winning device opening command is set (S1381), and this jackpot command processing (S1215) is ended. Then, the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 38).

  The display variable winning device opening command set in S1381 is once stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). Sent. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the display variable winning device opening command recognizes that the variable winning device 65 has been opened at the time of a big hit, and the number of times the variable winning device 65 is opened in the third symbol display device 81. The process is executed so as to display the effect according to (that is, the number of rounds).

  In the process of S1380, when the variable winning device opening command is not received from the main control device 110 (S1380: No), it is then determined whether or not the variable winning device closing command is received from the main control device 110 ( S1382). As a result of the determination, if the variable winning device closing command is received from the main control device 110 (S1382: Yes), the display variable winning device closing command is set (S1383), and this jackpot command processing (S1215) is ended. Then, the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 38).

  The display variable winning device closing command set in S1383 is temporarily stored in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). Sent. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the display variable winning device closing command recognizes that the variable winning device 65 has been closed at the time of a big hit, and shows that the variable winning device 65 is closed. The process is executed so as to display (for example, interval effect).

  In the process of S1382, when the variable winning device closing command is not received from the main control device 110 (S1382: No), it is then determined whether or not the ending command is received from the main control device 110 (S1384). As a result of the determination, if the ending command is received from the main control device 110 (S1384: Yes), the display ending command is set (S1385), and then the jackpot effect flag is turned off in order to end the effect on the jackpot. After setting (S1386), the jackpot command process (S1215) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 39).

  The display ending command set in S1385 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). .. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the ending command for display recognizes the end of the big hit and executes processing so as to display an effect (for example, ending effect) for ending the big hit on the third symbol display device 81. To do.

  In the process of S1384, when the ending command is not received from the main control device 110 (S1384: No), the process corresponding to the other command related to the big hit (for example, the prize ball command etc.) is performed (S1387), and the big hit command is received. The process (S1215) is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 39).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a variation effect process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this variation effect processing (S1111). This variation effect process (S1111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 38), and various processes for executing the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 are executed.

  In the variation effect process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1401). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223a is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), it means that at least the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. The process (S1111) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 38).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223a is on (S1401: Yes), both the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received, so the variation start flag 223a is turned off to start the variation effect. (S1402), then, it is determined whether or not data relating to the variation effect is stored in the second hold information storage area 223n (S1403). As a result of the determination, if the data related to the variation effect is stored in the second holding information storage area 223n (S1403: Yes), it is included in the second holding information storage first area provided in the second holding information storage area 223n. The data is shifted to the execution information storage area 223o (S1404), and the data contained in the second reservation information storage second to fourth areas provided in the second reservation information storage area 223n is transferred to the second reservation information storage first. ~ Shift to the third area (S1405), decrement the value of the sub second holding ball number counter 223c by 1 (S1406), and shift the process to S1410.

  That is, in this case, the variation effect of the second special symbol that has been suspended is reduced by one, and the execution of the variation effect of the second special symbol that has been suspended first in time is started, so that it is suspended first. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223n1 to 223n4 of the second hold information first area corresponding to the generated variation effect are stored in the execution information storage area 223o corresponding to the variation effect being executed. It moves to each storage area 223o1-223o4. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223n1 to 223n4 of the second reservation information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223n1 to 223n4 of the second reservation information storage first area. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223n1 to 223n4 of the second reservation information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223n1 to 223n4 of the second reservation information storage second area, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223n1 to 223n4 of the second hold information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223n1 to 223n4 of the second hold information storage third area.

  As a result, the same value as that of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f of the main controller 110 is stored in the execution information storage area 223o, and the second suspension information storage first The same value as each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second holding first to fourth areas of the second holding ball storage area 203e of the main controller 110 is stored in the fourth area. become.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1403, when it is determined that the data related to the variation effect is not stored in the second holding information storage area 223n (S1403: No), the variation effect executed this time relates to the first special symbol. Therefore, the data contained in the first reserved information storage first area provided in the first reserved information storage area 223m is shifted to the execution information storage area 223o (S1407), and further provided in the first reserved information storage area 223m. The data contained in the first to second reserved information storage second to fourth areas are shifted to the first to third reserved information storage first to third areas (S1408), and the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b is decremented by one. (S1409), the process proceeds to S1410.

  That is, in this case, the variation effect of the first special symbol that has been suspended is reduced by one, and the execution of the variation effect of the first special symbol that has been suspended first in time is started, so it is suspended first. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the first hold information first area corresponding to the generated variation effect are stored in the execution information storage area 223o corresponding to the variation effect being executed. It moves to each storage area 223o1-223o4. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the first reserved information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the first reserved information storage first area. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the first reservation information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the first reservation information storage second area, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the first reservation information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 of the first reservation information storage third area.

  As a result, the same value as that of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f of the main controller 110 is stored in the execution information storage area 223o, and the first reserved information storage first ~ The fourth area stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first holding first to fourth areas of the first holding ball storage area 203d of the main controller 110, respectively. become.

  Next, in the processing of S1410, the value of the sub first holding sphere number counter 223b or the sub second holding sphere number counter 223c updated in the processing of S1406 or S1409 and the holding change information stored in the holding display information storage area are displayed. A display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 is set (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411.

  The display reserved sphere number command set in S1410 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). To be done. Thereby, in the display control device 114 that has received the display reserved sphere number command, the reserved symbol and the execution symbol corresponding to the reserved sphere number are processed to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the reserved symbol and When the execution symbol is displayed, display control is performed so that the hold symbol and the execution symbol are displayed in the determined display mode of "Hold change notice".

  In the process of S1411, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223o, the variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed now is acquired, and the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In order to display, a display variation pattern command is set based on the obtained variation pattern (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1412.

  The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). It In the display control device 114, the display control of the variation effect is started so that the variation display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command.

  Next, in the processing of S1412, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223o, the stop type of the variable effect to be executed now is acquired, and the acquired stop type of the variable effect is acquired. Based on this, the display stop type command is set (S1412), and the process proceeds to S1413.

  The display stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). It In the display control device 114, when the variation effect executed by the display variation pattern command set by the processing of S1411 is confirmed and displayed, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is set. To do.

  In the process of S1413, the variation time of the variation effect which is stored in the execution information storage area 223o and is to be executed is extracted, and the value corresponding to the variation time is set in the execution variation time counting counter 223h (S1413). The processing moves to S1414. The value of the execution variation time counting counter 223h set here is decremented by 1 every "1 millisecond" in the counter subtraction process of the main process (see S1110 of FIG. 38) (see S1604 of FIG. 45 described later). ). As a result, the remaining variation time of the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 can be accurately counted.

  In the processing of S1414 to S1417, it is determined whether or not a situation in which a ball can be won at the V winning opening 74a is established when the "V winning chance effect" is being performed before the start of the variation effect. When a ball can be won in the V winning opening 74a, a process for suggesting to that effect to the player is executed.

  Specifically, first, in the process of S1414, it is determined whether or not the “V winning chance effect” has been executed before the execution of the current variation effect and the end timing has been reached (S1414). As a result of the determination, if it is the end timing of the “V winning chance effect” (S1414: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a V opening jackpot occurs in the variable effect executed this time (S1415). As a result of the determination, if a V opening jackpot occurs in the variation effect to be executed this time (S1415: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the V winning opening 74a is opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened. Yes (S1416).

  When the V winning opening 74a is in the open state at the time of winning the variable effect that causes the V opening jackpot, the time from that time until the V winning opening 74a is opened again is "opening of the remaining V winning opening 74a. It is the time + the closing time of the V winning opening 74a (that is, "10 seconds"). Then, it will be repeated in a cycle of "20 seconds". Further, in the case where the V winning opening 74a is closed at the time of winning the variable effect that causes the open jackpot, the time from that time until the V winning opening 74a is opened again is "the remaining V winning openings 74a. Closing time ". Then, it will be repeated in a cycle of "20 seconds". Therefore, in the process of S1416, at the start of the variation effect that causes the V opening jackpot, the timing at which the V winning device 72 counted at the start winning of the variation effect that causes the V opening jackpot is released, and the V winning opening 74a. The opening timing based on the above opening (opening / closing) cycle is determined, and the V winning opening 74a is opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened at the start of the fluctuating effect in which the V opening jackpot occurs. This makes it possible to determine in advance whether or not a ball will win the V winning opening 74a.

  In the process of S1416, for example, when the value of the sum counter 223i set in the processes of S1352 to S1356 of the V winning chance effect setting process (see FIG. 41) is divided by "20000", the remainder value X is "10000≤. It is within the range of X <15000, and whether the variation effect to be executed is executed in the shortening effect mode (that is, whether the shortening effect mode is executed only in the variable effect in which the V opening jackpot occurs. Whether or not) is determined. As a result of the determination, the value X of the remainder when the value of the total counter 223i set in the processing of S1352 to S1356 of the V winning chance effect setting processing (see FIG. 41) is divided by “20000” is “10000 ≦ X <15000”. If it is within the range (S1416: Yes), it means that a ball can win the V winning opening 74a, and therefore the process proceeds to S1417. Even when the above-mentioned remainder value X is within the range of “0 ≦ X <5000” and the variable effect to be executed is executed in the normal effect mode, a ball can be won in the V winning opening 74a. Therefore, also in this case, the process proceeds to S1417.

  In addition, for example, when the value of the sum counter 223i set in the processing of S1352 to S1356 of the V winning chance effect setting processing (see FIG. 41) is divided by “20,000”, the remainder value X is “0 ≦ X <5000. Within the range, and whether or not the variation effect to be executed is executed in the shortening effect mode (that is, whether or not the shortening effect mode is executed in the variable effect in which the V opening jackpot occurs). In addition to determining, it is determined whether or not the shortening effect mode has been executed once in the fluctuation effect executed before the fluctuation effect in which the V opening jackpot occurs. As a result of the determination, the value X of the remainder when the value of the total counter 223i set in the processing of S1352 to S1356 of the V winning chance effect setting processing (see FIG. 41) is divided by “20000” is “10000 ≦ X <15000”. If it is within the range (S1416: Yes), it means that a ball can win the V winning opening 74a, and therefore the process proceeds to S1417. In addition, even if the above-mentioned remainder value X is within the range of “10000 ≦ X <15000” and the variation effect to be executed from now on is executed in the normal effect mode, a ball can be won in the V winning opening 74a. Therefore, also in this case, the process proceeds to S1417.

  In the process of S1417, a preparation completion command for notifying the display control device 114 that the ball can be won in the V winning opening 74a is set (S1417), and the variation effect process (S1111) is ended. The procedure returns to the main processing (see FIG. 38).

  The preparation completion command set in the process of S1417 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). It As a result, the display control device 114, which has received the preparation completion command, also opens the V winning opening 74a when the V winning device 72 is opened in a V opening jackpot that may occur from now on, and the ball wins the V winning opening 74a. A process for displaying a "preparation completion effect (see FIG. 47 (e) described later)" for giving a notice to the player to be obtained is executed.

  Accordingly, it is determined whether or not a situation in which a ball can be won in the V winning opening 74a can be created at the start of the variation effect of winning the V opening jackpot, and the situation in which the ball can be winning in the V winning opening 74a is determined. If it is, it is configured to suggest that a ball can be won in the V winning opening 74a at the start of the variation effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to acquire the presence or absence of a prize at the V winning hole 74a in the jackpot by the player's own operation (the number of starting prizes based on the launch), and by suggesting the content to the player, It is possible to make the player feel a sense of accomplishment when a prize is paid to the V winning opening 74a, and to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1414, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the “V winning chance effect” (S1414: No), it is determined in the process of S1415 that the V opening jackpot does not occur in the variation effect executed this time. In the case (S1415: No), or in the processing of S1416, when it is determined that the V winning opening 74a is not opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened when the V opening jackpot occurs (S1416: No), since it cannot necessarily be said that the ball can win the V winning opening 74a, the process of S1417 is skipped, the variation effect process (S1111) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 38).

  In the process of S1416, when it is determined that the situation in which the ball can win the V winning opening 74a and the situation in which the ball cannot win at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened are mixed, that is, the V winning chance effect setting The value X of the remainder when the value of the sum counter 223i set by the processing of S1352 to S1356 of the processing (see FIG. 41) is divided by “20000” is within the range of “5000 ≦ X <10000”, or When it is within the range of “15000 ≦ X <20000”, it is an ambiguous effect that makes the player guess whether or not a ball can win the V winning opening 74a instead of the preparation completion command. It may be configured to set an ambiguous display command for displaying "ambiguous suggestion display".

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a jackpot effect process (S1105) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this big hit production process (S1105). The jackpot effect process (S1105) is executed every "1 millisecond" in the main process (see FIG. 38) of the voice lamp control device 113, and the jackpot effect flag (not shown) is turned on based on the reception of the opening command. When set to, each process related to a big hit effect is performed.

  In the jackpot effect process (S1105), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot effect flag is set to ON (S1501). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot effect flag is not set to ON (S1501: No), it is not a jackpot, so this jackpot effect process (S1105) is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 38). On the other hand, when the jackpot effect flag is set to ON (S1501: Yes), the jackpot is in progress, so the process proceeds to S1502 in order to execute the effect related to the jackpot.

  In the process of S1502, it is determined whether or not the start of the second round of the jackpot game (S1502). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that it is the start time of the second round of the jackpot game (S1502: Yes), then a ball is won in the V winning opening 74a during this jackpot (that is, during the first round). It is determined whether or not (S1503). This determination is made based on whether or not the V acquisition command is received from main controller 110.

  In the process of S1503, when it is determined that the ball is won in the V winning opening 74a (S1503: Yes), the ball is won in the V winning opening 74a in this jackpot, and the "probability variation state" is given after the jackpot is finished. The V acquisition notification effect command for notifying the player of the execution of the "V acquisition notification effect" that suggests the shift to "" is set (S1504), and the process proceeds to S1506.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1503, if it is determined that no ball has been won in the V winning opening 74a (S1503: No), the ball cannot be won in the V winning opening 74a in this jackpot, and “ The "probability variation state" is not given, and a V non-acquisition notification effect command for notifying execution of the "V non-acquisition notification effect" that suggests the player to shift to the "time reduction state" is set (S1505), The processing moves to S1506.

  The V acquisition notification effect command or the V non-acquisition notification effect command set in the process of S1504 or S1505 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). ) To the display controller 114. Accordingly, the display control device 114 that has received the V acquisition notification effect command or the V unacquired notification effect command, at this timing (at the start of the second round), suggests a game state to be transferred after the jackpot is over. Processing for displaying the notification effect (see FIG. 47 (h) described later) or the “V unacquired notification effect (see FIG. 46 (h) described later)” is executed.

  Thereby, it is configured to suggest a game state that transits based on whether or not a ball has been won in the V winning opening 74a. With such a configuration, it is possible to obtain the presence or absence of a prize at the V winning opening 74a in a jackpot by the player's own operation (the number of starting prizes based on launch), and suggest the achievement (result) to the player. By doing so, a sense of accomplishment can be felt when the V winning opening 74a is won, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  In the process of S1506, the effect process during other big hits is executed (S1506), the big hit effect process (S1105) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 38).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the counter subtraction processing (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this counter subtraction processing (S1110). This counter subtraction process (S1110) is executed every "1 millisecond" in the main process (see FIG. 38) of the audio lamp control device 113, and the command determination process (see FIG. 39) and the variation effect process (see FIG. 43). Each process of subtracting (updating) each counter set in (1) is performed.

  In this counter subtraction processing (S1110), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the sub V drive timer 223d is larger than "0" (S1601). As a result of the determination, if the value of the sub V drive timer 223d is larger than “0” (S1601: Yes), the value of the sub V drive timer 223d is decremented by 1 (S1602), and the process proceeds to S1603. On the other hand, if the value of the sub V drive timer 223d is not greater than "0" (S1601: No), the process of S1602 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1603.

  As a result, the value of the sub V drive timer 223d is decremented by 1 every "1 millisecond". Therefore, by referring to the value of the sub V drive timer 223d in the voice lamp control device 113, opening / closing of the V winning opening 74a is performed. It is possible to grasp the mode.

  In the processing of S1603, it is determined whether or not the value of the execution variation time counting counter 223h is larger than "0" (S1603). As a result of the determination, if the value of the execution variation time counting counter 223h is larger than “0” (S1603: Yes), the value of the execution variation time counting counter 223h is decremented by 1 (S1604), and the process proceeds to S1605. To do. On the other hand, if the value of the execution variation time counting counter 223h is not larger than "0" (S1603: No), the process of S1604 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1605.

  As a result, the value of the execution variation time counting counter 223h is decremented by 1 every "1 millisecond". Therefore, by referring to the value of the execution variation time counting counter 223h in the voice lamp control device 113, the variation during execution is changed. It is possible to grasp the remaining time of the production.

  In the process of S1605, it is determined whether or not the V winning chance effect flag 223f is turned on (S1605). As a result of the determination, if the V winning chance effect flag 223f is not turned on (S1605: No), the "V winning chance effect" is not being executed, so this counter subtraction process (S1110) is ended, and the main process is terminated. Return to FIG. 38. On the other hand, if the V winning chance effect flag 223f is turned on (S1605: Yes), the "V winning chance effect" is being executed, so the value of the remaining time timer 223j is first decremented by 1 (S1606), Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining time timer 223j subtracted in the process of S1606 is larger than "0" (S1607).

  In the process of S1607, when it is determined that the value of the remaining time timer 223j is larger than “0”, it means that the execution time of the “V winning chance effect” remains, and therefore the processes of S1608 to S1610. Is not performed, the counter subtraction process (S1110) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 38). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining time timer 223j is not larger than "0" (S1607: No), that is, when the value of the remaining time timer 223j is "0" or less, "V winning chance" Since the end timing of "production" has come, the V winning chance production flag 223f is set to OFF (S1608), and subsequently, the value of the pending variable time integration counter 223g is cleared to "0" (S1609). Then, a chance effect end command for notifying that the “V winning chance effect” is ended is set (S1610), the counter subtraction process (S1110) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 38).

  The chance effect end command set in the process of S1610 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). To be done. As a result, the display control device 114, which has received the chance effect end command, recognizes that the “V winning chance effect” has ended, and indicates that the “V winning opportunity effect” has ended (see FIG. ) And (e), or FIG. 47 (d) and (e)) is displayed.

  As a result, the value of the remaining time timer 223j is decremented by 1 every "1 millisecond" during execution of the "V winning chance effect". Therefore, the value of the remaining time timer 223j is referred to in the voice lamp control device 113. Thus, it is possible to grasp the remaining time of the "V winning opportunity effect" and the ending timing of the "V winning opportunity effect".

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46 and FIG. 47, the “V winning opportunity effect” on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, and the variable effect causing the “V winning opportunity effect”. , And an example of executing a jackpot effect based on the variation effect.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a transition from the “V winning opportunity effect” performed on the third symbol display device 81 to the first round of the jackpot without generating a new starting winning. First, FIG. 46 (a) is a diagram showing a state immediately after the "V winning chance effect" is started, and FIG. 46 (b) is a state where the left symbol row Z1 is stopped from the state of FIG. 46 (a). It is the figure which showed the state. Then, FIG. 46 (c) is a diagram showing a state in which one variation effect has been digested from the state of FIG. 46 (b) and the next pending variation effect has started, and FIG. ) Is a diagram showing a state in which the “V winning chance effect” is finished from the state of FIG. 46 (c). Further, FIG. 46 (e) is a diagram showing a state in which the variable effect that has caused the "V winning chance effect" is started from the state of FIG. 46 (d), and FIG. 46 (f) is It is the figure which showed the state where the jackpot symbol appeared from the state of FIG.46 (e). And FIG.46 (g) is the figure which showed the state which has shown that the V winning device 72 is open | released from the state of FIG.46 (f), and FIG.46 (h) shows FIG.46 ( It is the figure which showed the state where "V non-acquisition notification production" which shows that the ball could not be won into the V winning opening 74a from the state of g) is performed. 46 (a) to 46 (h), the display mode of the third symbol is omitted (the same applies to the description of FIG. 47, FIG. 49, or FIG. 57).

  In the state of FIG. 46 (a), during the variation effect of the first special symbol is being executed (that is, during the "high-speed fluctuation" of each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3), a start prize for a new first special symbol is obtained. There are two, and the starting symbol (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “starting prize 1” in the description of FIG. 46) of the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a in the reserved symbol displayed as “Hold” While the "change notice" has not occurred, the special display 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b showing the subsequent starting winning (hereinafter, may be referred to as "starting winning 2" in the description of FIG. 46) is held. In the symbol, a "reservation change notice" has occurred, indicating that the pending symbol has changed to "red".

  In the fluctuating effect corresponding to this "starting prize 2", "15 round V open jackpot" is won, and as described above, the reserved symbol "Hold change" displayed in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b. This shows a state immediately after the "red notice" "winning" is won and the "V winning chance effect" is also won based on the variation effect, and the "V winning chance effect" is started.

  Here, in FIG. 46 (a), when the variable effect that is being executed and the variable effect that is being held are all executed and a V opening jackpot based on the “start prize 2” occurs, the variable effect based on the “start prize 2”. Has been executed in the normal effect mode, it is pre-determined that the V winning opening 74a is closed at the timing when the V winning device 72 based on the jackpot is opened. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the "V winning opportunity effect" is performed, the "shooting promotion suggestion" is displayed in the "V winning opportunity effect", and the variation effect of the "starting winning 2" is newly started. 3 or more starting winnings are generated, and the number of balls to hold the special symbol is set to "4" at the start of the variation production of "Starting winning 2", and the variation production based on "Starting winning 2" is shortened. Suggests to the player what to do.

  In the state of FIG. 46 (a), the character displayed in the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds has generated a dialogue indicating that the "V winning chance effect" has occurred, and the dialogue display is left small. It is displayed in the area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3. Specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the character display "Chance is!" That directly indicates that the "V winning chance presentation" has occurred appears, and in the right small area Ds3, "Promotion promotion suggestion". The character display "Please shoot as many balls as possible in time!" Showing one form appears. It should be noted that, as the “promotion of launch promotion”, content that suggests winning a ball in the first starting opening 64 (for example, “make a lot of prizes”) or content that suggests activating the fluctuation shortening function (for example: , "Hold four reserves of the first special symbol") and the like may be displayed.

  The player who has seen the "V prize chance effect", the "promotion of launch promotion", and the "holding change notice" predicts that a jackpot will occur in the variable effect of "start prize 2" and Even if a big hit occurs as it is, it is presumed that the ball does not flow into the V winning opening 74a. Then, the ball is shot to win the ball in the first starting port 64 (or the second starting port 71) in order to set the number of holdings in which the fluctuation reducing function is activated.

  Conventionally, when a display mode with a high jackpot expectation level (for example, “red”) appears in the “holding change notice”, the player is supposed to generate a jackpot in the fluctuating effect corresponding to the “holding change notice”. Predict. Then, in order to concentrate on the transition (effect) until the display result of the fluctuation effect appears, after the appearance of the "holding change notice", the firing of the ball is stopped until the display result of the fluctuation effect appears. As a result, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 was reduced during that time.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, even if a display mode with a high jackpot expectation degree is displayed in the “holding change notice”, “launch promotion suggestion” is displayed in the “V winning chance production”. By doing so, the player keeps firing balls until the number of holding balls at which the fluctuation shortening function is activated is increased, and the number of shot balls is increased in the situation where the "prediction change notice" appears, and the pachinko machine 10 is operated. Can be improved.

  Next, in FIG. 46 (b), from the situation of FIG. 46 (a), the symbols stop in the left symbol column Z1 of the main display area Dm, and the symbols continue to change in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3. It shows the situation.

  Further, in the left small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds, the character display "Shoot me!", Which is one form of "promotion promotion", is displayed, and in the right small area Ds3, "V winning chance production. "Remaining time display" of the remaining time (here, "remaining time 19:45") is displayed. The "remaining time display" indicates the remaining time of the "V winning chance effect", that is, the time until the variation of "starting winning 2" is started. It should be noted that no new start winning has occurred at this timing.

  In this way, by displaying the remaining time of the “V winning chance production” and frustrating the player that a new starting winning must be generated within that time, a new “V winning chance production” is created. It is possible to create a playful game with a sense of urgency as to whether or not a starting prize is generated, and improve the interest of the game.

  Next, in FIG. 46 (c), in the situation of FIG. 46 (b), the variation effect being executed is finished, and the variation effect based on the “start prize 1” is started, that is, each of the main display areas Dm. The symbol rows Z1 to Z3 show a situation in which "high speed fluctuation" occurs. In this case, the reserved symbol corresponding to "starting winning 1" displayed in the special symbol 1 first reserved symbol display region Db1a in FIG. 46 (b) is shift-displayed in the execution symbol display region Db0, and the special symbol 1 The reserved symbol corresponding to "starting winning 2" displayed in the second reserved symbol display region Db1b is shift-displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display region Db1a.

  Further, in the left small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds, the character display of "Still more!", Which is one form of the "promotion promotion suggestion", is displayed, and in the right small area Ds3, the "remaining time display" at this time point is displayed. (Here, "remaining time 13.25") is displayed. Even at this timing, no new starting winnings have occurred.

  Next, FIG. 46 (d) shows a situation in which, from the situation of FIG. 46 (c), the variation effect based on "start prize 1" is finished and the display result is displayed. In this situation, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Dm, the stop result in which the stop symbol in the chance symbol symbol and the stop symbol in the middle symbol symbol Z2 are different (“788” in FIG. 46 (d). Hereinafter, with the chance symbol symbol) The stop result, which is different only in the middle symbol row Z2, may be referred to as a "goth chance symbol".)

  In the right small area Ds3 of the sub display area Ds, the "remaining time display (here," remaining time 00.00 ")" at this time is displayed. Therefore, it indicates to the player that the “V winning chance production” has ended. Even at this timing, no new starting winnings have occurred.

  Therefore, during the execution of the "V winning chance effect", a new starting winning cannot be generated, and the variation effect based on the "starting winning 2" that is the execution target of the "V winning opportunity effect" is usually. It will be executed in a staging mode. In this case, even if the V opening jackpot occurs, the ball cannot be won in the V winning opening 74a. Therefore, as an effect that suggests to the player that the ball cannot win the V winning opening 74a, "V At the end of the “winning chance production”, the gambling chance pattern which is not the chance pattern is displayed. Specifically, in the processing of S1607 of the counter subtraction processing (see FIG. 45) described above, when it is determined that the remaining time timer 223j is not greater than “0”, that is, the “V winning chance effect” ends. The same process as S1416 of the variation effect process (see FIG. 43) is executed at a timing to determine whether or not a ball can be won in the V winning opening 74a in the current situation, and the ball is put in the V winning opening 74a. When a prize is won, a chance eye symbol is displayed, while when a ball does not win the V winning opening 74a, a chance chance symbol is displayed. With such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 46 (d), the condition shown by the "V winning chance production" can be achieved by displaying the goth chance pattern at the end of the "V winning opportunity production". It can be suggested to the player that there is none.

  Next, in FIG. 46 (e), from the situation of FIG. 46 (d), the variation effect based on “start prize 1” is finished and the variation effect based on “start prize 2” is started, that is, the main display Each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the area Dm shows a state in which “high speed fluctuation” is occurring. In this case, the reserved symbol corresponding to the "starting winning 2" displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display region Db1a in FIG. 46 (d) is shift-displayed in the execution symbol display region Db0.

  Further, in the left small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, the preparation completion command cannot be received, so that the preparation is not the "preparation completion effect (see FIG. 47E described later)" and the V winning opening 74a. A character display of "as it is ...", which is a "preparation incomplete production" that gives advance notice to the player that the ball cannot be won, is displayed. Further, the character design displayed in the central small area Ds2 is changed to a disappointed expression and displayed. Therefore, by recognizing the "unprepared effect", the player predicts that the V winning opening 74a will not be opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened when the V opening jackpot occurs. can do.

  Next, FIG. 46 (f) shows a situation in which, from the situation of FIG. 46 (e), the variation effect based on “start prize 2” is finished and the display result is displayed. In this situation, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Dm, a "big hit display" in which three "7" symbols corresponding to the "15 round V open big hit" are arranged appears.

  However, the character pattern displayed in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is as shown in FIG. 46 (e), despite the fact that the "big hit display" of "15 round V open big hit" appears. Similarly, it is displayed with a disappointed look.

  Next, in FIG. 46 (g), from the situation of FIG. 46 (f), a "15 round V open jackpot" occurs and a display indicating that the V winning device 72 is opened in the first round of the jackpot. (In the example of FIG. 46 (g), the characters “V winning chance” and “Aim and hit V!” Are displayed). However, at this timing, since the V winning opening 74a is not opened, even if the V winning device 72 is opened, a ball cannot enter the V winning opening 74a.

  Next, in FIG. 46 (h), from the situation of FIG. 46 (g), the V winning device 72 is closed at the end of the first round of the jackpot, and the V winning device 74 is opened while the V winning device 72 is open. A character display such as "Failed to acquire ...", which is a "V unacquired notification effect" indicating that no prize has been won, is displayed. Therefore, after the jackpot is over, it is suggested to the player not to shift to the “probability variation state” but to the “time reduction state”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, unlike the situation of FIG. 46, the number of reserved balls is accumulated until the variation effect in which the V opening jackpot is generated is executed, and the variation effect in which the V opening jackpot is generated is in the shortening effect mode. The case of execution will be described.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a transition from the “V winning opportunity effect” performed on the third symbol display device 81 to the first round of the jackpot after a new starting winning occurs, and FIG. 47 (a). FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a state immediately after the “V winning chance effect” is started, and FIG. 47 (b) is a diagram showing a state where the left symbol row Z1 is stopped from the state of FIG. 47 (a). 47 (c) is a diagram showing a state in which one variation effect has been digested from the state of FIG. 47 (b) and the next pending variation effect has started, and FIG. ) Is a diagram showing a state in which the "V winning chance production" has been completed from the state of FIG. 47 (c), and FIG. 47 (e) shows a "V winning chance production" of the state of FIG. 47 (d). It is the figure which showed the state where the fluctuation production which became the generation factor was started, FIG.47 (f) is FIG.47 (e). FIG. 47 (g) is a diagram showing a state in which a jackpot pattern has appeared from the state of FIG. 47 (g), and FIG. 47 (g) shows a state of suggesting that the V winning device 72 has been opened from the state of FIG. 47 (f). FIG. 47 (h) is a diagram showing a state in which “V acquisition notification effect” indicating that a ball has been won in the V winning opening 74a is being executed from the state of FIG. 47 (g). Is.

  The state of FIG. 47 (a) is the same as that of FIG. 46 (a) while the variation effect of the first special symbol is being executed (that is, each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is “high-speed variation”), Two special winning symbols of the first special symbol are generated, and the special symbol 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a showing the previous starting symbol (hereinafter, may be referred to as "starting symbol 1" in the description of FIG. 47). While the "holding change notice" is not generated in the displayed holding symbols, the special drawing 1 second holding symbol showing the subsequent starting winning (hereinafter, may be referred to as "starting winning 2" in the explanation of FIG. 47) In the hold symbol displayed in the display area Db1b, "Hold change notice" has occurred, and the hold symbol is in a state of changing to "red".

  In the fluctuating effect corresponding to this "starting prize 2", "15 round V open jackpot" is won, and as described above, the reserved symbol "Hold change" displayed in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b. This shows a state in which the player has won "red" in the "notice" and has also won the "V winning chance effect" based on the variation effect, and the "V winning chance effect" has been started.

  Here, in FIG. 47A, as in the case of FIG. 46A, when the variable effect being executed and the variable effect being held are all executed, and the V opening jackpot based on the “start winning 2” occurs, “ When the fluctuating effect based on the "starting prize 2" is executed in the normal effect mode, it is pre-determined that the V winning opening 74a is closed at the timing when the V winning device 72 based on the jackpot is opened. .. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the "V winning opportunity effect" is performed, the "shooting promotion suggestion" is displayed in the "V winning opportunity effect", and the variation effect of the "starting winning 2" is newly started. 3 or more starting winnings are generated, and the number of balls to hold the special symbol is set to "4" at the start of the variation production of "Starting winning 2", and the variation production based on "Starting winning 2" is shortened. Suggests to the player what to do.

  In the state of FIG. 47 (a), the character displayed in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds has generated a dialogue indicating that the "V winning chance effect" has occurred, and the dialogue display is left small. It is displayed in the area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3. Specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the character display "Chance is!" That directly indicates that the "V winning chance presentation" has occurred appears, and in the right small area Ds3, "Promotion promotion suggestion". The character display "Please shoot as many balls as possible in time!" Showing one form appears.

  Next, in FIG. 47 (b), from the situation of FIG. 47 (a), the symbols stop in the left symbol column Z1 of the main display area Dm, and the symbols continue to change in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3. It shows the situation. Further, in the left small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds, the character display "Shoot me!", Which is one form of "promotion promotion", is displayed, and in the right small area Ds3, "V winning chance production. "Remaining time display" of the remaining time (here, "remaining time 19:45") is displayed. The "remaining time display" indicates the remaining time of the "V winning chance effect", that is, the time until the variation of "starting winning 2" is started. It should be noted that no new start winning has occurred at this timing.

  Next, in FIG. 47 (c), from the situation of FIG. 47 (b), the variation effect being executed is finished, and the variation effect based on “start prize 1” is started, that is, each of the main display areas Dm. The symbol rows Z1 to Z3 show a situation in which "high speed fluctuation" occurs. In this case, the reserved symbol corresponding to "starting winning 1" displayed in the special symbol 1 first reserved symbol display region Db1a in FIG. 47 (b) is shift-displayed in the execution symbol display region Db0, and the special symbol 1 The reserved symbol corresponding to "starting winning 2" displayed in the second reserved symbol display region Db1b is shift-displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display region Db1a.

  At this timing, two starting winnings of the new first special symbol are generated from the situation of FIG. 47 (b), and the new starting winning of the starting winnings of the second starting winnings (hereinafter, in the description of FIG. 47, A reserved symbol corresponding to "Starting prize 3" may be displayed in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b, and a new starting prize later (in the description of FIG. 47, "starting prize"). 4)) corresponding to the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c.

  Also, in the left small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds, a new start winning has occurred from the situation of FIG. 47 (b), but a “shooting promotion suggestion” indicating that the state in which the fluctuation reduction function operates has not yet been reached. In addition to the character display of "more!" Being one form, the "remaining time display (here," remaining time 13.25 ")" at this time is displayed in the right small area Ds3. ..

  Next, FIG. 47 (d) shows a situation in which, from the situation of FIG. 47 (c), the variation effect based on "start prize 1" is completed and the display result is displayed. In this situation, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 of the main display area Dm, the chance eye symbol (“778”) appears.

  At this timing, one starting winning of a new first special symbol occurs from the situation of FIG. 47 (c), and the new starting winning (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “starting winning 5” in the description of FIG. 47). ) Corresponding to the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 fourth reserved symbol display area Db1b.

  In the right small area Ds3 of the sub display area Ds, the "remaining time display (here," remaining time 00.00 ")" at this time is displayed. Therefore, it indicates to the player that the “V winning chance production” has ended.

  Therefore, during the execution of the "V winning chance effect", three new starting winnings are generated, so that the variable effect based on the "starting winning 2" for which the "V winning opportunity effect" is executed is shortened effect. Will be performed in a manner. In this case, since a ball can be won in the V winning opening 74a when a V opening jackpot occurs, as an effect that suggests to the player that the ball can win the V winning opening 74a, "V winning opportunity" A chance eye pattern is displayed in accordance with the end of “production”. Specifically, in the processing of S1607 of the counter subtraction processing (see FIG. 45) described above, when it is determined that the remaining time timer 223j is not greater than “0”, that is, the “V winning chance effect” ends. The same process as S1416 of the variation effect process (see FIG. 43) is executed at a timing to determine whether or not a ball can be won in the V winning opening 74a in the current situation, and the ball is put in the V winning opening 74a. When a prize is won, a chance eye symbol is displayed, while when a ball does not win the V winning opening 74a, a chance chance symbol is displayed. With this configuration, as shown in FIG. 47D, by displaying the chance pattern at the end of the "V winning chance production", the condition shown in the "V winning opportunity production" can be achieved. Can be suggested to the player.

  Next, in FIG. 47 (e), from the situation of FIG. 47 (d), the variation effect based on “start prize 1” is finished and the variation effect based on “start prize 2” is started, that is, the main display. Each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the area Dm shows a state in which “high speed fluctuation” is occurring. In this case, in FIG. 47 (d), the reserved symbols corresponding to the "start winning 2" displayed in the special symbol 1 first reserved symbol display region Db1a are shift-displayed in the execution symbol display region Db0, and the special symbol 1 second The reserved symbol corresponding to the "start winning 3" displayed in the reserved symbol display area Db1b is shift-displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a, and is displayed in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c. The reserved symbol corresponding to "Starting prize 4" is shift-displayed in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b, and corresponds to "Starting prize 5" displayed in the special figure 1 fourth reserved symbol display area Db1d. The reserved symbols are shift-displayed in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c.

  Further, in the left small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, a character display of "ready!", Which is a "preparation completion effect" due to the reception of the preparation completion command, is displayed. In addition, the character pattern displayed in the central small area Ds2 is changed and displayed with a happy expression. Therefore, by recognizing the “preparation completion effect”, the player predicts that the V winning opening 74a will be opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened, when the V opening jackpot occurs. can do.

  Next, FIG. 47 (f) shows a situation in which, from the situation of FIG. 47 (e), the variation effect based on "start prize 2" is finished and the display result is displayed. In this situation, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Dm, a "big hit display" in which three "7" symbols corresponding to the "15 round V open big hit" are arranged appears.

  Further, the character design displayed in the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds is displayed with a pleasing look, as in FIG. 47 (e).

  Next, in FIG. 47 (g), from the situation of FIG. 47 (f), a "15 round V open jackpot" occurs and a display indicating that the V winning device 72 is opened in the first round of the jackpot. (In the example of FIG. 47 (g), the characters "V winning chance" and "Aim and hit V!" Are displayed). At this timing, the V winning opening 74a is opened, and therefore, when the V winning device 72 is opened, a ball can enter the V winning opening 74a.

  Next, in FIG. 47 (h), from the situation of FIG. 47 (g), the V winning device 72 is closed after the first round of the jackpot is completed, and the V winning device 74 is open while the V winning device 72 is open. The character display of "V acquisition success!" Which is a "V acquisition notification effect" indicating that a prize has been won is displayed. Therefore, after the jackpot is over, it is suggested to the player to shift to the “probability fluctuation state”.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the V open jackpot is fixedly set for the period from the start of the jackpot until the opening and closing of the V winning device 72, and the V swing. The drive cycle of the minute drive solenoid 73c is set longer than the opening time of the V winning device 72. Therefore, even if the player wins the V opening jackpot, depending on the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened, a situation where a ball can flow into the V winning opening 74a and the V winning opening 74a. There is a situation in which there is a mixture of a situation where the ball cannot flow in and a situation where the ball can and cannot flow into the V winning opening 74a. With such a configuration, whether or not the "probability variation state" is given is changed depending on the timing of a big hit, the variety of games can be made rich, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the pachinko machine 10 having such a configuration, when performing the variation effect, the variation shortening function is activated when the number of reserved balls exceeds the predetermined number. Then, the variable effect being executed, the variable effect being held, and the opening timing of the V winning device 72 at the time of a big hit, and the opening timing of the V winning opening 74a are configured to be pre-read when the starting winning of the special symbol is determined. .. Then, as a result of the determination, in the case where the ball cannot be won in the V winning opening 74a at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is shortened by the fluctuation before the jackpot starts. By setting the function to be activated, it is possible to shift the phase of the opening / closing timing of the V winning opening 74a at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened. With such a configuration, it is possible to create a situation in which a ball can win the V winning opening 74a depending on the game result of the player in the "V winning chance effect". Therefore, by configuring the player's own operation (the number of starting winnings based on the launch) to be able to acquire whether or not the V winning hole 74a is won in the jackpot, the player can feel a sense of accomplishment when the V winning hole 74a is won. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by displaying the “promotion of launch” in the “V prize chance production”, the number of balls to be shot in the pachinko machine 10 can be increased and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Further, the "V winning chance effect" is executed at a predetermined ratio even when each "reach display" at the time of "miss" is extracted and when a jackpot other than the V open jackpot is extracted. With such a configuration, "shooting promotion suggestion" is executed in the "V winning chance effect", and a "hit" when the V winning device 72 is not opened or a variation effect of a jackpot which is not the V opening jackpot. Even so, the player can be prompted to shoot a ball and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Further, in each “reach display”, the “reach display” with a higher jackpot deriving rate is more likely to execute the “V winning chance effect”. With this configuration, it is suggested to the player that the "reach display" with a high jackpot expectation degree can be executed when the "V winning chance effect" that is significant when the jackpot is won is executed. be able to. Therefore, by simultaneously executing the “V winning chance production” and the “reach display” that can expect a jackpot, the player is expected to expect the jackpot to be derived, as compared to the case where each production is executed alone. The interest of the game can be improved. In addition, by making it easier to win the “V winning chance production” as the “reach display” with a higher jackpot expectation degree, it is possible to increase the possibility of winning the V winning opening 74a in the production mode in which the jackpot can be easily won. .. Therefore, in the case of winning a big jackpot, the game value obtained can be changed depending on the effect mode of the extracted variable effect in addition to the jackpot type. It is possible to play the game while paying attention also to, and it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, even if the “holding change notice” and the “V winning chance production” are configured to be executable at the same time, and even if the “holding change notice” appears, the “V winning chance production” gives the player a ball It is possible to promote the launch and improve the operation of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, by overlapping the “reservation change notice” and the “V winning chance production”, it is possible to further enhance the player's expectation for the jackpot and improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the "probability variation state" and the "time reduction state" in which the variation reducing function is easy to operate, it is easy to select whether to activate the variation reducing function based on the player's intention. Therefore, in the "probability variation state" and the "time reduction state", when the corresponding variation effect is executed in the normal effect mode when the "V winning chance effect" is generated, the prize winning assist function is activated. By giving a ball to the second starting opening 71, the corresponding variable effect can be easily made into a shortening effect mode, and the ball can be easily made to flow into the V winning opening 74a.

  Furthermore, in the "normal game state", it is difficult to generate a variation effect of the second special symbol by making it difficult for the ball to win the second starting opening 71, and the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed most. It is configured so that the variation effect of the second special symbol is unlikely to occur. With such a configuration, during the "V winning chance effect" based on the start winning of the first special symbol, the variation effect of the second special symbol that can be changed preferentially over the first special symbol does not interrupt. Can be As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect time of the "V winning chance effect" from deviating from the start time of the variable effect that wins the V opening jackpot.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "V winning chance effect", it is determined whether or not the ball can be won in the V winning opening 74a at the timing when the V winning apparatus 72 is opened, and the V winning opening 74a is determined. In the situation where the ball cannot be won, the "launch promotion suggestion" is displayed to prompt the player to launch the ball so that the fluctuation reducing function is activated. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, in the “V winning chance effect”, in a situation where the ball can win the V winning opening 74a at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened, “stop firing suggestion” Is displayed, and the player is caused to stop firing the ball and wait in the current state.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described focusing on the points different from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 48, the V winning chance effect setting process (S1307) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the V winning chance effect setting process (S1307) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment.

  In the V winning chance effect setting process (S1307) of the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the V opening jackpot is won, the V winning opening 74a is opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened. It is determined whether or not the ball can win. Then, as a result of the determination, when a variation effect that generates a V opening jackpot is executed at a timing when a ball can win the V winning opening 74a at a timing when the V winning device 72 is opened, a variation that wins the V opening jackpot. Until the effect is executed, in order to maintain the current state, in place of the processes of S1356 and S1357 of the V winning chance effect setting process (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment, in the “V winning chance effect”, the game is performed. The person is caused to display a “shooting stop suggestion” that suggests stop of the ball firing (see S1361 and S1362 in FIG. 48).

  In the V winning chance effect setting process (S1307) of the second embodiment, in the process of S1361 performed after the process of S1355, the value of the sum counter 223i after the process of S1355 corresponds to the opening / closing cycle of the V winning port 74a. It is divided by "20000", that is, the value X (X is a natural number) that is the remainder at that time is within the range of "0≤X <5000" (S1361). If the value of the remainder is “0 ≦ X <5000” (S1361: Yes), the V winning opening 74a is opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened in the current state (the number of reserved balls). In this state, the ball can be won in the V winning opening 74a when the V winning device 72 is opened. Therefore, in this situation, if a big hit occurs, the ball will flow into the V winning opening 74a, so that in the "V winning chance effect", a "shooting stop suggestion" prompting the player to stop the ball from being displayed is displayed. The display firing stop suggestion command is set (S1362), the V winning chance effect setting process (S1307) is ended, and the process returns to the prefetch setting process (see FIG. 40).

  The display firing stop suggestion command set in the process of S1362 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display controller 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). Sent. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the display emission stop suggestion command prompts the player to stop the emission of the ball in the "V prize chance effect" by using "emission stop suggestion (FIGS. 49 (b) and (c) described later). ) ”Is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1361, when the value of the remainder is not “0 ≦ X <5000” (S1361: No), that is, the value of the remainder is “5000 ≦ X <20000”. If it is, there is at least a timing when the V winning opening 74a is closed, so even if a big hit occurs in this situation (normal production mode), a ball may flow into the V winning opening 74a. Since there is a possibility that there is no such possibility, in the "V winning chance production", a display firing promotion suggesting command for displaying a "launch promotion suggesting" prompting the player to launch a ball is set (S1357), and this V winning is awarded. The chance effect setting process (S1307) ends, and the process returns to the prefetch setting process (see FIG. 40).

  In this way, at the stage of the start winning of the variable effect that wins the V opening jackpot, when the ball can win the V winning opening 74a at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened, "V winning chance effect" At the time, by prompting the player to stop the ball from being launched, and leaving the situation in which the variable effect of winning the V opening jackpot can be executed as it is, the ball is transferred to the V winning opening 74a at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened. Can create a situation in which a player can win. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the sense of accomplishment when the player wins the V winning opening 74a by configuring whether or not the player can win the V winning opening 74a in the jackpot by the player's own operation (maintaining the current state based on the stop of the firing). , It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the “V winning opportunity effect” on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the variable effect causing the “V winning opportunity effect”, and An execution example of the jackpot effect based on the variation effect will be described.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a transition from the “V winning opportunity effect” performed by the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment to the first round of the jackpot without generating a new starting winning. FIG. 49 (a) is a diagram showing a state immediately after the “V winning chance effect” is started, and FIG. 49 (b) is a state where the left symbol row Z1 is stopped from the state of FIG. 49 (a). 49C is a diagram showing a state, and FIG. 49C is a diagram showing a state in which one variation effect is digested from the state of FIG. 49B and the next pending variation effect is started. FIG. 49 (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the “V winning chance effect” has been completed from the state of FIG. 49 (c), and FIG. 49 (e) is a state of “v”. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a state in which a variable effect that has caused the “V winning chance effect” has been started. (F) is a diagram showing a state in which the jackpot symbol has emerged from the state of FIG. 49 (e), and FIG. 49 (g) shows that the V winning device 72 has been opened from the state of FIG. 49 (f). FIG. 49 (h) is a diagram showing a state that suggests that the “V acquisition notification effect” indicating that a ball has been won in the V winning opening 74a from the state of FIG. 49 (g). It is the figure which showed the state currently being performed.

  In the state of FIG. 49 (a), while the variation effect of the first special symbol is being executed (that is, during the "high-speed fluctuation" of each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3), the start winning of the new first special symbol is achieved. 2 occurs, and the starting symbol (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “starting prize 1” in the description of FIG. 49) of the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a in the pending symbol displayed in the "hold While the "change notice" has not occurred, the special display 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b showing the subsequent starting winning (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "starting winning 2" in the description of FIG. 49) is held. In the symbol, a "reservation change notice" has occurred, indicating that the pending symbol has changed to "red".

  In the fluctuating effect corresponding to this "starting prize 2", "15 round V open jackpot" is won, and as described above, the reserved symbol "Hold change" displayed in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b. This shows a state in which the player has won "red" in the "notice" and has also won the "V winning chance effect" based on the variation effect, and the "V winning chance effect" has been started.

  Here, in FIG. 49 (a), when the variable effect that is being executed and the variable effect that is being held are all executed and a V opening jackpot based on “starting prize 2” occurs, a variable effect based on “starting prize 2”. Is executed in the normal effect mode, it is previously determined that the V winning opening 74a is opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 based on the jackpot is opened. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the "V winning opportunity effect" is performed, the "shooting stop suggestion" is displayed therein, and before the variation effect of the "start winning 2" is started, That the current state is maintained until the variation effect of "Starting prize 2" is started without generating a special starting prize, and the variation effect based on "Starting prize 2" should be executed in the normal effect mode. Suggest to the player.

  In the state of FIG. 49 (a), the character displayed in the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds has generated a dialogue indicating that the "V winning chance effect" has occurred, and the dialogue display is left small. It is displayed in the area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3. Specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the character display "Chance!" That directly indicates that the "V winning chance effect" has occurred appears, and in the right small area Ds3, "Shoot stop suggestion". There is a text display that shows one form, "Please wait without hitting the ball as it is!"

  Next, in FIG. 49 (b), from the situation of FIG. 49 (a), the symbols are stopped in the left symbol column Z1 of the main display area Dm, and the symbols are continuously changed in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3. It shows the situation. Further, in the left small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds, the character display "Do not hit!", Which is one form of "shooting stop suggestion", is displayed, and in the right small area Ds3, "V winning chance effect". The "remaining time display" of the remaining time (here, "remaining time 19:45") is displayed. The "remaining time display" indicates the remaining time of the "V winning chance effect", that is, the time until the variation of "starting winning 2" is started. It should be noted that at this timing, due to the influence of the “fire stop suggestion”, no new start prize has been generated.

  Next, in FIG. 49 (c), from the situation of FIG. 49 (b), the variation effect being executed is finished, and the variation effect based on “start prize 1” is started, that is, each of the main display areas Dm. The symbol rows Z1 to Z3 show a situation in which "high speed fluctuation" occurs. In this case, the reserved symbol corresponding to the "starting winning 1" displayed in the special symbol 1 first reserved symbol display region Db1a in FIG. 49 (b) is shift-displayed in the execution symbol display region Db0, and the special symbol 1 The reserved symbol corresponding to "starting winning 2" displayed in the second reserved symbol display region Db1b is shift-displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display region Db1a.

  Further, in the left small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds, the character display "I have a little more patience!", Which is one form of "fire stop suggestion", is displayed, and in the right small area Ds3, " Remaining time display (here, "remaining time 13.25") is displayed. Even at this timing, no new start prize has been generated due to the influence of the “fire stop suggestion”.

  Next, FIG. 49 (d) shows a situation in which, from the situation of FIG. 49 (c), the variation effect based on "start prize 1" is finished and the display result is displayed. In this situation, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 of the main display area Dm, the chance eye symbol (“778”) appears.

  In the right small area Ds3 of the sub display area Ds, the "remaining time display (here," remaining time 00.00 ")" at this time is displayed. Therefore, it indicates to the player that the “V winning chance production” has ended.

  Even at this timing, a new start prize has not been generated due to the influence of the “fire stop suggestion”. Therefore, a new starting winning is not generated during the execution of the "V winning chance effect", and the variable effect based on the "starting winning 2" that is the execution target of the "V winning opportunity effect" is the "starting winning 2". It will be executed in the normal effect mode recognized at the time of occurrence. In this case, since a ball can be won in the V winning opening 74a when a V opening jackpot occurs, as an effect that suggests to the player that the ball can win the V winning opening 74a, "V winning opportunity" A chance eye pattern is displayed in accordance with the end of “production”. Specifically, in the processing of S1607 of the counter subtraction processing (see FIG. 45) described above, when it is determined that the remaining time timer 223j is not greater than “0”, that is, the “V winning chance effect” ends. The same process as S1416 of the variation effect process (see FIG. 43) is executed at a timing to determine whether or not a ball can be won in the V winning opening 74a in the current situation, and the ball is put in the V winning opening 74a. When a prize is won, a chance eye symbol is displayed, while when a ball does not win the V winning opening 74a, a chance chance symbol is displayed. With such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 49 (d), by displaying the chance eye pattern at the end of the "V winning chance effect", the condition shown in the "V winning chance effect" can be achieved. Can be suggested to the player.

  Next, in FIG. 49 (e), from the situation of FIG. 49 (d), the situation where the variation effect based on the "start prize 1" is finished and the variation effect based on the "start prize 2" is started, that is, the main display Each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the area Dm shows a state in which “high speed fluctuation” is occurring. In this case, the reserved symbol corresponding to the "starting winning 2" displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display region Db1a in FIG. 49 (d) is shift-displayed in the execution symbol display region Db0.

  Further, in the left small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, a character display of "ready!", Which is a "preparation completion effect" due to the reception of the preparation completion command, is displayed. In addition, the character pattern displayed in the central small area Ds2 is changed and displayed with a happy expression. Therefore, by recognizing the “preparation completion effect”, the player predicts that the V winning opening 74a will be opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened, when the V opening jackpot occurs. can do.

  Next, FIG. 49 (f) shows a situation in which, from the situation of FIG. 49 (e), the variation effect based on “starting winning 2” is finished and the display result is displayed. In this situation, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Dm, a "big hit display" in which three "7" symbols corresponding to the "15 round V open big hit" are arranged appears.

  Further, the character design displayed in the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds is displayed with a delighted expression, as in FIG. 49 (e).

  Next, in FIG. 49 (g), from the situation of FIG. 49 (f), a "15 round V open jackpot" occurs and a display indicating that the V winning device 72 is opened in the first round of the jackpot. (In the example of FIG. 49 (g), the characters "V winning chance" and "Aim and hit V!" Are displayed). At this timing, the V winning opening 74a is opened, and therefore, when the V winning device 72 is opened, a ball can enter the V winning opening 74a.

  Next, in FIG. 49 (h), from the situation of FIG. 49 (g), the V winning device 72 is closed after the first round of the jackpot is completed, and the V winning device 74 is opened while the V winning device 72 is open. The character display of "V acquisition success!" Which is a "V acquisition notification effect" indicating that a prize has been won is displayed. Therefore, after the jackpot is over, it is suggested to the player to shift to the “probability fluctuation state”.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the variation effect being executed, the variation effect being held, the opening timing of the V winning device 72 at the time of a big hit, and the opening of the V winning opening 74a. The timing is configured to be determined in advance when the special symbol starts winning. Then, as a result of the determination, at the stage of the start winning of the variable effect that wins the V opening jackpot, in the situation where the ball can win the V winning opening 74a at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened, the "V winning" In the “chance production”, by prompting the player to stop the ball from being shot, and leaving the situation as it is, a variation production that wins the V opening jackpot can be executed, so that the V winning opening is opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened. It is possible to create a situation in which a ball can win in 74a. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the sense of accomplishment when the player wins the V winning opening 74a by configuring whether or not the player can win the V winning opening 74a in the jackpot by the player's own operation (maintaining the current state based on the stop of the firing). , It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment can achieve the same effect as that obtained by the configuration.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 50 to 57, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, when executing the "V winning chance effect", the contents (execution time) of the once set "V winning opportunity effect" are executed as they are, and a new start is performed. The "V winning opportunity effect" being executed is not corrected based on the occurrence of the winning.

  Here, for example, the "V winning chance production" based on the execution of the variation production in which the V opening jackpot does not occur (hereinafter, the "V winning chance production" based on the execution of the variation production in which the V opening jackpot does not occur is referred to as "gase V (May be referred to as "winning chance production") is set, and if a V opening jackpot occurs in a new starting winning that occurs during execution of the "gase V winning opportunity production", "gase V winning opportunity production" Since it is not possible to suggest the opening timing of the V winning device 72 and the opening timing of the V winning opening 74a in the V opening jackpot based on the new start winning, the player moves the ball to the V winning opening 74a by his / her own operation. Can be difficult to win.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when a new start winning is generated during the execution of the “gase V winning chance effect” and a V opening jackpot is generated in the starting winning, the “gase V being executed” is executed. The content of "winning chance production" is modified so that it can be suggested to the player whether or not a ball can win the V winning opening 74a at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened based on the V opening jackpot.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described focusing on the points different from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment or the second embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals as the first embodiment or the second embodiment. The description is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 50, details of the first holding information storage area 223m, the second holding information storage area 223n, and the execution information storage area 223o provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. To do. FIG. 50 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the first suspension information storage area 223m, the second suspension information storage area 223n, and the execution information storage area 223o in the third embodiment. The configuration of the first suspension information storage area 223m, the second suspension information storage area 223n, and the execution information storage area 223o in the third embodiment is different from that of the first embodiment in that the first suspension information storage area 223m and the second suspension information storage area 223m are different. In the hold information storage area 223n and the execution information storage area 223o, variable time information storage areas 223m6, 223n6, 223o6 for storing the fluctuation time of the stored (held or executing) fluctuation effect are provided. That is the point. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

  The variable time information storage areas 223m6 and 223n6 of the respective pending information storage areas 223m and 223n are areas in which data relating to the variable time of the pending variable effect can be stored. Further, the execution information storage area 223o is an area in which data relating to the variation time of the variation effect being executed can be stored, and the variation time management processing executed every 1 ms in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 51) described later. In (see FIG. 54), the remaining time of the variation effect being executed is counted. These fluctuation time information storage areas 223m6, 223n6, 223o6 store the value obtained by converting the execution time of the fluctuating effect that can be executed into milliseconds (that is, "20000" for the fluctuating effect of "20 seconds"). Is configured.

  The voice lamp control device 113 first stores the first hold information storage first to fourth areas of the first hold information storage area 223m or the second hold information storage of the second hold information storage area 223n at the time of receiving the hold ball number command. Of the first to fourth areas, the first reserved information storage X area or the first reserved information storage area corresponding to the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c updated by the reserved ball number command. 2 Based on the values stored in the counter storage areas 223m1 to 223m4 and 223n1 to 223n4 of the X information storage area, the prefetching process (S1391 of the prefetching setting process (see FIG. 52)) is performed. The data regarding the fluctuation time generated based on the result is used for the fluctuation of the same first reservation information storing X area or the second reservation information storing X area. Respectively stored between information storage area 223M6,223n6.

  Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives from the main control device 110 a change pattern command and a stop type command meaning start of change effect, the first hold information storage area 223m or the second hold information storage area 223n, and The shift process is executed in the execution information storage area 223o. That is, the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been suspended is reduced by one, and if the variation effect of the second special symbol is suspended, the second special symbol that is suspended first in time When the execution of the variation effect is started, the variation effect of the second special symbol is not suspended, and when the variation effect of the first special symbol is suspended, the first special symbol suspended first in time. Since execution of the fluctuating effect is started, each storage area 223n1 to 223n6 of the second holding information storing first area corresponding to the first fluctuating effect being reserved, or each of the first holding information storing first area The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and various information (data) stored in the storage areas 223m1 to 223m6 are stored in the storage areas 223o1 to 223o of the execution information storage area 223o corresponding to the variation effect currently being executed. Move to o6.

  In addition, the values and various information (data) of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223m1 to 223m6, 223n1 to 223n6 of the holding information storage second area corresponding to the shifted special symbols are shifted. Moved to each storage area 223m1 to 223m6, 223n1 to 223n6 of the reserved information storage first area corresponding to the special symbol, each storage area 223m1 to 223m6, 223n1 of the reserved information storage third area corresponding to the shifted special symbol The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and various information (data) stored in ~ 223n6 are moved to the storage areas 223m1 to 223m6 of the reserved information storage second area corresponding to the shifted special symbols, and are shifted. Each storage area 2 of the fourth area for storing reserved information corresponding to special symbols The values and various information (data) of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in 3m1 to 223m6 and 223n1 to 223n6 are stored areas 223m1 to 223m6 of the reserved information storage third area corresponding to the shifted special symbols. 223n1 to 223n6.

  Then, with the progress of the fluctuating effect executed based on the values of the values C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223o, a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 51) described later is executed every 1 ms. In the variable time management process (see FIG. 54), the value of the variable time information storage area 223o6 of the execution information storage area 223o is updated (subtracted). Therefore, by discriminating the variable time information storage area 223o6, the remaining time of the variable effect being executed can be grasped at any time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the variable time management process (see S1151) every 1 millisecond in the main process, and changes the execution information storage area 223o that stores the variable time during execution. The value of the time information storage area 223o6 is subtracted, and it is determined whether or not a new starting prize is generated. If a new starting prize is generated, the first hold information is stored based on the starting prize. Data regarding the fluctuation time is stored in the fluctuation time information storage areas 223m6 and 223n6 of the area 223m or the second hold information storage area 223n.

  Specifically, after the counter subtraction process (S1110) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process, the variable time management process is performed (S1151), and after the variable time management process (S1151) is executed, The processing moves to S1111.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 52, a variable time management process (S1151) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a variable time management process (S1151) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment.

  In the variable time management process (S1151), first, it is determined whether or not the variable effect is being executed (S1701). As a result of the determination, if the variation effect is being executed (S1701: Yes), the time data stored in the variation time information storage area 223o6 of the execution information storage area 223o is updated (that is, "1" is subtracted) (S1702). ). Then, the remaining variation time command based on the time data stored in the variation time information storage area 223o6 of the updated execution information storage area 223o is set (S1703), and the process proceeds to S1704. In the process of S1701, when it is determined that the variation effect is not being executed (S1701: No), the processes of S1702 and S1703 are skipped, and the variation time management process (S1151) ends. After the end of the variable time management process (S1151), the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 51).

  The remaining time command set in the process of S1703 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 51). It In the display control device 114, the display control of the "V winning chance effect" on the third symbol display device 81 according to the remaining time of the fluctuating effect being executed indicated by the remaining time command (for example, "block display" described later). Number of items).

  Next, the prefetch setting process (S1208) in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a prefetch setting process (S1208) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. In the look-ahead setting process (S1208) of the third embodiment, a new start prize is generated while the "V prize chance effect" based on the change effect of the loss is being executed, and the change effect based on the start prize is generated. When a V opening jackpot occurs, the “V winning chance production” is extended and the opening timing of the V winning device 72 and the opening timing of the V winning opening 74a based on the V opening jackpot are determined again to make a V opening jackpot. When occurs, it is suggested to the player whether or not the ball can be won in the V winning opening 74a.

  In the look-ahead determination process of the second embodiment, if the V winning chance effect flag 223f is turned on in S1301 (S1301: Yes), the setting process of the "V winning chance effect" has already been executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the V opening jackpot is generated in the variable effect based on the new start winning that is generated during the execution of the "V winning chance effect" (S1321). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the V opening jackpot is generated in the variation effect based on the new starting prize generated during the “V winning chance effect” (S1321: Yes), then, the “V winning opportunity being executed” is executed. It is determined whether or not the "effect" is the "gase V winning chance effect" based on the lost variation effect (S1322).

  In the process of S1322, when it is determined that the “V winning chance effect” being executed is the “Gase V winning opportunity effect” based on the lost variation effect (S1322: Yes), the content of the “V winning opportunity effect” In order to correct, the fluctuation time of each fluctuating effect stored in the pending information storage areas 223m, 223n before the fluctuating effect based on the pending information storage areas 223m, 223n in which the V opening jackpot is stored is executed. Each of them is extracted, a value corresponding to the accumulated time of the fluctuation time is added to the remaining time timer 223j (S1323), and the process proceeds to S1324. Specifically, for example, if the variation time of the variation effect that is the cause of the “Gase V winning chance effect” is “40 seconds” and the variation effect to be executed next is the V opening jackpot, V It is a variation effect that is executed before the open jackpot occurs, and is a variation time of the variation effect that is the cause of the “Gase V prize chance effect” that is not counted as the execution time of the “V prize chance effect”. "40000" corresponding to "40 seconds" is added to the remaining time timer 223j. This makes it possible to extend the execution time of the “V winning chance effect” being executed, which is the cause of the “gase V winning chance effect”, until the start of the fluctuating effect that causes the V opening jackpot.

  In the process of S1324, the addition time command is set according to the time added in the process of S1323 (S1324), the process proceeds to the V winning chance effect setting process of S1307, and the contents of the “V winning chance effect” are set again. To do.

  The addition time command set in the process of S1324 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 38). It As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the addition time command recognizes the extension time in the "V winning chance effect" and executes the process of adding and displaying the value indicated by the addition time command in the "remaining time display".

  In the process of S1321, if the V opening jackpot does not occur in the fluctuating effect based on the new start winning (S1321: No), or in the process of S1322, the "V prize chance effect" being executed is lost. If it is not based on the variable effect (S1322: No), the process of S1323 and S1324 is not performed and the process proceeds to S1308 in order to directly execute the currently executed “V winning chance effect”.

  In the process of S1322, in the case of the "V winning chance effect" based on the V opening jackpot, that is, "15 round V opening jackpot" or "7 round V opening jackpot", the setting (correction) of the "V winning chance effect" is made again. Is not performed, and the process proceeds to S1308. This suggests to the player whether or not the situation is such that, in the "V prize chance production" that is being executed, the ball is already won in the V winning opening 74a at the opening timing of the V winning device 72 based on the V opening jackpot. Therefore, in this case, if the content of the "V winning chance effect" being executed is changed, a suggestion of a situation in which a ball wins the V winning opening 74a at the opening timing of the V winning device 72 based on the previous V opening jackpot. The contents may be changed, and the contents of the accurate “V winning chance effect” that has already been performed may become inaccurate. Therefore, even if a start winning that causes a new V opening jackpot occurs during execution of the "V winning chance presentation" based on the V opening jackpot, the "V winning opportunity presentation" that is being executed is extended (corrected). Instead, the "V winning chance effect" that is being executed is directly executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the effect contents of the "V winning chance effect".

  Further, in the process of S1322, in the case of a jackpot which is not a V opening jackpot, that is, a “V winning chance rendering” based on “15 round V closing jackpot” or “7 round V closing jackpot”, “V winning chance rendering” is newly made. Setting (correction) is not performed, and the process proceeds to S1308. This is because if a V opening jackpot is generated in a variable presentation based on a new start winning during the execution of a "V winning chance presentation" based on a jackpot that is not a V opening jackpot, the execution time of the jackpot that is not the V opening jackpot is The opening time of the variable winning device 65 is not constant, and the end timing thereof cannot be accurately recognized at this point. Here, if the "V winning chance effect" being executed is extended based on the starting winning that causes the V opening jackpot, the "V winning chance effect" continues until the jackpot that is not the V opening jackpot is being executed. At the same time, it ends during the big hit, and there is a discrepancy in the effect contents. Therefore, even if a start winning that causes a V opening jackpot occurs during execution of a "V winning chance presentation" based on a jackpot that is not a V opening jackpot, the extension (correction) of the "V winning chance presentation" that is being executed is extended. Instead, the "V winning chance effect" being executed is executed as it is. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the effect contents of the "V winning chance effect".

  Further, in the prefetch setting process (S1208) of the third embodiment, the variation time of the variation effect based on the received reserved ball number command is prefetched and the variation time information storage area 223m6 provided in the pending information storage areas 223m and 223n. , 223n6.

  Specifically, in the prefetch setting process (S1208), after the process of S1311, the variation time of each variation effect is based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding information storage areas 223m and 223n. And sets the data corresponding to the fluctuation time in the fluctuation time information storage areas 223m6 and 223n6 provided in the pending information storage areas 223m and 223n (S1391), and ends the prefetch setting process (S1208). , Command determination processing (see FIG. 39).

  In this way, each time the start winning is generated, the variation time of each variation effect is extracted, and the variation time data is stored, so that the display control in the “V winning chance effect” can be smoothly performed. It will be possible. Further, by performing display control based on the variation time data stored in the variation time information storage areas 223m6, 223n6 of the respective holding information storage areas 223m, 223n, the "block display" in the "V winning chance effect" described later is performed. It becomes possible to execute.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the V winning chance effect setting process (S1307) in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the V winning chance effect setting process (S1307) of the third embodiment.

  The V winning chance effect setting process (S1307) of the third embodiment is executed even when a V opening jackpot may occur due to a new starting winning during the execution of the “V winning chance effect” based on the lost variation effect. Is configured. Therefore, if a V opening jackpot can occur in a new starting winning, the processes of S1352 to S1356 are executed and whether or not a ball can be won in the V winning opening 74a at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened. Is determined.

  Then, in the processing of S1356, the value of the sum counter 223i after the processing of S1355 is divided by the time corresponding to the opening / closing cycle of the V winning opening 74a, that is, "20000", and the remainder value X (X is It is determined whether or not the (natural number) is within the range of “10000 ≦ X <15000” (S1356). When the value of the remainder is “10000 ≦ X <15000” (S1356: Yes), the V winning opening 74a is completely closed by the distribution plate 73a at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened. Even if the V winning device 72 is opened, the ball cannot enter the V winning opening 74a. Therefore, in this state (as in the normal effect mode), even if a big hit occurs, the ball does not flow into the V winning opening 74a. Therefore, in the "V winning chance effect", the player is prompted to launch the ball. A display firing promotion suggestion command for displaying "promotion suggestion" is set (S1357), the V winning chance effect setting process (S1307) is ended, and the process returns to the prefetch setting process (see FIG. 40).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1356, if the value of the remainder is not “10000 ≦ X <15000” (S1356: No), then the value of the remainder is within the range of “0 ≦ X <5000”. It is determined whether or not (S1365). When the value of the remainder is “0 ≦ X <5000” (S1365: Yes), in the current state (the number of reserved balls), the V winning opening 74a is opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened. In this state, the ball can be won in the V winning opening 74a when the V winning device 72 is opened. Therefore, in this situation, if a big hit occurs, the ball will flow into the V winning opening 74a, so that in the "V winning chance effect", a "shooting stop suggestion" prompting the player to stop the ball from being displayed is displayed. The display firing stop suggestion command is set (S1366), the V winning chance effect setting process (S1307) ends, and the process returns to the prefetch setting process (see FIG. 52).

  In the process of S1356, when the value of the remainder is not “10000 ≦ X <15000” (S1356: No), and in the process of S1365, the value of the remainder is “0 ≦ X <5000”. "(S1365: No), that is, when the value of the remainder is" 5000≤X <10000 "or" 15000≤X <20000 ", at least the V winning opening 74a Since there is a timing when the ball is opened, the ball can win the V winning opening 74a even in this situation. Therefore, in the "V winning chance effect", neither the "promotion of firing suggestion" nor the "provision of firing stop" is displayed, and the process of S1366 is skipped in order to allow the player to think and play the game. The V winning chance effect setting process (S1307) is ended, and the process returns to the prefetch setting process (see FIG. 40).

  In this way, when a "Vase winning prize production" is executed and a V opening jackpot is generated based on a new starting winning, the content of the "V winning opportunity production" is corrected (extended) and the V winning device is added. The opening timing of 72 and the opening timing of the V winning opening 74a are discriminated, and it is suggested to the player whether or not the ball wins the V winning opening 74a at the opening timing of the V winning device 72 based on the V opening jackpot. To configure. With this configuration, it is possible to accurately indicate to the player the situation in which a ball wins the V winning opening 74a at the opening timing of the V winning device 72 based on the V opening jackpot, and to the V winning opening 74a in the jackpot. It is possible to obtain the presence or absence of a prize by the player's own operation (the number of starting prizes based on the launch), to make the player feel a sense of accomplishment when the V prize hole 74a is prized, and to improve the enjoyment of the game. Further, when the “promotion of launching promotion” is displayed, the number of shot balls in the pachinko machine 10 can be increased and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a variation effect process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the variable effect process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to execute a shortening time update process (S1451) for determining whether or not the variation effect to be executed is a shortening effect mode when the variation effect is started. There is.

  Specifically, in the variation effect process (S1111) of the third embodiment, after the process of S1413, the shortening time update process is performed to determine whether or not the variation effect to be executed is executed in the shortened effect mode ( (S1451) and then the process proceeds to S1414.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 56, the shortening time update processing (S1451) executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a shortening time update process (S1451) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment.

  In this shortening time update process (S1451), first, it is determined whether or not the variation effect to be executed in the shortening effect mode is executed (S1471). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the variation effect to be executed is executed in the shortening effect mode (S1471: Yes), the variation time shorter by 10 seconds than the variation time of the variation effect determined at the time of winning the start prize. Therefore, first, "10000" is subtracted from the variation effect time data stored in the variation time information storage area 223o6 of the execution information storage area 223o (S1472). As a result, the consistency between the variation time of the variation effect that is actually performed and the variation effect time data stored in the execution information storage area 223o is maintained.

  After the processing of S1472, the remaining fluctuation time command based on the time data stored in the fluctuation time information storage area 223o6 of the execution information storage area 223o subtracted in the processing of S1471 is set (S1473), and this update at the time of shortening is set. The process (S1451) is ended, and the process returns to the variation effect (see FIG. 55).

  The remaining time command set in the process of S1473 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 51). It In the display control device 114, in accordance with the remaining time of the fluctuating effect being executed (execution time of the fluctuating effect to be executed) indicated by the remaining time command, the “V winning chance effect” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Display control (for example, the number of “block displays” to be described later) is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, a “V winning opportunity effect” on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, a variable effect causing the “V winning opportunity effect”, and An execution example of the jackpot effect based on the variation effect will be described.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a transition from the “V winning chance effect” performed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment to the first round of the jackpot after a new starting winning occurs. FIG. 57 (a) is a diagram showing a state immediately after the "V winning chance effect" of the third embodiment is started, and FIG. 57 (b) is a "V winning a prize" state from the state of FIG. 57 (a). It is a figure showing the state where "V drive suggestion display" and "variation time integration display" were displayed in "opportunity production." FIG. 57C is a diagram showing a state immediately before the "additional display" is made to the "remaining time display" when a new start winning is generated from the state of FIG. 57B. Yes, FIG. 57 (d) is a diagram showing a state in which “additional display” is applied to “remaining time display” from the state of FIG. 57 (c). Further, in FIG. 57 (e), the “V winning chance effect” continues from the state of FIG. 57 (d), the “V drive suggestion display” and the “variable time integration display” are displayed, and the “shooting promotion” is displayed. FIG. 57 (f) is a diagram showing a state in which “emission stop suggestion” is displayed from the state in FIG. 57 (e). 57 (g) is a view showing a state in which the V winning device 72 is opened from the state of FIG. 57 (f), and FIG. 57 (h) is shown in FIG. 57 (). It is the figure which showed the state where "V acquisition notification production" which shows having won the ball to V winning opening 74a from the state of g) is performed.

  In the state of FIG. 57 (a), during the variation effect of the first special symbol is being executed (that is, during the "high-speed fluctuation" of each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3), a start prize for a new first special symbol is obtained. 2 occurs, and the starting symbol (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “starting prize 1” in the description of FIG. 57) indicating the special symbol 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a While the "change notice" has not occurred, the special display 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b indicating the subsequent starting prize (hereinafter, may be referred to as "starting prize 2" in the description of FIG. 57) is held. In the symbol, a "holding change notice" has occurred, and the holding symbol shows a state of changing to "blue".

  In the fluctuating effect corresponding to this “starting winning 2”, in the fluctuating effect of the loss, a “normal reach (normal)” effect mode (for example, “E2: normal reach”, a 25-second “high-speed fluctuation (long)” fluctuation element + “Variable elements of“ low speed fluctuation ”+ variable elements of“ normal reach ”” are extracted, and, as described above, the reserved symbol “Hold change notice” displayed in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b This shows a state in which the player has won the “blue” and also won the “gase V winning chance effect” based on the variation effect, and the “gase V winning chance effect” has started.

  Here, in FIG. 57 (a), while the variation effect being executed and the variation effect being held are all executed, the character displayed in the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds is the "V winning chance effect". Has been generated, and the serif display is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3. Specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the character display "Chance is!" That directly indicates that the "V winning chance presentation" has occurred appears, and in the right small area Ds3, "Promotion promotion suggestion". The character display "Aim the target!" That shows one form appears.

  Next, in FIG. 57 (b), from the situation of FIG. 57 (a), as the “V winning chance effect” of the third embodiment, the opening / closing mode of the V winning opening 74a on the left symbol column Z1 of the main display area Dm. A "V drive suggestion display" indicating that the "V drive suggestion display" is displayed, and on the middle symbol row Z2 of the main display area Dm, is composed of a plurality of "block displays" that schematically show the variation time of the variation effect that is being held. The "variable time integrated display" is displayed, and the same character symbol as the character symbol displayed in the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds is displayed on the right symbol row Z3 of the main display area Dm. Further, in the left small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds, a character display of "match the chance!", Which is one form of the "promotion promotion", is displayed, and in the right small area Ds3, "V winning chance production. “Remaining time display” of the remaining time (here, “remaining time: 41.45”) is displayed. In this state, the variation effect of the special symbol that has been executed in the main display area Dm is reduced and displayed in the upper left display area of the main display area Dm.

  Here, the "V drive suggestion display" and the "variation time integration display" will be described. The "V drive suggestion display" is configured by alternately connecting a "chance" display that indicates the open state of the V winning opening 74a and a "blank" display that indicates the closed state of the V winning opening 74a. ing. The linked "chance" display and "blank" display are configured to be scroll-displayed from the upper part of the screen toward the lower part of the screen so as to interlock with a change in "variable time integration display" described later.

  The "variation time integration display" is composed of a plurality of "block displays" that schematically show the variation times of the variation effect that is being executed and the variation effect that is being held. It schematically suggests the execution time (duration) of "drafting". This "block display" is configured to change over time with the progress of the variable effect. Specifically, in the “V winning chance effect” of the third embodiment, an effect of changing the “block display” of the “fluctuation time integration display” with the progress of the fluctuation effect is executed. More specifically, the “block display” displayed at the bottom of the “variable time integration display” is erased so as to be crushed as the time of “5 seconds” to “10 seconds” elapses. Such an effect is executed. When the "block display" is crushed (erased), the "block display" other than the crushed "block display" is displayed so as to drop (scroll) down the screen.

  As the “variable time integrated display” in FIG. 57 (b), two “block displays” corresponding to the variation effect being executed (hereinafter, “block display” corresponding to the variation effect being executed, are displayed in order from the bottom of the screen). It may be referred to as "block display 0") and "starting winning 1" (that is, the special design 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a reserved symbol in FIG. 57 (b)) corresponding to the variation effect of 2 "Block display" (hereinafter, "block display corresponding to variation effect based on" start prize 1 "may be referred to as" block display 1 ")" and "start prize 2" (that is, FIG. 57 (b)). 4) "block display" corresponding to the variation effect based on the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b) (hereinafter, "block display" corresponding to the variation effect based on "start winning 2"), "Block table Sometimes referred to as 2 "is) are displayed stacked.

  Further, in the left part of the front view of the "block display" displayed at the top of the "block display 2" of the "variable time integration display", the "arrow pattern" facing the left side of the screen is displayed in a linked manner. .. The "arrow symbol" is displayed such that the tip of the arrow overlaps with the "V drive suggestion display", and the position pointed to by the "arrow symbol" is determined by the V winning device 72 based on the "V winning chance effect". The opening / closing mode of the V winning opening 74a when opened is shown. Specifically, when the "arrow pattern" indicates the "chance" display, a ball wins the V winning opening 74a when the V winning device 72 is opened based on this "V winning chance effect". On the other hand, when the "arrow symbol" indicates the "blank" display while suggesting the situation of getting, when the V winning device 72 is opened based on the "V winning opportunity effect", the V winning port 74a is opened. It suggests that the ball cannot win.

  As described above, the "V drive suggestion display" and the "variation time integration display" in the "V winning chance effect" are configured to be scroll-displayed in conjunction with each other. When the "block display" of 1 of "display" is deleted, the "V drive suggestion display" is scroll-displayed at the lower part of the screen by the display height of the deleted "block display". Therefore, the content of the "V drive suggestion display" indicated by the "arrow design" of the "variable time integration display" is configured to have the same content when the "block display" is erased as the variation time elapses. Has been done.

  In the state of FIG. 57 (b), the “arrow pattern” linked to the “block display” at the top of the “variable time integration display” indicates the “blank” display of the “V drive suggestion display”. In the situation, when the V winning device 72 is opened based on the "V winning chance effect", the V winning opening 74a is not opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened, and a ball is won in the V winning opening 74a. It suggests an impossible situation. It should be noted that no new start winning has occurred at this timing.

  Next, in FIG. 57 (c), from the situation of FIG. 57 (b), a situation in which the variation effect being executed has continued and is in effect, that is, the variation of the special symbol in the display area at the upper left part of the main display area Dm. The situation shows that the production is "high speed fluctuation". Further, in the left small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds, "more!" Which is one form of "promotion of firing" is displayed. In the right small area Ds3, the "remaining time display" of the remaining time of the "V winning chance effect" (here, "remaining time 38:44") is displayed.

  At this timing, one new starting prize of the first special symbol occurs from the situation of FIG. 57 (b), and a new starting prize (hereinafter, may be referred to as “starting prize 3” in the description of FIG. 57). The reserved symbol corresponding to is displayed in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c. In the fluctuating effect corresponding to this "starting prize 3", "15 round V open jackpot" is won, and "red" of the pending symbol "Hold change notice" displayed in the special symbol 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c. The winning state is shown.

  In the "variation time integration display" in FIG. 57 (c), since the variation time has elapsed from the state in FIG. 57 (b), "block display 0" is displayed in S1703 of the variation time management process (see FIG. 52). One of the constituent "block displays" has been deleted, and the "block display 1" is displayed as "block display 1". Then, in the upper part of the screen of "block display 0", as in FIG. 57 (b), "block display 1" composed of 2 "block display" and "block display" composed of 4 "block display". 2 ”is displayed in a stack.

  In addition, in the “variation time integration display” in FIG. 57 (c), 4 “block displays” corresponding to the variation effect based on “start prize 3” (hereinafter, “variation effect based on“ start prize 3 ”. The "block display" may be referred to as "block display 3") from the upper part of the screen. This "block display 3" is displayed so as to correspond to the variation time of "start prize 3" based on the process of S1391 of the prefetch setting process (see FIG. 53), and then stacked above "block display 2". Thus, it is shown to the player that the execution time of the "V winning chance effect" is increased by the increase of the "block display" which is the "variable time integrated display".

  Here, in FIG. 57 (c), when the variable effect that is being executed and the variable effect that is being held are all executed and a V opening jackpot based on "start prize 3" has occurred, a variable effect based on "start prize 3" Is executed in the normal effect mode, it is previously determined that the V winning opening 74a is closed at the timing when the V winning device 72 based on the jackpot is opened. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, in order to suggest to the player whether or not the ball is won in the V winning opening 74a in the V opening jackpot based on the "starting winning 3", first, the "Gase V winning The execution time of the "V winning chance effect" is extended by the execution time of the variable effect of "start prize 2" that is the cause of the "chance effect". Specifically, with respect to the "remaining time display" currently displayed in the right small area Ds3, "+40.00" "additional display" appears in the upper right upper display area of the main display area Dm. An effect of adding "additional display" to "remaining time display" is executed. That is, in the scene of FIG. 57 (c), the execution time of the "V winning chance effect" is added by "40 seconds" to correspond to the increase of "block display 3".

  Then, in the state of FIG. 57 (c), the “arrow pattern” connected to the “block display 3” stacked on the top of the “variable time integration display” is the “blank” display of the “V drive suggestion display”. In this situation, if the V winning device 72 is opened based on the "V winning chance effect" in this situation, the V winning port 74a is not opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened, and the V winning port is not opened. This suggests that the ball cannot be won in 74a.

  That is, in FIG. 57 (c), it is suggested to the player that the "V winning chance effect" has been extended, and in the current state, even if the V opening jackpot occurs, the V winning opening It indicates that the ball cannot be won in 74a. Furthermore, by prompting the "promotion of launching" to launch the ball, a new starting prize is generated during the execution of the extended "V winning opportunity production", and a special symbol at the start of the variation production of "starting winning 3". It is suggested that the number of reserved balls is set to "4" and the variable effect based on "start prize 3" should be executed in a shortened effect mode.

  Next, in FIG. 57 (d), from the situation of FIG. 57 (c), the variation effect corresponding to “block display 0” and “block display 1” is completed, that is, the upper left portion of the main display area Dm is displayed. It shows a state in which the variation effect of the special symbol in the area is stopped and displayed as the "Gassechan eye symbol". In the left small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, "Shoot me!", Which is one form of "promotion of firing", is displayed. Further, in the right small area Ds3, the "remaining time display" of the remaining time of the "V winning chance effect" (here, "remaining time 40:00") is displayed. The "remaining time display" indicates the remaining time of the "V winning chance effect" corrected (extended) based on the "starting prize 3", that is, the time until the fluctuation of the "starting prize 3" is started. ing. It should be noted that no new start winning has occurred at this timing.

  In this case, the variation effect that has been executed in FIG. 57 (c) has ended, and corresponds to the “starting winning 1” displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a in FIG. 57 (c). The fluctuating effect corresponding to the pending design is also deleted. Then, in FIG. 57 (c), the reserved symbols corresponding to the "starting winning 2" displayed in the special symbol 1 second reserved symbol display region Db1b are shift-displayed in the special symbol 1 first reserved symbol display region Db1a. Together with FIG. 57 (c), the reserved symbols corresponding to "starting prize 3" displayed in the special symbol 1 third reserved symbol display region Db1c are shift-displayed in the special symbol 1 second reserved symbol display region Db1b. .

  In the "variation time integration display" in Fig. 57 (d), since the variation time has elapsed from the state in Fig. 57 (c), "block display 0" and Each "block display" constituting "block display 1" is deleted. Then, the “block display 2” configured by the “block display” 4 and the “block display 3” configured by the “block display” 4 are displayed in a stacked manner.

  Further, in the state of FIG. 57 (d), as in the state of FIG. 57 (c), the “arrow symbol” linked to the “block display 3” stacked on the top of the “variable time integration display” is “V”. The "blank" display of the "drive suggestion display" is indicated, and in this situation, if the V winning device 72 is opened based on the "V winning opportunity effect", the V winning device 72 is opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened. The mouth 74a is not opened, which suggests that the ball cannot be won in the V winning opening 74a.

  Next, in FIG. 57 (e), from the situation of FIG. 57 (d), the variation effect corresponding to the “block display 2” is started and the “reach display” is executed, that is, in the main display area Dm. In the upper left display area, the variation effect of the special symbol is displayed as a "reach forming symbol". Further, in the left small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, "Still still!" Which is one form of "Promotion promotion suggestion" is displayed. Further, in the right small area Ds3, a "remaining time display" of the remaining time of the "V winning chance effect" (here, "remaining time 24:35") is displayed.

  In this case, in addition to being erased by performing the variable effect by the reserved symbol corresponding to the "start winning 2" displayed in the special symbol 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a in FIG. 57 (d), The reserved symbols corresponding to the "start winning 3" displayed in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b are shift-displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a.

  In addition, at this timing, one new start winning symbol of the first special symbol is generated from the situation of FIG. 57 (d), and a new starting winning symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “starting winning symbol 4” in the description of FIG. 57). There is a reserved symbol corresponding to) is displayed in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b. In the variation effect corresponding to the "start prize 4", the "hold change notice" is not won, and it is displayed in the display mode of "white".

  In the “variation time integration display” in FIG. 57 (e), since the variation time has elapsed from the state in FIG. 57 (d), “block display 2” is displayed in S1703 of the variation time management process (see FIG. 52). One of the constituent "block displays" has been deleted, and the "block display 2" is displayed as "block display 3". Then, "block display 3" composed of 4 "block displays" is stacked and displayed above the "block display 2" screen, as in FIG. 57 (d).

  Further, in the "variation time integration display" in FIG. 57 (e), 2 "block display" corresponding to the variation effect based on "start prize 4" (hereinafter, "variation effect based on" start prize 4 ". The "block display" may be referred to as "block display 4") from the upper part of the screen. This "block display 4" is displayed so as to correspond to the variation time of "start prize 4" based on the process of S1391 of the prefetch setting process (see FIG. 53), and then stacked above "block display 3". Be done. Even if the “block display 4” is stacked above the “block display 3” as the “variable time integration display”, the execution time of the “V winning chance effect” does not increase. Therefore, the connection position of the "arrow symbol" connected to the "block display 3" does not change.

  That is, in FIG. 57 (e), while suggesting to the player that the number of reserved balls has been increased by a new start winning, in the current state, even if a V opening jackpot occurs, a V winning opening This indicates that the ball cannot be won in 74a. In addition, by prompting the launch of the ball with the "promotion promotion suggestion", a further start prize is generated, and at the start of the variation production of "start prize 3", the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is set to "4", and the "start prize". 3 ”suggests that the variable effect based on“ 3 ”should be executed in a shortened effect mode.

  Next, in FIG. 57 (f), from the situation of FIG. 57 (e), a state in which the "reach display" is continuously executed after the variation effect being executed has passed, that is, in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. In the display area of, the variation effect of the special symbol is displayed in the state of "reach forming symbol". Further, in the left small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, "ready, stop hitting", which is one form of the "fire stop suggestion", is displayed. Further, in the right small area Ds3, the "remaining time display" of the remaining time of the "V winning chance effect" (here, "remaining time 16:35") is displayed.

  At this timing, two starting winnings of the new first special symbol are generated from the situation of FIG. 57 (e), and the new starting winning of the starting winnings of the second starting winning (in the description of FIG. 57, " A reserved symbol corresponding to "starting prize 5" may be displayed in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c (see FIG. 5) and a new starting prize afterward (hereinafter, description of FIG. 57). The reserved symbol corresponding to "Starting prize 6" may be displayed in the special figure 1 fourth reserved symbol display area Db1d (see FIG. 5). In the variation effects corresponding to the "starting prize 5" and the "starting prize 6", the "hold change notice" is not won, and the display mode is "white".

  In the “variation time integration display” in FIG. 57 (f), since the variation time has elapsed from the state in FIG. 57 (e), “block display 2” is displayed in S1703 of the variation time management process (see FIG. 52). One of the constituent "block displays" has been deleted, and the "block display 2" is displayed as "block display 2". Then, in the upper part of the screen of "block display 2", as in FIG. 57 (d), "block display 3" configured by 4 "block display" and "block display configured by 2" block display 4 ”is displayed in a stack.

  Also, in the "variation time integration display" in FIG. 57 (f), 2 "block displays" corresponding to the variation effect based on "start prize 5" (hereinafter, "variation effect based on" start prize 5 ". “Block display” may be referred to as “block display 5”) is dropped from the upper part of the screen and is piled up above “block display 4”, and it corresponds to the variable effect based on “start prize 6”. The “block display” (hereinafter, the “block display” corresponding to the variation effect based on the “start prize 6” may be referred to as “block display 6”) drops from the upper part of the screen and is located above the “block display 5”. Are displayed in a stack.

  Here, during this "V winning chance production", that is, before the start of the variation production based on "start winning 3", the number of reserved balls of the special symbol can be accumulated "4". Therefore, since the variation effect based on “start prize 3” is executed in the shortened effect mode, in the shortened time update process of the variable effect process (see FIG. 56), the change time information storage area 223o6 of the execution information storage area 223o is changed. "10000" corresponding to "10 seconds" has been subtracted from the value (see S1472 and S1473), and in order to show that, the hammer pattern held by the character symbol is displayed in the "block for changing time integration display". A state in which the "block display" of 1 of "display 3" is skipped from the accumulated "variable time integration display" and the "block display" is skipped on the right side of the screen is shown. Then, each "block display" (that is, "block display 3", "block display 4", "block display 5" and "block display 6") stacked above the flipped "block display". However, a state in which it has fallen to the lower side of the screen like a daruma drop is shown.

  In this case, the position indicated by the "arrow design" linked to the "block display" at the top of the "block display 3" is offset by the skipped "block display", and the "blank" display is replaced with the "chance". The display is changing.

  That is, in FIG. 57 (f), by suggesting that the number of reserved balls has been increased by a new starting winning, the "arrow pattern" of "variable time integration display" is changed to "chance of V drive suggestion display". By pointing to the display, it is suggested to the player that the V winning opening 74a is opened at the timing when the V winning device 72 is opened when the V opening jackpot occurs.

  Next, in FIG. 57 (g), from the situation of FIG. 57 (f), the variation effect based on “starting winning 3” is executed, and “15 round V open jackpot” occurs in the variation effect, and the jackpot A display indicating that the V winning device 72 is opened in the first round (in the example of FIG. 57 (g), the characters “V winning opportunity” and “Aim for V!”) Appears. There is. At this timing, the V winning opening 74a is opened, and therefore, when the V winning device 72 is opened, a ball can enter the V winning opening 74a.

  Next, in FIG. 57 (h), from the situation of FIG. 57 (g), the V winning device 72 is closed after the first round of the jackpot is completed, and the V winning device 74 is opened while the V winning device 72 is open. The character display of "V acquisition success!" Which is a "V acquisition notification effect" indicating that a prize has been won is displayed. Therefore, after the jackpot is over, it is suggested to the player to shift to the “probability fluctuation state”.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when the "gase V winning chance production" is executed, if a V opening jackpot occurs based on a new starting winning, "V winning chance production". Is corrected (extended), the opening timing of the V winning device 72 and the opening timing of the V winning opening 74a are determined, and a ball is placed in the V winning opening 74a at the opening timing of the V winning device 72 based on the V opening jackpot. It is configured so as to suggest to the player whether or not it is a winning situation. With this configuration, it is possible to accurately indicate to the player the situation in which a ball wins the V winning opening 74a at the opening timing of the V winning device 72 based on the V opening jackpot, and to the V winning opening 74a in the jackpot. It is possible to obtain the presence or absence of a prize by the player's own operation (the number of starting prizes based on the launch), to make the player feel a sense of accomplishment when the V prize hole 74a is prized, and to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, in the case of the "V winning opportunity effect" based on the V opening jackpot, the "V winning opportunity effect" is not set (corrected) again. This suggests to the player whether or not the situation is such that, in the "V prize chance production" that is being executed, the ball is already won in the V winning opening 74a at the opening timing of the V winning device 72 based on the V opening jackpot. Therefore, in this case, if the content of the "V winning chance effect" being executed is changed, a suggestion of a situation in which a ball wins the V winning opening 74a at the opening timing of the V winning device 72 based on the previous V opening jackpot. The contents may be changed, and the contents of the accurate “V winning chance effect” that has already been performed may become inaccurate. Therefore, even if a start winning that causes a new V opening jackpot occurs during execution of the "V winning chance presentation" based on the V opening jackpot, the "V winning opportunity presentation" that is being executed is extended (corrected). Instead, the "V winning chance effect" that is being executed is directly executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the effect contents of the "V winning chance effect".

  Further, even in the case of a "V winning chance effect" based on a jackpot that is not a V opening jackpot, the "V winning chance effect" is not set (corrected) again. This is because if a V opening jackpot is generated in a variable presentation based on a new start winning during the execution of a "V winning chance presentation" based on a jackpot that is not a V opening jackpot, the execution time of the jackpot that is not the V opening jackpot is The opening time of the variable winning device 65 is not constant, and the end timing thereof cannot be accurately recognized at this point. Here, if the "V winning chance effect" being executed is extended based on the starting winning that causes the V opening jackpot, the "V winning chance effect" continues until the jackpot that is not the V opening jackpot is being executed. At the same time, it ends during the big hit, and there is a discrepancy in the effect contents. Therefore, even if a start winning that causes a V opening jackpot occurs during execution of a "V winning chance presentation" based on a jackpot that is not a V opening jackpot, the extension (correction) of the "V winning chance presentation" that is being executed is extended. Instead, the "V winning chance effect" being executed is executed as it is. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the effect contents of the "V winning chance effect".

  Further, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the execution time of the variable effect, the opening timing of the V winning device 72, and the opening timing of the V winning opening 74a which is always driven constantly, and the contents thereof are used for the remaining time command and the V winning. By transmitting to the display control device 114 by a device release command or the like, the third symbol display device 81 visualizes and displays. Then, before the V winning device 72 is opened, it is also displayed whether or not a ball can be won in the V winning opening 74a in the situation under execution. Further, when the execution time of the fluctuating effect is changed, the effect corresponding to the changed content is executed. With such a configuration, by displaying the change in the obtained game value in accordance with the change in the game situation associated with the result of the game performed by the player on his / her own will, the sense of achievement when the game value is obtained You can feel it and improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred. For example, in each embodiment, a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of another embodiment is added to the embodiment or a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the embodiment is exchanged, thereby The embodiment may be modified and configured. Further, the numerical values mentioned in the above embodiment are examples, and it is naturally possible to adopt other numerical values.

<Modification 1>
In each of the above-described embodiments, as a “V winning opportunity effect”, “fire stop suggestion” is performed when the V winning opening 74a can be won, and when the V winning opening 74a cannot be won, This is done by instructing the player on the manner in which the ball is to be fired as a "V winning chance effect". On the other hand, the “V winning chance effect” may be expressed by directly suggesting the probability of winning the V winning opening 74a. Specifically, for example, if the ball can be won in the V winning opening 74a while the V winning device 72 is open, the character display such as "100%" or "90%" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Appear in. If the ball cannot be won in the V winning opening 74a while the V winning device 72 is opened, character display such as "0%" or "10%" appears on the third symbol display device 81. .. Furthermore, if the situation in which the ball can win the V winning opening 74a and the situation in which the ball cannot be won are mixed while the V winning device 72 is opened, the ball will be compared to the situation in which the ball cannot win. You may comprise so that the ratio (for example, "50%" etc. in the case of 50%) of the situation which can be won may appear on the 3rd symbol display device 81.

<Modification 2>
In each of the above-described embodiments, as a “V winning opportunity effect”, “fire stop suggestion” is performed when the V winning opening 74a can be won, and when the V winning opening 74a cannot be won, This is done by instructing the player on the manner in which the ball is to be fired as a "V winning chance effect". On the other hand, as the “V winning chance effect”, a message expression that indirectly suggests the probability of winning the V winning opening 74a may be used. Specifically, for example, if the ball can be won in the V winning opening 74a while the V winning device 72 is opened, the character display such as "Great chance!" Or "Lucky!" Is displayed on the third symbol display device. Appears at 81. In addition, when the ball cannot win the V winning opening 74a while the V winning device 72 is open, a character display such as "Dangerous ..." or "May not be ..." is displayed as the third symbol. Appears in device 81. Furthermore, when the situation in which the balls can win the V winning opening 74a and the situation in which the balls cannot win while the V winning device 72 is open is mixed, "Which one?" It may be configured such that "Go well" or the like appears on the third symbol display device 81.

<Modification 3>
In each of the above embodiments, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, "4" or more in the "normal gaming state"), the normal effect mode is switched to the shortened effect mode. Was there. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol reaches a predetermined value, it may be configured to be executed in an extension effect mode in which the time for the variable effect of the special symbol is extended. In this case, the time width for switching from the normal effect mode to the extended effect mode is configured to be related to the drive cycle of the V winning opening 74a. With this configuration, similarly to the case of performing the shortening effect mode, the winning result to the V winning opening 74a can be different depending on whether the V opening jackpot is performed in the normal effect mode or the extended effect mode. it can. Moreover, you may use the holding | maintenance number table 202c by which a normal production mode, a shortening production mode, and an extension production mode can be performed.

<Modification 4>
In each of the above embodiments, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, "4" or more in the "normal gaming state"), the normal effect mode is switched to the shortened effect mode. Was there. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is equal to or larger than the first predetermined value (for example, “2 pieces”), the shortening effect mode is configured to be selected, and the second predetermined number larger than the first predetermined value is selected. The normal effect mode may be selected again when the value becomes equal to or more than the value (for example, “4”).

  Specifically, for example, while performing the variable effect in the normal effect mode, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, which is a situation that is likely to occur as a game situation in the "normal game state", is "1" to "3", When the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "4", it is configured to perform the variable effect in the shortened effect mode. And, the number of reserved balls of special symbols, which is a situation that is unlikely to occur as the game situation in the "normal game state", is "5" to "8", and the variation effect is configured in the normal effect mode. On the other hand, it is easy to get the number of reserved balls of the special symbol by firing the ball by the right-handed game, and by not firing the ball by the right-handed game, you may not get the number of reserved balls for the special game. Or, as the game situation in the "time reduction state", when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol which is a situation that can be selected according to the intention of the player is "1" to "4", the variable production is performed in the normal production mode. , "5" or "6", the variable effect is performed in the shortened effect mode, "7" is changed in the normal effect mode, and "8" is changed in the shortened effect mode again. Constitute. With such a configuration, it becomes easy for the player to control the variation time until the V winning device 72 is opened according to the intention. In particular, in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state" in which any of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be held, in the state in which the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is generated in advance, By acquiring the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol which is preferentially changed, it becomes easy to select whether to execute the variable effect in the normal effect mode or the shortened effect mode according to the player's intention, It is possible to easily obtain the presence / absence of a prize in the V winning opening 74a in the case of a big hit by the player's own operation (the number of starting prizes based on launch).

<Modification 5>
In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, "4" or more in the "normal game state"), one step from the normal effect mode to the shortened effect mode, fluctuation It has been configured to select an effect mode with different times. On the other hand, the variation time (effect mode) of the variable effect may be switchable in a plurality of stages according to the number of reserved balls. Specifically, for example, when the number of reserved balls is "1 or 2", it is shorter than the normal effect mode, when it is "3", it is shorter than the short effect mode, and when it is "4" or more. It is configured such that the ultra-shortening effect mode in which the variable time is selected is selected. With such a configuration, it is possible to enrich the patterns of whether or not a ball wins the V winning opening 74a when a V opening jackpot occurs, enrich the variations of the game, and improve the enjoyment of the game.

<Modification 6>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the opening time and the closing time of the V winning opening 74a have the same opening / closing cycle. On the other hand, the V winning opening 74a may be opened and closed so that the opening time and the closing time of the V winning opening 74a are different from each other.

<Modification 7>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the opening / closing cycle of the V winning opening 74a (that is, opening "10 seconds", closing "10 seconds"), and the shortening of the variation time when the normal rendering mode is changed to the shortened rendering mode (that is, "10 seconds"). On the other hand, the opening / closing cycle of the V winning opening 74a and the shortening of the variation time when the normal effect mode is changed to the shortened effect mode may be different from each other and may be different times. Specifically, for example, the opening / closing cycle of the V winning opening 74a is set to "5 seconds" for opening and "5 seconds" for closing. ". With such a configuration, a variety of games can be enriched and amusement of the game can be improved.

<Modification 8>
In each of the above-described embodiments, in the V opening jackpot, the time from the stop of the variation effect to the opening of the V winning device 72, that is, the opening time is fixedly set to be “10 seconds” at any V opening jackpot. Was there. On the other hand, a plurality of types of opening times for the V opening jackpot may be provided, and a variation may be provided for the time from the stop of the variation effect until the V winning device 72 is opened depending on the type of the V opening jackpot. Good. Specifically, for example, even if the same "7 round V open jackpot", "big hit display" by the main symbol "3" appears on the third symbol display device 81, Different jackpot types are provided depending on whether the opening time is “10 seconds” or “5 seconds”. With such a configuration, it is difficult to grasp the opening timing of the V winning device 72 from the display result of the variation effect, which makes it difficult for the player to grasp the opening timing of the V winning device 72, which is surprising. A game can be realized and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Modification 9>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when the execution lottery of the “V winning chance effect” is won, it is immediately executed regardless of the pending variable effect. On the other hand, if the player wins the execution lottery of the “V winning chance production”, the player immediately stands by without performing the “V winning chance production” and starts the “V winning chance production” when the predetermined condition is satisfied. You may comprise. Specifically, for example, when a player wins an execution lottery for the "V prize chance effect", the "V prize chance" is started from the start of the variable effect immediately before the variation effect won for the "V prize chance effect" execution lottery. It may be configured to execute "production". When the ball is fired based on the "promotion of firing promotion" of the "V winning chance production", and the variation effect that is the shortening effect mode is executed, the number of balls to be reserved of the special symbol at the start of the variation effect that causes the V opening jackpot The shortening effect mode is executed by being "4", and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "4" even at the start of the fluctuation effect executed before the execution of the fluctuation effect that causes the V opening jackpot. Therefore, if the shortening effect mode is executed and the shortening effect mode is executed twice in the variable effect of 2, even if the reserved number of balls is accumulated according to the instruction of “V winning chance effect”, A situation occurs in which the ball cannot win the winning opening 74a. Therefore, since each of the two variable effects is executed in the shortening effect mode, the ball wins the V winning opening 74a even though the shortening effect mode is executed as instructed by the "V winning chance effect". It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event such as not getting.

<Modification 10>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the winning probability of the "V winning chance effect" is changed according to the type of the extracted effect mode. On the other hand, the jackpot probability (probability setting value) of the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the person concerned with the hall can change the setting, and the winning probability of the "V winning chance effect" is changed according to the jackpot probability (probability setting value). It may be configured to do so. With such a configuration, it is possible to change whether or not the ball wins the V winning opening 74a according to the probability setting value, and it is possible to enrich the variations of the game and improve the enjoyment of the game.

<Modification 11>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the normal effect mode and the shortened effect mode can be selected according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol in any game state. On the other hand, in a specific game state, the normal effect mode or the shortened effect mode may not be selected. With such a configuration, it is possible to change whether or not the player can obtain the winning or not of the V winning hole 74a in the jackpot according to the gaming state, and the variation of the game can be enriched. The interest of the game can be improved.

<Modification 12>
In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the V winning jackpot 72 is opened only in one round (that is, the first round) in the V opening jackpot. On the other hand, the V winning jackpot 72 may be opened in a plurality of rounds in the V opening jackpot. With this configuration, it is possible to easily generate the “probability fluctuation state” after the jackpot is over.

<Modification 13>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the maximum winning time in one round of the variable winning device 65 is set to "30 seconds", the maximum winning number in one round is set to "10", and the maximum opening in one round. It was configured so that the maximum number of prizes could be won before the time passed. On the other hand, the variable winning device 65 is set so that the maximum opening time can elapse before the maximum winning number in one round is won, and the execution time required from the start of one jackpot to the end is a fixed time. You may comprise so that it may become. Specifically, for example, the maximum winning number of the variable winning device 65 in one round is set to "10", while the maximum opening time is set to "5 seconds". In the pachinko machine 10, the balls are fired at intervals of "0.6 seconds", so that "10" balls cannot be fired within "5 seconds". Therefore, since it is configured that it is difficult for the maximum winning number of balls to be won before the maximum opening time of the variable winning device 65 in one round, the variable winning device 65 is not closed by the maximum winning number, but the maximum opening time. It is configured to be closed with the progress of. Then, in all rounds, the variable winning device 65 will be closed after the maximum opening time elapses. As a result, the time required from the start to the end of one big jackpot (hereinafter referred to as the “big jackpot”) becomes constant (fixed). In this case, in the pachinko machine 10 to which the "probability variation state" can be given by winning the V winning opening 74a that is opened and closed in a certain cycle, the jackpot in the pending variable effect (hereinafter, referred to as "later jackpot"). ) Occurs, it is possible to know whether or not a ball will be won in the V winning opening 74a in the previous jackpot before the jackpot is started (for example, during the fluctuating effect for deriving the jackpot). At the same time, by knowing the opening timing of the V winning device 72 and the opening timing of the V winning opening 74a in the subsequent jackpot, it becomes possible to know whether or not a ball will be won in the V winning opening 74a in the subsequent jackpot. Therefore, even in the pachinko machine 10 in which the V winning opening 74a is opened and closed at a constant cycle, it is understood that the jackpots occur continuously before the start of the jackpot, and the result is notified and suggested to improve the enjoyment of the game. it can.

<Modification 14>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the pre-reading effects of the “V winning chance effect” and the “holding change notice” are configured to be executed in separate lottery. On the other hand, the lottery of the look-ahead effects of the “V winning chance effect” and the “holding change notice” may be simultaneously performed by the same lottery counter or the like. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of processes and the control load regarding the lottery of the prefetching effect.

<Modification 15>
In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the variation effect of the second special symbol is controlled by the so-called special figure 2 priority variation in which the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed with priority over the variation effect of the first special symbol. On the other hand, the variation effect may be controlled by a so-called prize order variation in which the variation effect is executed in the winning order. With this configuration, as in the special figure 2 priority variation, the ball wins the second starting opening 71 during the execution of the “V winning chance production” based on the variation production of the first special symbol, and the second special It is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the effect content of the "V winning chance effect effect" because the variable effect of the symbol is interrupted and executed (prioritized).

<Modification 16>
In each of the above-described embodiments, in the "normal gaming state" in which the variation effect of the first special symbol is easily executed, the start winning of the second special symbol is configured to be unlikely to occur, and "V prize" based on the variation effect of the first special symbol. While the "chance effect" is being executed, the variable effect of the second special symbol is configured to be interrupted and difficult to be executed. On the other hand, when the start winning of the second special symbol occurs during the execution of the "V winning chance effect" based on the variation effect of the first special symbol, the content of the "V winning chance effect" being executed is corrected. Alternatively, it may be configured to be interrupted (erased). With such a configuration, in the "V winning opportunity effect", there is a disagreement with the effect that the "fire promotion suggestion" is executed even though the ball can be won in the V winning opening 74a even under the current circumstances. Can be prevented.

<Modification 17>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the jackpot lottery is performed using each of the two types of special symbols. On the other hand, it may be configured to perform a jackpot lottery effect with only one type of special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a variation effect of other special symbols from being interrupted during the execution of the "V winning chance effect", and to prevent a discrepancy in the effect content.

<Modification 18>
In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the reserved number table 202c is commonly used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. On the other hand, a separate holding number table may be provided for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the holding number table to be referred to may be changed for each variable effect of each special symbol.

<Modification 19>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the V winning device 72 is configured to be opened based on the winning of the V opening jackpot. On the other hand, in the special symbol lottery, the V winning device 72 may be opened when a small win different from the big win is won. With this configuration, the "probability variation state" is not given because the ball does not win the V winning opening 74a at the time of a big hit, but a large number of balls are paid out, but at the time of a small hit, a large number of balls are not paid out. It is possible to create a game property such as a "probability variation state" being given, to abundant game variations and to improve the enjoyment of the game. Further, it is necessary to open the variable winning device 65 and the V winning device 72 in the big hit by opening the variable winning device 65 in the case of a big hit and opening the V winning device 72 in the case of winning the small hit. Since it is eliminated, the control load at the time of a big hit can be reduced.

<Modification 20>
In each of the above embodiments, a lottery game with one special symbol can be acquired in one launch mode, that is, in the left-handed game, only the lottery game with the first special symbol can be acquired, and in the right-handed game, Only special lottery games with 2 special symbols could be acquired. On the other hand, in one launch mode, a lottery game with a plurality of special symbols may be acquired. Specifically, for example, a distribution unit in which a first starting port and a second starting port are assembled is provided, and the balls that have flowed into the distribution unit are alternately turned into a first starting port or a second starting unit by a distribution device. Configure to distribute to mouth. With this configuration, it is possible to obtain a lottery game of each special symbol in one launch mode, and to obtain the number of reserved balls of the special symbol up to the maximum number of reserved balls of each special symbol, which is 1 special By making it easier to increase the variation range of the total number of reserved balls of the special symbol than the situation in which only the maximum number of reserved balls of the symbol can be obtained, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the enjoyment of the game.

<Modification 21>
In each of the above embodiments, the ball passes through the V-winning device 72 that can give a predetermined profit (prize ball or the like) to the player by winning the ball during the right-handed game, which is advantageous for the player. A V winning opening 74a for generating a "probability fluctuation state" is provided, and a allocating device 73 provided in the V winning device 72 distributes the ball to either the left side path 74 or the right side path 75 and shoots it by a right-handed game. It is configured so that whether or not the played ball wins the V winning opening 74a in the V winning device 72 is different. On the other hand, outside the V winning system 72, a distribution mechanism (for example, a distribution valve, a rotating body, etc., hereinafter the same) that is driven at a constant cycle is provided on the board surface of the game board 13, and the V winning is achieved. Before the prize is awarded to the device 72, the flow-down direction of the ball flowing down the game area may be distributed by the distribution mechanism so as to determine whether or not to win the V prize device 72.

  Specifically, for example, a distribution mechanism is provided above the game board 13 of the V winning device 72 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 3), and the distribution mechanism is provided with a ball in the game area on the left side of the distribution mechanism when viewed from the front. A fixed period (for example, a period equal to or longer than the firing interval of the balls (for example, " 0.6 seconds "or more))). Then, the V winning device 72 is arranged in the game area (downstream route) on the lower right side of the sorting mechanism in the front view, and the balls distributed to the right side of the sorting mechanism in the front view can win the V winning device 72 (( On the other hand, the ball distributed to the left side in the front view of the sorting mechanism cannot be (difficult) to win the V winning device 72. With this configuration, when the ball is continuously shot in the right-handed game, all the balls flowing down the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in front view are won by the V winning device 72 by the distribution mechanism. Whether it is possible to obtain (easy to get) or the situation where all the V prize winning devices 72 cannot be won (difficult to do) by the distribution mechanism can be made different, and whether or not to win the V winning opening 74a by the distribution mechanism. Can be changed to enrich the variety of games and improve the interest of the games. In this case, by notifying whether or not the ball can be won to the V winning device 72 by the "V winning chance effect", it is easy to give the ball to the V winning device 72 and many games are given to the player. It becomes possible to easily add value.

  The winning device in which the balls sorted by the sorting mechanism can win may be a winning device other than the V winning device 72, such as the variable winning device 65, the first starting opening 64, or the second starting device. It may be a mouth 71, a through gate 67, a general winning opening 63, or a small winning exclusive variable winning device that can be opened when a small winning is won. In this case, like the variable winning a prize device 65 and the second starting opening 71, or the small winning dedicated variable award winning device, such as the prize winning devices 65 and 71 having the opening and closing plate that covers the winning a prize, the "V winning chance effect" is used to make a ball. It is possible to make it easier for the player to obtain the game value by informing whether or not the player can win the prize.

<Modification 22>
In each of the above embodiments, the ball passes through the V-winning device 72 that can give a predetermined profit (prize ball or the like) to the player by winning the ball during the right-handed game, which is advantageous for the player. A V winning opening 74a for generating a "probability fluctuation state" is provided, and a allocating device 73 provided in the V winning device 72 distributes the ball to either the left side path 74 or the right side path 75 and shoots it by a right-handed game. It is configured so that whether or not the played ball wins the V winning opening 74a in the V winning device 72 is different. On the other hand, the V winning device 72 is provided at a position where the ball can win during the left-handed game, and it is determined whether or not the ball fired in the left-handed game wins the V winning opening 74a in the V-winning device 72. It may be configured as follows.

  In this case, the ball shot in the left-handed game is divided into a winning possible route that can win the V winning device 72 (easy) and a difficult winning route that cannot win the V winning device 72 (difficult). A distribution mechanism is provided, and before the prize is won in the V winning device 72, the distribution direction of the ball flowing down the game area is distributed by the distribution mechanism, and whether or not to win the V winning device 72 is distributed. You may comprise.

  Specifically, for example, the distribution mechanism is arranged on a stage (not shown) in which a ball that has flowed in from a warp opening (not shown) on the left side of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 3) in front view can be retained. . Then, the distribution mechanism distributes the balls to a winning possible path in which the balls can win the V winning device 72 (easy to win), and a winning possible path distribution state in which the balls are distributed to the V winning apparatus 72 The device 72 is configured so that it can be changed to a prize winning difficult route distribution state in which the ball is assigned to a prize winning difficult route in which the ball cannot win (difficult to win). In addition, the state in which the winning mechanism can distribute the winning route and the difficult route in the winning mechanism are switched at a constant cycle (for example, a cycle equal to or longer than the ball firing interval (for example, "0.6 seconds" or more)). To configure. Then, the ball distributed to the winning possible route by the distribution mechanism is configured so as to be able to win the V winning device 72 (easy), while the ball distributed to the difficult winning route by the distribution mechanism is the V winning device 72. It is configured so that it cannot be won (difficult to do). With this configuration, it is different whether or not the ball, which is shot in the left-handed game and stays on the stage of the center frame 86, can win (easy to win) the V winning device 72 by the sorting mechanism. It is possible to change whether or not to win the V winning opening 74a by the distribution mechanism, to enrich the variations of the game and to improve the interest of the game. In this case, by notifying whether or not the ball can be won to the V winning device 72 by the "V winning chance effect", it is easy to give the ball to the V winning device 72 and many games are given to the player. It becomes possible to easily add value.

  The route through which the balls sorted by the sorting mechanism can flow down may be a route other than the route through which the V winning device 72 can win. For example, the route through which the variable winning device 65 can flow or A path that can flow into the 1st starting opening 64 or the 2nd starting opening 71, a path that can flow into the through gate 67, a path that can flow into the general winning opening 63, or a small winning exclusive variable winning device that can be opened when a small winning is won. It may be a route that can flow into the. In this case, like the variable winning a prize device 65 and the second starting opening 71, or the small winning dedicated variable award winning device, such as the prize winning devices 65 and 71 having the opening and closing plate that covers the winning a prize, the "V winning chance effect" is used to make a ball. It is possible to make it easier for the player to obtain the game value by informing whether or not the player can win the prize.

<Modification 23>
In the above-described embodiment, the "V winning chance effect" is executed until the variation effect which is the target of the "V winning opportunity effect" is won by winning the V opening jackpot. On the other hand, as the end timing of the “V winning chance effect”, from the start of the variable effect that is the target of the “V winning opportunity effect” to the arrival of the first predetermined timing, or the “V winning opportunity effect”. The “V winning chance effect” may be configured to be executed until the second predetermined timing before the target variable effect is started. In this case, as the first predetermined timing, the end timing of the variable element of “high speed fluctuation”, the end timing of the variable element of “low speed fluctuation”, and the “normal reach” of the variable effect targeted for the “V winning chance effect” are set. End timing of variable elements, start timing of variable element of "Super reach" or variable element of "Special reach", or end timing of each "reach display" and start timing of variable element of "re-variation" Etc. are illustrated. Also, as the second predetermined timing, the end of the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" in any of the variable effects that are executed one to three before the variable effect that is the target of the "V winning chance effect". Examples include the timing, the end timing of the "slow fluctuation" variable element, or the start timing of the "normal reach" variable element and the "super reach" or "special reach" variable element. It

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right thing, a 3rd right thing, etc.) that can increase the expected value of a big hit until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. In addition, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated may be implemented.

  In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in the state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that "a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms the identification information is provided, and is caused by the operation of a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, or the like. Take as an example.

  In the slot machine, the ratio of the number of game media paid out by a bonus (character) to the total number of game media (coins, medals) paid out during a predetermined period is the character ratio. Therefore, the number of game media to be paid out when each winning combination is realized is stored in the ROM of the main control device instead of the prize ball number table 202e, and is equivalent to the character ratio managing chip or the character ratio managing chip. In the control device that executes the function, the number of winning combinations (the symbols are aligned on the activated line) established during the non-bonus game period (normal period), the number of winning combinations established during the bonus game period, and established during the AT period. The number of the winning combinations may be counted to manage the character ratio or the continuous character ratio.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or the predetermined By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stopping is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of the medal and the ball.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below. It should be noted that the concept of various inventions shown below is, respectively, a part or a plurality of parts of the structure of another invention, added to the concept of the invention, or a part or a plurality of structures of another concept of the invention. The concept of the invention may be modified and constructed by exchanging the parts.

<Group A: The V winning opening that is opened and closed in a predetermined cycle and the game situation being executed are discriminated, and it is notified whether or not a game ball is won in the V winning opening>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is shot toward a game area provided in a game board, and the game ball enters a ball entrance provided in the game area. Based on the winning or failing lottery, if the winning or losing lottery is won in an advantageous state such as winning, the normally closed variable entrance means is opened so that a predetermined game value is given to the player. Is configured.

  In such a gaming machine, a distribution mechanism for allocating whether or not the game ball flows down to the winning area into which the game ball can flow is arranged, and the game ball distributed by the distribution mechanism flows into the winning area. There is a pachinko machine that generates a gaming value that is advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2017-148264)).

  However, in the above gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The invention of the group A is made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

Launching means for launching a game ball (eg, ball launching unit 112a),
Ball entry means (for example, the first starting port 64) into which the game ball shot by the launch means can enter,
Information acquisition means (for example, S209 of the start winning process (S109)) that acquires predetermined information due to the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering means,
Determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means (for example, MPU 201),
A variable ball entering means (for example, a variable winning device 65) capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball is hard to enter or an inaccessible state and a second state in which a game ball can enter.
Advantageous state means (for example, jackpot processing (S104)) that brings the variable ball entering means into an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot state) by using the determination result of the determination means. In gaming machines,
In the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, a special area through which the game ball can pass (for example, the V winning opening 74a),
Passage switching means (for example, a distribution plate 73a) for switching the special area between a passable state in which the game ball can pass and a passable state in which the game ball cannot pass or cannot pass easily,
Second advantageous state means (for example, probability variation transition flag 203j) capable of generating a second advantageous state (for example, "probability variation state") advantageous to the player when the game ball passes through the special area,
A game ball inflow determination means (for example, a hold variation time integration counter 223g and an execution variation time count counter 223h) that determines the timing at which a game ball can flow into the passage switching means.
Passing determination means for determining whether or not the special area is in the passable state by the passage switching means at the timing when the game balls can flow into the passage switching means determined by the game ball inflow determining means (For example, the sub-V drive timer 223d and the summing counter 223i),
A game characterized by comprising a passage discrimination result notifying means (for example, "shooting promotion suggestion" of "V winning chance effect") for notifying the discrimination result of the passage judging means before the start of the advantageous state. Machine A0.

  According to the gaming machine A0, the game ball is launched by the launching means, and the game ball launched by this launching means is configured to enter the ball entering means, and the game ball enters the ball entering means. Due to this, the information acquisition means acquires the predetermined information. Then, the determining means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquiring means, and the variable entry is changeable between a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or inaccessible and a second state in which the game ball is enterable. The ball means is provided, and by using the determination result by the determination means, the advantageous state means brings the variable ball entering means into the advantageous state in which it can be brought into the second state. Here, in the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, the game ball is configured to be able to pass to the special area, and the passage switching means allows the game ball to pass through the special area and the game ball is difficult to pass or It is switched to a difficult-to-pass state where it cannot pass. Further, when the game ball passes through the special area, the second advantageous state means can generate the second advantageous state advantageous to the player. Here, the game ball inflow determination means determines the timing at which the game ball can flow into the passage switching means, and the passage determination means determines the timing at which the game ball can flow into the passage switching means determined by the game ball inflow means. The passage switching means determines whether or not the special area is in the passable state. Then, the passage determination result notifying means notifies the determination result of the passage determining means before the start of the advantageous state. That is, before the advantageous state is started, the advantageous state is determined by determining the timing at which the game ball can flow into the passage switching means and whether or not the ball can pass through the special area by the passage switching means at that timing. In, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball can pass through the special area, and notify the player of the determination result before the advantageous state is started. Thereby, by notifying whether or not the game ball passes through the special area before starting the advantageous state, the player can recognize whether or not the second advantageous state can occur during the advantageous state. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machine A0,
The passage switching means,
The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the passable state and the passable state of the special area are switched at a fixed cycle (for example, "10 seconds") that is not linked with the timing of deriving the determination result by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine A1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A0, the following effects are produced. That is, the passage switching unit switches between the passable state and the passage difficult state in the special area in a fixed cycle that is not linked to the timing of deriving the determination result by the determination unit. That is, whether or not the game ball can pass to the special area is switched at a fixed cycle that does not interlock with the occurrence of an advantageous state that can occur by using the determination result of the determination means, and the game ball inflow means causes the passage switching means to pass. The timing at which the game ball can flow in is determined.

  Conventionally, when the passage possible timing of the special area is configured not to be linked with the timing of deriving the determination result by the determination unit, the advantageous state generation timing using the determination result by the determination unit that can generate the advantageous state and the second advantage Since whether or not the game ball can pass through the special area that can generate the state is not linked, even if the advantageous state is generated by the determination result by the determination means, the second advantageous state is generated in the advantageous state. Whether or not to obtain it could not be notified according to the determination result of the determination means.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine A1, the game ball can pass through the special area that can be switched at a constant cycle without interlocking with the timing of deriving the determination result by the determination unit at the timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching unit. It is possible to determine whether or not the game ball is able to pass through the special area in the advantageous state and notify the player of the determination result before the advantageous state is started. . Thereby, by notifying whether or not the game ball passes through the special area before starting the advantageous state, the player can recognize whether or not the second advantageous state can occur during the advantageous state. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machine A0 or A1,
The second variable ball entering means (for example, the V winning device 72) that has the special area and can be changed to a third state in which the game ball is difficult or inaccessible and a fourth state in which the game ball can enter When,
By using the determination result by the determination means, in the advantageous state, the second variable ball entering state changing means (for example, the V winning device opening / closing plate 72a) that can bring the second variable ball entering means into the fourth state. ,,
The passage determination means,
When the second variable ball entering state changing unit is in the fourth state by the second variable ball entering state changing unit, the passage switching unit determines whether or not the special area is in the passable state. A gaming machine A2 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A0 or A1. That is, the second variable ball entering means is provided which has a special area and is changeable between a third state in which the game ball is hard to enter or inaccessible and a fourth state in which the game ball can enter, and which is determined by the determining means. By using the determination result, the second variable ball entry state changing means can set the second variable ball entry state to the fourth state in the advantageous state. Whether the special area is in the passable state by the passage switching unit when the second variable ball entering state changing unit puts the second variable ball entering unit in the fourth state by the passage judging unit To be determined. That is, when the second variable ball entering means is in the fourth state in which the game ball can enter using the determination result of the determining means, the special area provided in the second variable ball entering means is the game ball. It is possible to determine whether or not the vehicle is in a passable state, and to notify the player of the determination result before the advantageous state is started. Thereby, by notifying whether or not the game ball passes through the special area before starting the advantageous state, the player can recognize whether or not the second advantageous state can occur during the advantageous state. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machine A2,
The game ball inflow determination means,
Period determining means (for example, pending variation time integration counter 223g and execution variation time counting counter 223h) for determining the period until the second variable ball entering means becomes the fourth state,
The passage determination means,
A gaming machine A3, which determines whether or not the special area is in the passable state when the period is determined by the period determining means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced, that is, the period determining means provided in the game ball inflow determining means brings the second variable ball entering means into the fourth state. Is determined. Then, the passage determination means determines whether or not the special area is in the passable state when the period determined by the period determination means has elapsed. Thereby, by notifying whether or not the game ball passes through the special area before starting the advantageous state, the player can recognize whether or not the second advantageous state can occur during the advantageous state. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machine A3,
By using the determination result by the determination unit, a dynamic display execution unit (for example, the display control device 114) that executes the dynamic display of the identification information performed on the display unit (for example, the third symbol display device 81). ,
A storage unit (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d) that stores the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
In the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, an introduction effect execution means (for example, an opening command) that executes an introduction effect (for example, an opening effect) until the second variable ball entering means is brought into the fourth state. Prepare,
The period determination means,
The remaining time of the dynamic display that is being executed by the dynamic display executing means, the execution time of the dynamic display that is waiting based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and the introduction effect executing means A gaming machine A4 characterized by determining the execution time of the introduction effect.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A3, the following effect is produced, that is, by using the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means causes the identification information to be displayed on the display means. Dynamic display is executed. Further, the storage means stores the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Further, in the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, the introduction effect execution means executes the introduction effect until the second variable ball entering means is brought into the fourth state. Here, the remaining time of the dynamic display which is being executed by the dynamic display executing means, the execution time of the dynamic display which is waiting based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and the introduction effect execution by the introduction effect executing means The time is discriminated by the period discriminating means. That is, the remaining time of the dynamic display that is being executed, the stored execution time of the dynamic display that is being stored, and the introduction effect that is executed until the second variable ball entering means in the advantageous state becomes the fourth state. The execution time is discriminated and it is discriminated whether or not the special area is in the passable state at the timing when the second variable ball entering means is in the fourth state. As a result, it becomes possible to inform whether or not the game ball passes through the special area during the execution of the dynamic display, and the player can generate the second advantageous state during the advantageous state before starting the advantageous state. There is an effect that it is possible to recognize whether or not the game can be played and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine A4,
A game characterized by comprising period changing means (for example, changing from a normal effect mode to a shortened effect mode) for changing a predetermined period until the second variable ball entering means is in the fourth state. Machine A5.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A4, the following effect is produced, that is, the period changing means changes the predetermined period until the second variable ball entering means becomes the fourth state. .. As a result, the passage determination result notifying unit notifies the determination result of whether or not the game ball passes through the special area before the start of the advantageous state, and then the predetermined value until the second variable ball entering unit becomes the fourth state. By arranging that the period can be changed, there is an effect that a variety of games can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machine A5,
The period changing means,
When the number of the predetermined information stored in the storage means is a predetermined first predetermined value (for example, “4”), the dynamic display executed when the number is less than the first predetermined value. A gaming machine A6 characterized by comprising shortening execution means (for example, a "normal reach (shortening)" effect mode) for shortening and executing the dynamic display execution time.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the number of the predetermined information stored in the storage means is the predetermined first predetermined value, the dynamic execution is performed by the shortening execution means provided in the period changing means when it is less than the first predetermined value. The execution time of the dynamic display is shorter than that of the display. This makes it possible to change the period until the second variable ball entering means is brought into the fourth state, according to the number of stored predetermined information. Therefore, after the result of the determination of whether or not the game ball passes through the special area before the start of the advantageous state is notified by the passage determination result notification means, the player shoots the game ball, whereby the second variable ball is entered. By configuring the period until the means becomes the fourth state to be changeable according to the game mode (launch mode) of the player, there is an effect that the variety of games can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

<Group B: Varying time is changed according to the number of reserved balls, and whether the ball is won in the V winning opening when the fluctuating time is changed>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is shot toward a game area provided in a game board, and the game ball enters a ball entrance provided in the game area. Based on the winning or failing lottery, if the winning or losing lottery is won in an advantageous state such as winning, the normally closed variable entrance means is opened so that a predetermined game value is given to the player. Is configured.

  In such a gaming machine, a distribution mechanism for allocating whether or not the game ball flows down to the winning area into which the game ball can flow is arranged, and the game ball distributed by the distribution mechanism flows into the winning area. There is a pachinko machine that generates a gaming value that is advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2017-148264)).

  However, in the above gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The invention of the group B is made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

Launching means for launching a game ball (eg, ball launching unit 112a),
Ball entry means (for example, the first starting port 64) into which the game ball shot by the launch means can enter,
Information acquisition means (for example, S209 of the start winning process (S109)) that acquires predetermined information due to the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering means,
Determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means (for example, MPU 201),
By using the determination result by the determination unit, a dynamic display execution unit (for example, the display control device 114) that executes the dynamic display of the identification information performed on the display unit (for example, the third symbol display device 81). ,
A memory for storing the predetermined information with a predetermined number as an upper limit when the predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means while the dynamic display is being executed on the display means by the dynamic display execution means. Means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d),
When the number of the predetermined information stored in the storage unit is a predetermined first predetermined value (for example, “4”), the dynamic display that is easily selected when the number is less than the first predetermined value. Selection changing means (for example, a "normal reach (shortening)" effect mode) for easily selecting a second execution time different from the first execution time;
A variable ball entering means (for example, a variable winning device 65) capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball is hard to enter or an inaccessible state and a second state in which a game ball can enter.
When a predetermined display result (for example, "big hit display") appears in the dynamic display, an advantageous state means (for example, big hit state) that brings the variable ball entering means into the second state (e.g., big hit state). For example, in a gaming machine provided with jackpot processing (S104),
In the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, a special area through which the game ball can pass (for example, the V winning opening 74a),
Passage switching means (for example, a distribution plate 73a) for switching the special area between a passable state in which the game ball can pass and a passable state in which the game ball cannot pass or cannot pass easily,
Second advantageous state means (for example, probability change transition flag 203j) that can generate a second advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, "probability variation state") when the game ball passes through the special area, Prepare,
When the second execution time of the dynamic display is selected by the selection changing means, compared to when the first execution time of the dynamic display is selected, passage of the game ball to the special area The result changes (for example, when the normal effect mode is changed to the shortened effect mode, the V winning opening 74a is won)
A gaming machine B0 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine B0, the game ball is launched by the launching means, the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to enter the ball entering means, and the game ball enters the ball entering means. Due to this, the information acquisition means acquires the predetermined information. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information performed by the display means by using the determination result by the determination means. To be done. Further, when the dynamic display is being executed on the display means by the dynamic display execution means, when the predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means, the storage means stores the predetermined information with a predetermined number as an upper limit. . When the number of pieces of the predetermined information stored in the storage means is a predetermined first predetermined value, the selection changing means sets the first execution time of the dynamic display that is easily selected when the number is less than the first predetermined value. This makes it easy to select different second execution times. Furthermore, a variable ball entrance means is provided which can change between a first state in which the game ball is hard to enter or inaccessible and a second state in which the game ball can enter, and a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display. In this case, the advantageous state means brings the variable ball entering means into the advantageous state in which it can be brought into the second state. Here, in the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, the game ball is configured to be able to pass to the special area, and the passage switching means allows the game ball to pass through the special area and the game ball is difficult to pass or It is switched to a difficult-to-pass state where it cannot pass. Further, when the game ball passes through the special area, the second advantageous state means can generate the second advantageous state advantageous to the player. Then, when the second execution time of the dynamic display is selected by the selection changing means, the passage result of the game ball to the special area changes as compared with when the first execution time of the dynamic display is selected. . Thereby, the passing result of the game ball to the special area can be changed depending on whether the execution time of the dynamic display is executed in the first execution time or the second execution time, Whether or not the second advantageous state occurs can be changed according to the number of the predetermined information stored in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be abundant and the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machine B0,
The passage switching means,
Switching between the passable state and the difficult-to-pass state of the special area in a fixed period (for example, “10 seconds”) that is not linked to the execution of the dynamic display,
The certain period,
A game machine B1 characterized in that the difference between the first execution time and the second execution time is the same.

  The gaming machine B1 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B0. That is, the passage switching means switches between the passage possible state and the passage difficult state of the special area in a fixed period that is not linked to the execution of the dynamic display. Then, the fixed period and the difference between the first execution time and the second execution time are made the same. That is, depending on whether the execution time of the dynamic display is the first execution time or the second execution time, it is possible to change whether the special area is in the passable state or the passable state. As a result, the result of passing the game ball to the special area can be changed according to the execution time of the dynamic display, the variations of the game can be abundant, and the interest of the game can be improved. .

In the gaming machine B0 or B1,
The second variable ball entering means (for example, the V winning device 72) that has the special area and can be changed to a third state in which the game ball is difficult or inaccessible and a fourth state in which the game ball can enter When,
By using the determination result by the determination means, in the advantageous state, the second variable ball entering state changing means (for example, the V winning device opening / closing plate 72a) that can bring the second variable ball entering means into the fourth state. ,
The remaining time of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means, the execution time of the dynamic display based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and the second variable entrance in the advantageous state. Time counting means (for example, pending variation time integration counter 223g and execution variation time counting counter 223h) that counts the first state time until the means becomes the fourth state,
When the remaining time counted by the time counting means, the execution time, and the first state time have elapsed, passage determining means (for example, a summing counter) that determines whether the special area is in the passable state or not. 223i),
A gaming machine B2, comprising: a passage determination result notifying unit (for example, "a launch promotion suggestion" of "V winning opportunity effect") for notifying a determination result of the passage determining unit.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B0 or B1, the following effects are produced. That is, the second variable ball entering means is provided which has a special area and is changeable between a third state in which the game ball is hard to enter or inaccessible and a fourth state in which the game ball can enter, and which is determined by the determining means. By using the determination result, the second variable ball entry state changing means can set the second variable ball entry state to the fourth state in the advantageous state. Here, the remaining time of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means, the execution time of the dynamic display based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and the second variable ball entrance means in the fourth state in the advantageous state. The first state period until the state is reached is counted by the time counting means. Further, when the remaining time counted by the time counting means, the execution time, and the first state time have elapsed, the passage determining means determines whether or not the special area is in the passable state. Then, the passage determination result notifying unit notifies the determination result of the passage determining unit. This makes it possible to accurately determine whether or not the game ball can pass through the special area at the timing when the game ball can enter the second variable ball entering means having the special area. The determination result can be notified. With this, by accurately informing whether or not the game ball passes through the special area, the player can recognize whether or not the second advantageous state can occur, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. The effect is that you can.

In gaming machine B2,
The selection changing means,
At least the gaming machine B3, wherein the second execution time can be selected in the dynamic display capable of setting the second variable ball entering means to the fourth state.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the following effects are produced. That is, at least the second execution time can be selected by the selection changing means in the dynamic display in which the second variable ball entering means can be in the fourth state. As a result, the second variable ball entering means can be set to the fourth state depending on whether the first execution time or the second execution time is selected as the dynamic display execution time. There is an effect that the passing result of the game ball to the special area provided in the ball entering means can be configured to be variable, the variations of the game can be enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines B0 to B3,
The gaming machine B4, wherein the second execution time is shorter than the first execution time.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B0 to B3. That is, the second execution time is shorter than the first execution time. As a result, the result of passing the game ball to the special area can be changed depending on whether or not the execution time of the dynamic display is short, the variations of the game can be enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved. There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines B0 to B3,
A game machine B5, wherein the second execution time is longer than the first execution time.

  According to the gaming machine B5, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B0 to B3. That is, the second execution time is longer than the first execution time. As a result, the result of passage of the game ball to the special area can be changed depending on whether the execution time of the dynamic display is long, the variations of the game can be enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved. , Is effective.

In any of the gaming machines B0 to B5,
The passage determination result notification means,
A gaming machine B6, which is provided with an advance notification means (for example, "a launch promotion suggestion" of a "V winning chance effect") that notifies the determination result of the passage determination means before the start of the advantageous state.

  According to the gaming machine B6, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B0 to B5. That is, the determination result of the passage determination means is notified by the advance notification means provided in the passage determination result notification means before the start of the advantageous state. Thereby, by notifying whether or not the game ball passes through the special area before starting the advantageous state, the player can recognize whether or not the second advantageous state can occur during the advantageous state. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Group C: Suggests launch mode>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is shot toward a game area provided in a game board, and the game ball enters a ball entrance provided in the game area. Based on the winning or failing lottery, if the winning or losing lottery is won in an advantageous state such as winning, the normally closed variable entrance means is opened so that a predetermined game value is given to the player. Is configured.

  In such a gaming machine, a distribution mechanism for allocating whether or not the game ball flows down to the winning area into which the game ball can flow is arranged, and the game ball distributed by the distribution mechanism flows into the winning area. There is a pachinko machine that generates a gaming value that is advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2017-148264)).

  However, in the above gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The invention of the group C is made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

Launching means for launching a game ball (eg, ball launching unit 112a),
Ball entry means (for example, the first starting port 64) into which the game ball shot by the launch means can enter,
Information acquisition means (for example, S209 of the start winning process (S109)) that acquires predetermined information due to the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering means,
Determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means (for example, MPU 201),
A game machine provided with an advantageous state means (for example, a big hit process (S104)) for making an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit state) by using the determination result by the determination means,
In the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, a special area through which the game ball can pass (for example, the V winning opening 74a),
Passage switching means (for example, a distribution plate 73a) for switching the special area between a passable state in which the game ball can pass and a passable state in which the game ball cannot pass or cannot pass easily,
Second advantageous state means (for example, probability variation transition flag 203j) capable of generating a second advantageous state (for example, "probability variation state") advantageous to the player when the game ball passes through the special area,
A game ball inflow determination means (for example, a hold variation time integration counter 223g and an execution variation time count counter 223h) that determines the timing at which a game ball can flow into the passage switching means.
Passing determination means for determining whether or not the game ball shot by the launching means passes through the special area at the timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching means determined by the game ball inflow determining means (For example, a sum counter 223i),
Based on the determination result of the passage determination means, a launch mode notification means (for example, "a launch promotion suggestion" of the "V winning chance effect") that notifies the launch mode of the game ball that can pass through the special area, A gaming machine C0 characterized by being provided.

  According to the gaming machine C0, the game ball is launched by the launching means, the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to enter the ball entering means, and the game ball enters the ball entering means. Due to this, the information acquisition means acquires the predetermined information. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the advantageous state means makes the game state advantageous to the player by using the determination result by the determination means. Here, in the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, the game ball is configured to be able to pass to the special area, and the passage switching means allows the game ball to pass through the special area and the game ball is difficult to pass or It is switched to a difficult-to-pass state where it cannot pass. Further, when the game ball passes through the special area, the second advantageous state means can generate the second advantageous state advantageous to the player. Here, the game ball inflow means determines the timing at which the game ball can flow into the passage switching means, and the passage determination means allows the game ball to flow into the passage switching means determined by the game ball inflow determination means. At the timing, it is determined whether or not the game ball shot by the launching means passes through the special area. Then, based on the discrimination result of the passage discriminating means, the firing manner informing means informs the firing manner of the game ball which can pass through the special area. As a result, the result of passing the game ball to the special area can be changed according to whether or not the launch mode of the game ball that can pass the special area is notified, and the variation of the game is enriched. There is an effect that the interest of can be improved.

In gaming machine C0,
The game ball inflow determination means,
A time counting means (for example, a holding variation time integration counter 223g and an execution variation time counting counter 223h) for counting the time until the game ball can flow into the passage switching means,
The passage determination means,
A gaming machine C1 characterized by determining whether or not a game ball passes through the special area based on a counting result by the time counting means.

  The gaming machine C1 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C0. That is, the time counting means counts the time until the timing at which the game ball can flow into the passage switching means. Then, the passage discriminating unit discriminates whether or not the game ball passes through the special area based on the counting result of the time counting unit. Thereby, based on the time until the game ball flows into the passage switching means and whether or not the game ball can pass the special area, the launch mode of the game ball that can pass through the special area is determined. Be informed. The result of passing the game ball to the special area can be changed according to whether or not the launch mode is notified, so that the variety of games can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved. effective.

In gaming machine C1,
By using the determination result by the determination unit, a dynamic display execution unit (for example, the display control device 114) that executes the dynamic display of the identification information performed on the display unit (for example, the third symbol display device 81). ,
When the dynamic display is being performed on the display means by the dynamic display executing means, when the predetermined information is obtained by the information obtaining means, the information is obtained by the information obtaining means with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Storage means for storing the predetermined information (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d),
When the number of the predetermined information stored in the storage unit is a predetermined first predetermined value (for example, “4”), the dynamic display that is easily selected when the number is less than the first predetermined value. A gaming machine C2, characterized by comprising selection changing means (for example, a "normal reach (shortening)" effect mode) for easily selecting a second execution time different from the first execution time.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C0 or C1, the following effects are produced. That is, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means by using the determination result by the determination means. Further, when the dynamic display is being executed on the display means by the dynamic display execution means, when the predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means, the storage means acquires the predetermined information up to a predetermined number by the information acquisition means. Predetermined information is stored. When the number of pieces of the predetermined information stored in the storage means is a predetermined first predetermined value, the selection changing means sets the first execution time of the dynamic display that is easily selected when the number is less than the first predetermined value. This makes it easy to select different second execution times. That is, by changing the start time of the advantageous state depending on whether the execution time of the dynamic display is the first execution time or the second execution time, the passable state or the passage-prohibited state of the special region in the advantageous state is changed. obtain. Thereby, the passing result of the game ball to the special area can be changed depending on whether the execution time of the dynamic display is executed in the first execution time or the second execution time, Whether or not the second advantageous state occurs can be changed according to the number of the predetermined information stored in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be abundant and the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machine C2,
The firing mode notification means,
When the game ball inflow determination means determines that the game ball does not pass through the special area at the timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching means, a launch instruction means for instructing the launch of the game ball (for example, "Promotion of launch promotion"), and a gaming machine C3.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced. That is, when it is determined by the game ball inflow determination means that the game ball does not pass through the special area at the timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching means, the game is instructed by the firing instruction means provided in the firing mode notifying means. It is instructed to launch a ball. That is, when it is determined that the game ball does not pass through the special area at the timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching unit, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball and the predetermined information stored in the storage unit is stored. The execution time of the dynamic display can be changed by setting the number of to a predetermined first predetermined value. Thereby, even if the passage of the game ball to the special area in the advantageous state is difficult to pass, the dynamic display is stored by the first predetermined value or more and the execution time of the dynamic display is changed. , The game ball can be passed to the special area. Therefore, by following the instruction to fire the game ball by the firing instruction means, it is possible to change the result of passing the game ball to the special area, enrich the variety of games, and improve the interest of the game. There is.

In gaming machine C2,
The firing mode notification means,
When the game ball inflow determining means determines that the game ball passes through the special area at the timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching means, a firing stop instruction means (instruction to stop the firing of the game ball) ( For example, the game machine C4 is provided with "fire stop suggestion").

  According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2. That is, when it is determined by the game ball inflow determination means that the game ball passes through the special area at the timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching means, the game is stopped by the firing stop instruction means provided in the firing mode informing means. It is instructed to stop firing the ball. That is, when it is determined that the game ball passes through the special area at a timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching means, the player is instructed to stop the firing of the game ball, and the predetermined value is stored in the storage means. By preventing the number of pieces of information from reaching the predetermined first predetermined value, it is possible to prevent the execution time of dynamic display from being changed. Thus, if the passage of the game ball to the special area in the advantageous state was in the passable state at the beginning, by maintaining that state, the game ball can be passed to the special area. Therefore, by following the instruction to stop the shooting of the game ball by the shooting stop instruction means, it is possible to pass the game ball to the special area, enrich the variations of the game, and improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine C2,
The firing mode notification means,
When it is determined by the game ball inflow determining means that the game ball can and cannot pass through the special area at the timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching means, the game ball is launched A gaming machine C5 characterized by not giving an instruction regarding.

  According to the gaming machine C5, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2. That is, when it is determined by the game ball inflow determination means that the game balls can and cannot pass through the special area at the timing when the game balls can flow into the passage switching means, the launch mode notification means , Is configured not to give an instruction regarding the launch of a game ball. With this, when the passage of the game ball to the special area in the game state is not clear, by letting the player decide whether to shoot or stop the shooting, the variation of the game is enriched and the enjoyment of the game is improved. The effect is that it can be achieved.

In gaming machine C2,
The firing mode notification means,
When it is determined by the game ball inflow determining means that the game ball can and cannot pass through the special area at the timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching means, the game ball is launched A gaming machine C6, which is provided with a launch ambiguity indicating means that does not clearly indicate a mode.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced. That is, when it is determined by the game ball inflow determining means that the game ball can and cannot pass through the special area at the timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching means, the launch mode informing means is notified. It is configured such that the launch ambiguity indicating means provided does not clearly indicate the launch mode of the game ball. Specifically, for example, an interpretable instruction is notified to both the firing instruction and the firing stop. With this, when the passage of the game ball to the special area in the game state is not clear, by letting the player decide whether to shoot or stop the shooting, the variation of the game is enriched and the enjoyment of the game is improved. The effect is that it can be achieved.

  It should be noted that "not clearly suggesting" means, for example, instructing both the firing suggestion and the firing stop with speculable contents, or instructing both the firing suggestion and the firing stop with unguessable or difficult contents. For example, a case in which the suggestion of firing and the stop of firing are simultaneously displayed and instructed are exemplified.

In gaming machine C3,
The firing mode notification means,
A gaming machine C7 characterized by instructing the launch of a game ball by the launch instructing means even when the advantageous state is not obtained by the determination result by the determining means.

  According to the gaming machine C7, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3. That is, even if the determination result by the determination unit does not result in an advantageous state, the launch instruction unit provided in the launch mode notification unit instructs the launch of the game ball. As a result, even if the advantageous state is not achieved, there is an effect that it is possible to instruct the player to shoot a game ball and improve the operation of the gaming machine.

<Group D: Special 1 Special 2, Time-lapse production in a plurality of consecutive first dynamic displays, and dynamic display of special figure 2 is prevented from being interrupted during execution of time-lapse production>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is shot toward a game area provided in a game board, and the game ball enters a ball entrance provided in the game area. Based on the winning or failing lottery, when the winning or losing lottery wins an advantageous state such as a win, the normally closed variable entrance means is opened so that a predetermined game value is given to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148264).

  However, in the above gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The invention of the group D is made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

Launching means for launching a game ball (eg, ball launching unit 112a),
First ball entering means (for example, first starting opening 64) into which the game ball fired by the launching means can enter,
First information acquisition means (for example, start-up) for acquiring at least the first information (the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means. S209) of the winning process (S109),
A first storage unit (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d) that stores the first information acquired by the first information acquisition unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
A game ball launched by the launching device can enter, and a second ball entering device (for example, a second starting port 71) different from the first ball entering device,
Second information acquisition means (for example, start-up) that acquires at least second information (the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b2) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means. S209) of the winning process (S109),
A second storage means (for example, a second reserved ball storage area 203e) for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
Determination means for determining the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means or the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means (for example, MPU 201),
By using the determination result by the determination unit, a dynamic display execution unit (for example, the display control device 114) that executes the dynamic display of the identification information performed on the display unit (for example, the third symbol display device 81). ,
Advantageous state means (for example, jackpot processing (S104)) that brings an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, jackpot state) when a predetermined display result (for example, "jackpot display") appears in the dynamic display. ), And in a gaming machine equipped with
The dynamic display execution means,
A first dynamic display execution means for executing a first dynamic display (for example, a dynamic display of a first special symbol) based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means,
A second dynamic display execution means for executing a second dynamic display (for example, a dynamic display of a second special symbol) based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means,
The first dynamic display execution means,
In a plurality of consecutive first dynamic displays, a time passage effect that suggests the passage of time until a predetermined timing in any one of the first dynamic displays (for example, "remaining time display" of "V winning chance effect"). A time lapse effect executing means for executing
When the time lapse effect is executed by the time lapse effect executing means, it becomes difficult or impossible to execute the second dynamic display by the second dynamic display executing means (for example, in the "normal game state"). (It is difficult to set the winning in the second starting port 71, or in the left-handed game, only the first starting port 64 can win the prize, and in the right-handed game, only the second starting port 71 can win the prize)
A gaming machine D0 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine D0, the game ball is launched by the launching means, and the game ball launched by this launching means is configured to enter the first ball entering means, and the game ball enters the first ball entering means. At least the first information is acquired by the first information acquisition means based on the fact that the ball is hit. Then, with the predetermined number as the upper limit, the first storage unit stores the first information acquired by the first acquisition information unit. Further, the game ball shot by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the second ball entering means, and based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, at least by the second information acquiring means. The second information is acquired. Then, with the predetermined number as the upper limit, the second storage unit stores the second information acquired by the second acquisition information unit. Then, the determining unit determines the first information acquired by the first information acquiring unit or the second information acquired by the second information acquiring unit, and the determination result by the determining unit is used to dynamically The display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. When a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display, the advantageous state means brings an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Here, the first dynamic display execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means executes the first dynamic display based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means, and also the dynamic display execution means. The second dynamic display execution means provided in the above executes the second dynamic display based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means. Then, by the time passage effect execution means provided in the first dynamic display execution means, a time passage indicating a time passage until a predetermined timing in any one of the first dynamic displays in the plurality of continuous first dynamic displays. The performance is executed. Here, when the time passage effect is executed by the time passage effect executing means, it is difficult or impossible to execute the second dynamic display by the second dynamic display executing means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second dynamic display from being interrupted and executed during the time passage effect that is executed so as to extend over the plurality of first dynamic displays, and there is a discrepancy in the effect contents of the time passage effect. It can be prevented from occurring. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to execute an accurate production and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D0,
The firing means is
First launch mode means (for example, left-handed game) that launches a game ball in a predetermined first launch mode,
A second firing mode means (for example, a right-handed game) for firing a game ball in a second firing mode different from the first firing mode by the first firing mode means,
It is configured to be able to enter the first ball entering means in the first launch mode by the first launch mode means, while being difficult or impossible to enter the ball in the second launch mode by the second launch mode means. Along with
While being configured to be able to enter the second ball entering means in the second launch mode by the second launch mode means, it is difficult or impossible to enter the ball in the first launch mode by the first launch mode means. A gaming machine D1 characterized by being configured.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D0. That is, a game ball is launched in a predetermined first launch mode by the first launch mode means provided in the launch means, and a second launch mode different from the first launch mode by the second launch mode means also provided in the launch means. A game ball is fired in a firing manner. Then, while being configured to be able to enter the first ball entering means in the first launching mode by the first launching mode means, it is configured to be difficult or impossible to enter in the second launching mode by the second launching mode means. It Further, while it is configured to be able to enter the second ball entering means in the second launch mode by the second launch mode means, it is configured to be difficult or impossible to enter in the first launch mode by the first launch mode means. It As a result, during the time course effect that can be executed when the game is being performed in the first firing mode, the second dynamic display is configured to be difficult to execute or added in the first firing mode, and the second dynamic display is configured to be added during the time course effect. (2) It is possible to prevent the dynamic display from being interrupted and executed, and to prevent a discrepancy in the effect contents of the time-lapse effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to execute an accurate production and improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine D0 or D1,
With respect to the second ball entering means, movable means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball is hard to enter or inaccessible and a second state in which a game ball can enter (for example, an ordinary electric officer 71a), Equipped with
In a predetermined first game state (for example, "normal game state"), while making the movable means difficult to be in the second state,
A game machine D2 characterized in that, in a second game state different from the first game state (for example, a "probability variation state"), the movable means is more easily set to the second state than the first game state.

  According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine D0 or D1, the following effect is produced. That is, the movable means is configured to be able to change between the first state in which the game ball is difficult or unable to enter the second ball entering means and the second state in which the game ball is enterable. Then, in the predetermined first gaming state, the movable means is configured to be difficult to be in the second state, while in the second gaming state different from the first gaming state, the movable means is more likely to be in the second state than in the first gaming state. To be done. As a result, at least in the first gaming state, it is possible to prevent the second dynamic display from being interrupted and executed during the time passage effect that is executed so as to straddle the plurality of first dynamic displays. It is possible to prevent discrepancies in the production contents of the production. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to execute an accurate production and improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D2,
The time passage effect executing means,
The time passage effect is executed so as to straddle the preceding first dynamic display executed first and the following first dynamic display executed after the preceding first dynamic display,
The predetermined timing is
The gaming machine D3, which is at any timing relating to the subsequent first dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D0 to D2, the following effects are produced. That is, the time-lapse effect is generated by the time-lapse effect executing means so as to extend over the preceding first dynamic display executed first and the following first dynamic display executed after the preceding first dynamic display. The predetermined timing is executed, and the predetermined timing is set to any timing related to the subsequent first dynamic display. As a result, during the time-lapse effect that is executed until the predetermined timing of the leading first dynamic display and the trailing first dynamic display, the leading first dynamic display and the trailing first dynamic display are displayed. It is possible to prevent the second dynamic display from being interrupted and executed, and it is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the effect contents of the time-lapse effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to execute an accurate production and improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D3,
The dynamic display execution means,
When the first information is stored in the first storage unit and the second information is stored in the second storage unit, the first dynamic display or the second motion is stored in the stored order. A gaming machine D4, characterized in that the gaming machine D4 is provided with a generation order execution means (for example, a variation in winning order) for executing a dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D0 to D3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first information is stored in the first storage means and the second information is stored in the second storage means, it is stored by the generation order execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means. The first dynamic display or the second dynamic display is executed in this order. As a result, when the plurality of first information are stored in advance and the time-lapse effect is being executed based on the execution on the first dynamic display based on the first information, the second dynamic display interrupts. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent discrepancies from occurring in the effect contents of the time-lapse effect based on the execution of the plurality of first dynamic displays, and it is possible to execute the appropriate effect and improve the interest of the game. There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D3,
The dynamic display execution means,
When the first information is stored in the first storage means and the second information is stored in the second storage means, the second information stored in the second storage means is stored in the second storage means. Priority execution means for executing the second dynamic display based on the first dynamic display based on the first information stored in the first storage means with priority (for example, special figure 2 priority variation). ,,
The time passage effect executing means,
When the second information acquisition unit acquires the second information during the execution of the time-lapse effect, an effect discontinuation unit that interrupts or cancels the time-lapse effect that is being executed is provided. Gaming machine D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D0 to D3. That is, when the first information is stored in the first storage means and the second information is stored in the second storage means, the second storage is performed by the priority execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means. The second dynamic display based on the second information stored in the means is executed with priority over the first dynamic display based on the first information stored in the first storage means. Then, when the second information is acquired by the second information acquisition means during execution of the time-lapse effect, the effect time-off effect provided in the time-effect effect execution means interrupts or cancels the time-effect effect being executed. It As a result, even if the execution of the second dynamic display is executed with priority over the execution of the first dynamic display, by suspending or canceling the time-lapse production being executed, the second dynamic display is executed. It is possible to prevent the production contents from being inconsistent such that the time-lapse production is executed during the execution of the display. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to execute an accurate production and improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D5,
In the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, a special area through which the game ball can pass (for example, the V winning opening 74a),
Passage switching means (for example, a distribution plate 73a) for switching the special area between a passable state in which the game ball can pass and a passable state in which the game ball cannot pass or cannot pass easily,
Second advantageous state means (for example, probability variation transition flag 203j) capable of generating a second advantageous state (for example, "probability variation state") advantageous to the player when the game ball passes through the special area,
A game ball inflow determination means (for example, a hold variation time integration counter 223g and an execution variation time count counter 223h) that determines the timing at which a game ball can flow into the passage switching means.
At the timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching means determined by the game ball inflow means, the passage determining means determines whether or not the special area is in the passable state by the passage switching means ( For example, the sum counter 223i) is provided,
The time passage effect executing means,
A gaming machine D6, characterized in that the time passage effect is executed based on the determination result of the passage determining means.

  According to the gaming machine D6, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D0 to D5. That is, in the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, the game ball is configured to be able to pass to the special area, and the passage switching means allows the game ball to pass through the special area, and it is difficult or difficult for the game ball to pass. It is possible to switch to a difficult-to-pass state. Further, when the game ball passes through the special area, the second advantageous state means can generate the second advantageous state advantageous to the player. Here, the game ball inflow determination means determines the timing at which the game ball can flow into the passage switching means, and the passage determination means determines the timing at which the game ball can flow into the passage switching means determined by the game ball inflow means. The passage switching means determines whether or not the special area is in the passable state. Here, the time passage effect execution unit executes the time passage effect based on the determination result of the passage determination unit. As a result, it is possible to prevent discrepancies from occurring in the effect contents of the time-lapse effect that is executed based on whether or not the game ball passes through the special area, and to execute an accurate effect to achieve the game. There is an effect that the interest can be improved.

In gaming machine D6,
The second variable ball entering means (for example, the V winning device 72) that has the special area and can be changed to a third state in which the game ball is difficult or inaccessible and a fourth state in which the game ball can enter When,
By using the determination result by the determination means, in the advantageous state, the second variable ball entering state changing means (for example, the V winning device opening / closing plate 72a) that can bring the second variable ball entering means into the fourth state. ,,
The passage determination means,
When the second variable ball entering state changing unit is in the fourth state by the second variable ball entering state changing unit, the passage switching unit determines whether or not the special area is in the passable state. A gaming machine D7 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine D7, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6. That is, the second variable ball entering means is provided which has a special area and is changeable between a third state in which the game ball is hard to enter or inaccessible and a fourth state in which the game ball can enter, and which is determined by the determining means. By using the determination result, the second variable ball entering state changing means can bring the second variable ball entering means into the second state in the advantageous state. Whether the special area is in the passable state by the passage switching unit when the second variable ball entering state changing unit puts the second variable ball entering unit in the fourth state by the passage judging unit To be determined. That is, when the second variable ball entering means is in the fourth state in which the game ball can enter using the determination result of the determining means, the special area provided in the second variable ball entering means is the game ball. It is determined whether or not the vehicle is in a passable state, and the time lapse effect is executed based on the determination result. As a result, it is possible to prevent discrepancies from occurring in the effect contents of the time-lapse effect that is executed based on whether or not the game ball passes through the special area, and to execute an accurate effect to achieve the game. There is an effect that the interest can be improved.

<Group E: Gase production, main production, and correction of contents of Gase production when the conditions for main production are achieved during Gase production>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is shot toward a game area provided in a game board, and the game ball enters a ball entrance provided in the game area. Based on the winning or failing lottery, when the winning or losing lottery wins an advantageous state such as a win, the normally closed variable entrance means is opened so that a predetermined game value is given to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148264).

  However, in the above gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The invention of the group E is made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

An information acquisition unit (for example, the first start port 64) that acquires predetermined information upon the establishment of a predetermined start condition,
A storage unit (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d) that stores the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
Determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means (for example, MPU 201),
By using the determination result by the determination means, a dynamic display execution means (for example, the display control device 114) that causes the display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) to dynamically display the identification information,
Advantageous state means (for example, jackpot processing (S104)) that brings an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, jackpot state) when a predetermined display result (for example, "jackpot display") appears in the dynamic display. ), And in a gaming machine equipped with
In the dynamic display, a continuous production execution means capable of executing a continuous production (for example, “V winning chance production”) that is continuously executed over a plurality of the dynamic displays,
When the predetermined display result does not appear, during execution of the continuous effect, the predetermined display result is obtained based on the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition unit and stored in the storage unit. When it is possible to appear, effect changing means configured to be able to change the content of the continuous effect being executed (for example, a V opening jackpot is generated based on a start winning generated during the execution of the “Gase V winning chance effect”). In this case, the game machine E0 is provided, which is an extension of the "execution of winning V winning opportunity" being executed).

  According to the gaming machine E0, the predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored in the storage means with a predetermined number as an upper limit. . Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and by using the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information performed on the display means. To be done. When a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display, the advantageous state means brings an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Here, in the dynamic display, the continuous production execution means can execute continuous production continuously executed over a plurality of dynamic displays, and is executed when a predetermined display result does not appear. When the predetermined lottery result can appear based on the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means and stored in the storage means during the execution of the continuous effect, the effect changing means changes the content of the continuous effect being executed. Configured to be possible. As a result, even when the predetermined information that displays the predetermined display result is acquired during the execution of the continuous effect that is being executed across a plurality of dynamic displays, the content of the continuous effect being executed is changed. As a result, it is possible to achieve consistency in the effect contents. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game by executing the appropriate production while enriching the variation of the game by the continuous production.

In the gaming machine E0,
The continuous effect executing means,
A continuous effect lottery means (for example, a V winning suggestion lottery counter 223e) that draws whether or not to execute the continuous effect with a predetermined probability,
As a result of the lottery by the continuous production lottery means, when the execution of the continuous production is won for the specific dynamic display, at least the specific dynamic display won for the execution of the continuous production is started. Continuous production continuation means for continuing the continuous production until before (for example, the "V winning chance production" is executed until the target variable production is started),
The effect changing means,
When the predetermined display result does not appear, during execution of the continuous effect, the predetermined display result is obtained based on the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition unit and stored in the storage unit. When it can appear, before the dynamic display capable of displaying the predetermined display result is started, a performance extending means for extending the continuous performance (for example, “additional display” of “V winning chance performance”). And a gaming machine E1.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E0. That is, the continuous effect lottery means provided in the continuous effect execution means performs a lottery to determine whether or not the continuous effect is executed with a predetermined probability. When the execution of the effect is won, the continuous effect continuation unit continues the continuous effect at least before the start of the specific dynamic display that is won for the execution of the continuous effect. When the predetermined display result can appear based on the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition unit and stored in the storage unit during the execution of the continuous effect executed when the predetermined display result does not appear. In addition, the continuous effect is extended by the effect extending means provided in the effect changing means until the dynamic display capable of displaying the predetermined display result is started. As a result, the predetermined information for displaying the predetermined display result is acquired during the execution of the continuous effect that is executed over the plurality of dynamic displays based on the dynamic display that cannot display the predetermined display result. Even in such a case, the content of the continuous effect being executed can be extended and executed until before the dynamic display in which a predetermined display result can appear can be started. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game by executing the appropriate production while enriching the variations of the dynamic display by the continuous production over a plurality of dynamic displays.

In the gaming machine E0 or E1,
The continuous effect executing means,
In a plurality of continuous dynamic displays, a continuous production of a time passage effect (for example, “remaining time display” of “V winning chance production”) that suggests the passage of time until a predetermined timing in any one of the dynamic displays. A gaming machine E2, characterized in that the gaming machine E2 is provided with:

  The gaming machine E2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E0 or E1. That is, the time-lapse effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means executes, as a continuous effect, a time-lapse effect indicating a time elapsed until a predetermined timing in any of the dynamic displays in a plurality of continuous dynamic displays. To be done. As a result, even when the time lapse effect is performed over a plurality of dynamic displays for which the predetermined display result cannot be derived, when the dynamic display for deriving the predetermined display result is acquired, it is being executed. It is possible to change the contents of the time lapse effect of (1) to change the contents of which the predetermined display result cannot be derived to the contents of which the predetermined display result can be derived so as to maintain the consistency of the effect contents. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game by executing the appropriate production while enriching the variations of the dynamic display by the continuous production over a plurality of dynamic displays.

In any of the gaming machines E0 to E2,
In the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, a special area through which the game ball can pass (for example, the V winning opening 74a),
Passage switching means (for example, a distribution plate 73a) for switching the special area between a passable state in which the game ball can pass and a passable state in which the game ball cannot pass or cannot pass easily,
Second advantageous state means (for example, probability variation transition flag 203j) capable of generating a second advantageous state (for example, "probability variation state") advantageous to the player when the game ball passes through the special area,
A game ball inflow determination means (for example, a hold variation time integration counter 223g and an execution variation time count counter 223h) that determines the timing at which a game ball can flow into the passage switching means.
Passing determination means for determining whether or not the special area is in the passable state by the passage switching means at the timing when the game balls can flow into the passage switching means determined by the game ball inflow determining means (For example, a sub-V drive timer 223d and a summing counter 223i),
The continuous effect executing means,
A gaming machine E3, wherein the continuous effect is executed based on the determination result of the passage determining means.

  The gaming machine E3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E0 to E2. That is, in the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, the game ball is configured to be able to pass to the special area, and the passage switching means allows the game ball to pass through the special area, and it is difficult or difficult for the game ball to pass. It is possible to switch to a difficult-to-pass state. Further, when the game ball passes through the special area, the second advantageous state means can generate the second advantageous state advantageous to the player. Here, the game ball inflow determination means determines the timing at which the game ball can flow into the passage switching means, and the passage determination means determines the timing at which the game ball can flow into the passage switching means determined by the game ball inflow means. The passage switching means determines whether or not the special area is in the passable state. Then, the continuous effect execution unit executes the continuous effect based on the determination result of the passage determination unit. As a result, it is possible to change the content of the continuous effect executed based on whether or not the game ball passes through the special area, and obtain consistency of the effect content. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game by executing the appropriate production while enriching the variation of the game by the continuous production.

In any of the gaming machines E3,
A second variable ball entering means (for example, a V winning device 72) that has the special area and can be changed between a first state in which a game ball is hard to enter or an inaccessible state and a second state in which a game ball can enter. When,
By using the determination result of the determination means, in the advantageous state, the second variable ball entering state changing means (for example, the V winning device opening / closing plate 72a) that can bring the second variable ball entering means into the second state. ,,
The passage determination means,
When the second variable ball entering state changing unit is in the second state, the passage switching unit determines whether the special area is in the passable state. A gaming machine E4 characterized by being.

  The gaming machine E4 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3. That is, a second variable ball entering means is provided which has a special area and is capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball is hard to enter or inaccessible and a second state in which a game ball can enter, and which is determined by the determining means. By using the determination result, the second variable ball entering state changing means can bring the second variable ball entering means into the second state in the advantageous state. Then, by the passage determination means, when the second variable ball entering means is in the second state by the second variable ball entering state changing means, whether or not the special area is in the passable state by the passage switching means. To be determined. That is, when the second variable ball entering means is in the second state in which the game ball can enter using the determination result of the determining means, the special area provided in the second variable ball entering means is the game ball. It is determined whether or not the vehicle is in a passable state, and the continuous effect is executed based on the determination result. As a result, it is possible to change the content of the continuous effect executed based on whether or not the game ball passes through the special area, and obtain consistency of the effect content. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game by executing the appropriate production while enriching the variation of the game by the continuous production.

<Group F: Notification of large-scale condominiums before the big jackpot>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is shot toward a game area provided in a game board, and the game ball enters a ball entrance provided in the game area. Based on the winning or failing lottery, if the winning or losing lottery is won in an advantageous state such as winning, the normally closed variable entrance means is opened so that a predetermined game value is given to the player. Is configured.

  In such a gaming machine, a distribution mechanism for allocating whether or not the game ball flows down to the winning area into which the game ball can flow is arranged, and the game ball distributed by the distribution mechanism flows into the winning area. There is a pachinko machine that generates a gaming value that is advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2017-148264)).

  However, in the above gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The invention of group F is made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

Launching means for launching a game ball (eg, ball launching unit 112a),
Ball entry means (for example, the first starting port 64) into which the game ball shot by the launch means can enter,
Information acquisition means (for example, S209 of the start winning process (S109)) that acquires predetermined information due to the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering means,
A storage unit (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d) that stores the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
Determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means (for example, MPU 201),
A variable ball entering means (for example, a variable winning device 65) capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball is hard to enter or an inaccessible state and a second state in which a game ball can enter.
Advantageous state means (for example, jackpot processing (S104)) that brings the variable ball entering means into an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot state) by using the determination result of the determination means. In gaming machines,
In the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, a special area through which the game ball can pass (for example, the V winning opening 74a),
Passage switching means (for example, a distribution plate 73a) for switching the special area between a passable state in which the game ball can pass and a passable state in which the game ball cannot pass or cannot pass easily,
Second advantageous state means (for example, probability variation transition flag 203j) capable of generating a second advantageous state (for example, "probability variation state") advantageous to the player when the game ball passes through the special area,
The second variable ball entering means (for example, the V winning device 72) that has the special area and can be changed to a third state in which the game ball is difficult or inaccessible and a fourth state in which the game ball can enter When,
By using the determination result by the determination means, in the advantageous state, the second variable ball entering state changing means (for example, the V winning device opening / closing plate 72a) that can bring the second variable ball entering means into the fourth state. ,,
The advantageous state means is
In the advantageous state in which the second variable ball entering means is in the fourth state, a fixed period execution means for executing a period from the start to the end of the advantageous state in a fixed period (for example, opening time for jackpot, one round) The time required for, the interval time, and the ending time are each fixed seconds),
A game ball inflow determination means (for example, a hold variation time integration counter 223g and an execution variation time count counter 223h) that determines the timing at which a game ball can flow into the passage switching means.
Passing determination means for determining whether or not the special area is in the passable state by the passage switching means at the timing when the game balls can flow into the passage switching means determined by the game ball inflow determining means (For example, the sub-V drive timer 223d and the summing counter 223i),
Pre-determination means (for example, prefetch determination processing (S1208)) that determines whether or not the advantageous state based on the execution means for the certain period is executed in each of the plurality of predetermined information stored in the storage means. And the passage determining means includes
In each of the plurality of pieces of the predetermined information stored in the storage unit, in the case where the advance determination unit determines that the advantageous state based on the fixed period execution unit is executed, A plurality of passage determining means for determining whether or not the game ball passes through the special area,
A passage determination result notifying unit which notifies the determination result of the plural passage determination unit before the advantageous state based on the predetermined period execution unit which is executed first based on the predetermined information stored in the storage unit is started. And a gaming machine F0.

  According to the gaming machine F0, the game ball is launched by the launching means, and the game ball launched by this launching means is configured to enter the ball entering means, and the game ball enters the ball entering means. Based on this, the information acquiring means acquires the predetermined information. Then, with the predetermined number as the upper limit, the storage unit stores the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition information unit. Then, the determining means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquiring means, and the variable entry is changeable between a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or inaccessible and a second state in which the game ball is enterable. The ball means is provided, and by using the determination result by the determination means, the advantageous state means brings the variable ball entering means into the advantageous state in which it can be in the second state. Here, in the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, the game ball is configured to be able to pass to the special area, and the passage switching means allows the game ball to pass through the special area and the game ball is difficult to pass or It is switched to a difficult-to-pass state where it cannot pass. Further, when the game ball passes through the special area, the second advantageous state means can generate the second advantageous state advantageous to the player. Here, a second variable ball entering means is provided which has a special area and can be changed to a third state in which the game ball is hard to enter or inaccessible and a fourth state in which the game ball can enter, and a determining means. By using the determination result according to, the second variable ball entering state changing means can bring the second variable ball entering means into the fourth state in the advantageous state. Then, in the advantageous state in which the second variable ball entering means is in the fourth state, the fixed period execution means provided in the advantageous state means executes the period from the start to the end of the advantageous state in a fixed period. Further, the game ball inflow determination means determines the timing at which the game ball can flow into the passage switching means, and the passage determination means determines the timing at which the game ball can flow into the passage switching means determined by the game ball inflow means. The passage switching unit determines whether or not the special area is in the passable state. Here, in each of the plurality of predetermined information stored in the storage unit, the pre-determination unit determines whether or not the advantageous state based on the execution unit for a certain period is executed. Then, in each of the plurality of predetermined information stored in the storage means, when the advance determination means determines that the advantageous state based on the execution means for a certain period is to be executed, the plurality of passage determination means provided in the passage determination means Thus, it is determined whether or not the game ball passes through the special area in each advantageous state. Then, by the passage determination result notifying means also provided in the passage determining means, the determination result of the multiple passage determining means is changed to an advantageous state based on the predetermined time execution means which is executed first based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means. It will be notified before it starts. That is, while the second variable ball entering means having the special area executes the advantageous state of being in the fourth state for a certain period, at the timing when the game ball can flow into the passage switching means, the special area is in the passable state or the passing state. By determining whether it is in a difficult state, it is determined whether or not the game ball can pass through the special area in each of the plurality of advantageous states, and the determination result is given to the player before the previous advantageous state is started. Can be notified. Thereby, by notifying whether or not the game ball passes through the special area in each of the plurality of advantageous states before the start of the preceding advantageous state, the player can generate the second advantageous state during each advantageous state. It is possible to recognize whether or not to obtain it, and for example, there is an effect that the enjoyment of the game can be improved by obtaining an uplifting feeling by recognizing the occurrence of consecutive second advantageous states.

In the gaming machine F0,
The passage switching means,
A gaming machine F1 characterized by switching between the passable state and the difficult-to-pass state of the special area at a constant cycle (for example, "10 seconds") that is not linked to the timing of deriving the determination result by the determination means.

  The gaming machine F1 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F0. That is, the passage switching means switches between the passable state and the passage difficult state of the special area at a constant cycle that is not linked to the timing of deriving the determination result by the determination means. That is, whether or not the game ball can pass to the special area is switched at a fixed cycle that does not interlock with the occurrence of an advantageous state that can occur by using the determination result of the determination means, and the game ball inflow means causes the passage switching means to pass. The timing at which the game ball can flow in is determined.

  Conventionally, when the special area is configured so as not to be linked with the timing of deriving the determination result by the determination means, the generation timing of the advantageous state using the determination result of the determination means capable of generating the advantageous state and the second advantageous state are generated. Since the possibility of passing the game ball to the special area is not linked, even if the advantageous state is generated by the determination result by the determination means, whether or not the second advantageous state can be generated in the advantageous state. Could not be notified according to the determination result of the determination means.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine F1, the timing at which the game balls can flow into the passage switching means is grasped, and the timing at which the game balls can flow into the passage switching means is linked with the timing at which the determination result is derived by the determination means. It is determined whether or not the game ball can pass through the special area that can be switched at a constant cycle without doing so, and it is determined whether or not the game ball can pass through the special area in the advantageous state. The player can be notified before the advantageous state is started. Thus, by notifying whether or not the game ball passes through the special area before the start of the advantageous state based on the determination result of the determination means, the player can generate the second advantageous state during the advantageous state. It is possible to recognize whether or not it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine F0 or F1,
The passage determination means,
When the second variable ball entering state changing unit is in the fourth state by the second variable ball entering state changing unit, the passage switching unit determines whether or not the special area is in the passable state. A gaming machine F2 characterized by:

  The gaming machine F2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F0 or F1. That is, whether or not the special area is in the passable state by the passage switching unit when the second variable ball-in state changing unit is in the fourth state by the passage determining unit To be determined. That is, when the second variable ball entering means is in the fourth state in which the game ball can enter using the determination result of the determining means, the special area provided in the second variable ball entering means is the game ball. It is possible to determine whether or not the vehicle is in a passable state, and to notify the player of the determination result before the advantageous state is started. Thereby, by notifying whether or not the game ball passes the special area in each of the plurality of advantageous states before the start of the preceding advantageous state, the player can generate the second advantageous state during each advantageous state. There is an effect that it is possible to recognize whether or not to obtain the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F2,
The game ball inflow determination means,
Period determining means (for example, pending variation time integration counter 223g and execution variation time counting counter 223h) for determining the period until the second variable ball entering means becomes the fourth state,
The passage determination means,
A gaming machine F3, wherein when the period is determined by the period determining means, it is determined whether or not the special area is in the passable state.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F0 to F2, the following effects are produced. That is, the period determining means provided in the game ball inflow determining means determines the period until the second variable ball entering means is in the fourth state. Then, the passage determination means determines whether or not the special area is in the passable state when the period determined by the period determination means has elapsed. Thereby, by notifying whether or not the game ball passes the special area in each of the plurality of advantageous states before the start of the preceding advantageous state, the player can generate the second advantageous state during each advantageous state. There is an effect that it is possible to recognize whether or not to obtain the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine F3,
By using the determination result by the determination unit, a dynamic display execution unit (for example, the display control device 114) that executes the dynamic display of the identification information performed on the display unit (for example, the third symbol display device 81). ,
In the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, an introduction effect execution means (for example, an opening command) that executes an introduction effect (for example, an opening effect) until the second variable ball entering means is brought into the fourth state. Prepare,
The period determination means,
The remaining time of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means, the execution time of the dynamic display based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and the introduction effect of the introduction effect execution means. A game machine F4 characterized by determining execution time.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, the following effects are achieved. That is, by using the determination result by the determination unit, the dynamic display execution unit executes the dynamic display of the identification information performed on the display unit. Further, in the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, the introduction effect execution means executes the introduction effect until the second variable ball entering means is brought into the fourth state. Here, the remaining time of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means, the execution time of the dynamic display based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and the execution time of the introduction effect by the introduction effect execution means are The period determination means determines. That is, the remaining time of the dynamic display that is being executed, the stored execution time of the dynamic display, and the execution time of the introduction effect that is executed until the second variable ball entering means in the advantageous state becomes the fourth state. When the second variable ball entering means is in the fourth state, it is determined whether or not the special area is in the passable state. Thereby, by notifying whether or not the game ball passes the special area in each of the plurality of advantageous states before the start of the preceding advantageous state, the player can generate the second advantageous state during each advantageous state. There is an effect that it is possible to recognize whether or not to obtain the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine F4,
A game characterized by comprising period changing means (for example, changing from a normal effect mode to a shortened effect mode) for changing a predetermined period until the second variable ball entering means is in the fourth state. Machine F5.

  The gaming machine F5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F4. That is, the period changing device changes the predetermined period until the second variable ball entering device is in the fourth state. . As a result, the passage determination result notifying unit notifies the determination result of whether or not the game ball passes through the special area before the start of the advantageous state, and then the predetermined value until the second variable ball entering unit becomes the fourth state. By arranging that the period can be changed, there is an effect that a variety of games can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machine F5,
The period changing means,
When the number of the predetermined information stored in the storage means is a predetermined first predetermined value (for example, “4”), the dynamic display executed when the number is less than the first predetermined value. A gaming machine F6 characterized by comprising shortening execution means (for example, a "normal reach (shortening)" effect mode) for shortening and executing the dynamic display execution time.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F5, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the number of the predetermined information stored in the storage means is the predetermined first predetermined value, the dynamic execution is performed by the shortening execution means provided in the period changing means when it is less than the first predetermined value. The execution time of the dynamic display is shorter than that of the display. This makes it possible to change the period until the second variable ball entering means is brought into the fourth state, according to the number of stored predetermined information. Therefore, after the result of the determination of whether or not the game ball passes through the special area before the start of the advantageous state is notified by the passage determination result notification means, the player shoots the game ball, whereby the second variable ball is entered. By configuring the period until the means becomes the fourth state to be changeable according to the game mode (launch mode) of the player, there is an effect that the variety of games can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

<Group G: Version compatible with distribution mechanism in game area>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is shot toward a game area provided in a game board, and the game ball enters a ball entering means provided in the game area. Based on the winning or failing lottery, if the winning or losing lottery is won in an advantageous state such as winning, the normally closed variable entrance means is opened so that a predetermined game value is given to the player. Is configured.

  In such a gaming machine, a distribution mechanism for allocating whether or not the game ball flows down to the winning area into which the game ball can flow is arranged, and the game ball distributed by the distribution mechanism flows into the winning area. There is a pachinko machine that generates a gaming value that is advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2017-148264)).

  However, in the above gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The invention of the group G is made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

Launching means for launching a game ball (eg, ball launching unit 112a),
Ball entry means (for example, the first starting port 64) into which the game ball shot by the launch means can enter,
An operation means (for example, a distribution plate 73a) that can perform a certain operation from a predetermined operation start timing and can act on the flow-down aspect of the game ball emitted from the emission means,
In a predetermined game state, an operation flow-down means that allows the game ball to flow down toward the operation means (for example, opening of the variable winning device 65 at the time of a big hit),
Information acquisition means (for example, S209 of the start winning process (S109)) that acquires predetermined information due to the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering means,
Determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means (for example, MPU 201),
By using the determination result of the determination means, a dynamic display execution means (for example, the display control device 114) that dynamically displays the identification information on the display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81),
When the predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition unit during execution of the dynamic display on the display unit, a storage unit that stores the predetermined information with a predetermined number as an upper limit (for example, a first holding ball storage) Area 203d)
According to the number of the predetermined information stored in the storage means, different execution time of the dynamic display can be set for the same determination result by the determination means (for example, "normal reach ( “Normal” ”production mode and“ Normal reach (shortened) ”production mode)
Dynamic time determining means (for example, variation start processing (S310)) that determines the execution time of the dynamic display before the dynamic display is started by the dynamic display executing means,
A special game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined display result (for example, "big hit display") appears in the dynamic display executed according to the execution time determined by the dynamic time determination means. In a gaming machine provided with special game starting means for starting (for example, jackpot processing (S104)),
The operating means is
A first state in which the game ball can flow down to a predetermined first path (for example, right path 75) in the predetermined game state, and a second path (for example, left path 74) that is more advantageous to the player than the first path. The second state that allows the game ball to flow down to, and is configured to be changeable to
Depending on the timing when the special game state is started, there are a case where the operating means is in the first state and a case where the operating means is in the second state.
A gaming machine G0, wherein the state of the operating means can be identified before the start of the special game state.

  According to the gaming machine G0, the game means is launched by the launching means, and the game ball launched by the launching means can enter the ball entering means. Further, the operation means can perform a certain operation from a predetermined operation start timing, and can act on the flow-down mode of the game ball emitted from the launching means, and the operation flow-down means allows the operation means in a predetermined game state. A game ball is configured to flow down toward. Then, the information acquiring unit acquires the predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entering unit, and the predetermined information acquired by the information acquiring unit is determined by the determining unit. Here, by using the determination result of the determination means, the dynamic display execution means performs the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means, and the predetermined information is determined by the information acquisition means during the dynamic display on the display means. When the information is acquired, the storage unit stores the predetermined information with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Further, according to the number of predetermined information stored in the storage means, the execution time setting means is configured to be able to set different dynamic display execution times for the same determination result by the determination means. The execution time of the dynamic display is determined by the determining means before the dynamic display is started by the dynamic display executing means. Then, when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed according to the execution time determined by the dynamic time determination means, the special game starting means starts the special game state advantageous to the player. To be done. Here, the operating means is a first state in which the game ball can flow down to a predetermined first path in a predetermined game state, and a second state in which the game ball can flow down to a second path that is more advantageous to the player than the first path. It is configured to be able to change to a state. Further, depending on the start timing of the special game state, there are cases where the operating means is in the first state and in the second state. Here, the state of the operating means can be identified before the start of the special game state. As a result, a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display in which whether the operating means is in the first state or the second state can be set to different execution times with respect to the same determination result by the determination means. By making it identifiable before the start of the special game state that is started, it is possible to identify whether or not the game ball flows into the second path that is advantageous to the player in the state before the special game state is started. It becomes possible to do. As a result, the player can obtain an uplifting feeling by recognizing a situation that is advantageous to the player before the special game state is started, and thus there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved. .. Further, since the execution time of the dynamic display executed for the same determination result by the determination means may change according to the number of predetermined information stored in the storage means, it is obtained according to the game mode of the player. By changing the storage number of the predetermined information, it is possible to change whether or not the game ball flows into the second route according to the player's intention (game mode). As a result, by recognizing the operation of the operation means, the player can aim for the inflow of the game ball to the second route, which is advantageous for the player, before the start of the special game state, and thus the variation of the game There is an effect that it can be abundant and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  As the "predetermined operation start timing", for example, the timing when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the timing when the predetermined initialization processing ends and the normal processing starts, and the predetermined dynamic display is started. The timing, the timing when a specific effect is started in a predetermined dynamic display, the timing when a special game state is started, the timing when a specific round of the special game state is started, and the like are exemplified.

In the gaming machine G0,
During execution of the dynamic display, display content changing means (for example, "V winning chance effect" that can change the predetermined display content according to the timing when the special game state is started and the state of the operating means). )), The gaming machine G1.

  The gaming machine G1 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G0. That is, the display content changing means can change the predetermined display content according to the timing when the special game state is started and the state of the operating means during the execution of the dynamic display. That is, the predetermined display content that can be changed according to the start timing of the special game state and the state of the operating means allows the player to recognize the state of the operating means before the start of the special game state. As a result, before the start of the special game state, it is possible to let the player recognize whether or not the game ball flows into the second path, which is advantageous for the player, by changing the predetermined display content. .. As a result, it is possible for the player to improve the interest of the game by obtaining an uplifting feeling by recognizing a situation that is advantageous to the player before the special game state is started. There is.

In the gaming machine G0 or G1,
The operating means is
A gaming machine G2, wherein the first state and the second state are switched at a constant cycle (for example, "10 seconds").

  The gaming machine G2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G0 or G1. That is, the operating means switches between the first state and the second state at a constant cycle. The execution time of the dynamic display is different from the fixed cycle, and one execution time is set from among a plurality of execution times provided in advance, according to the judgment result by the judgment means. Therefore, the start of the special game state that may occur after the set execution time has elapsed and the operation means that is switched from the first state to the second state or from the second state to the first state in a constant cycle are not interlocked or It is hard to do.

  Conventionally, when the timing at which the game ball can flow into the second path is configured not to be linked to the execution of the dynamic display, the game status under execution using the determination result by the determination means that can generate the special game state. And, even if a special game state occurs after the execution of the dynamic display, since whether or not the game ball can flow into the second route, which is advantageous for the player due to the flow of the game ball, does not interlock. , It was not possible to identify whether or not the game ball flows into the second route before the start of the special game state.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine G2, whether or not the game ball is in the second state in which the game ball can pass to the second path which is not linked with the dynamic display or which can be switched at a constant cycle that is difficult to start is started in the special game state. Be identifiable before. Thereby, by instructing the player whether or not the game ball passes through the second route before the start of the special game state, the player can enter the game ball into the second route, which is advantageous for the player. There is an effect that it is possible to recognize whether or not it becomes, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines G0 to G2,
The execution time setting means,
When the number of the predetermined information stored in the storage unit is a predetermined first predetermined value (for example, “4”), the dynamic display that is easily selected when the number is less than the first predetermined value. A selection changing unit (for example, a “normal reach (shortening)” effect mode) for easily selecting a second execution time different from the first execution time is provided,
When the second execution time of the dynamic display is selected by the selection changing means in the predetermined gaming state, the second execution time is compared to when the first execution time of the dynamic display is selected. The result of inflow of game balls to the route may change (for example, when the normal effect mode is changed to the shortened effect mode, the V winning opening 74a is won).
A gaming machine G3 characterized in that.

  The gaming machine G3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G0 to G2. That is, when the number of pieces of predetermined information stored in the storage means is a predetermined first predetermined value, the selection change means provided in the execution time setting means makes it easier to select when the number is less than the first predetermined value. The second execution time different from the first execution time of the dynamic display is easily selected. Then, when the second execution time of the dynamic display is selected by the selection changing means in the predetermined game state, compared to when the first execution time of the dynamic display is selected, the game ball to the second route. Is configured so that the inflow result of can be changed. Thereby, the result of the inflow of the game balls into the second route can be changed depending on whether the execution time of the dynamic display is the first execution time or the second execution time, and the variations of the game are rich. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G3,
The fixed period is
A gaming machine G4, which is the same as the difference between the first execution time and the second execution time.

  The gaming machine G4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3. That is, the fixed period in which whether or not the game ball flows into the second path is switched, and the difference between the first execution time and the second execution time is the same. That is, depending on whether the execution time of the dynamic display is the first execution time or the second execution time, whether or not the game ball flows into the second path can be made different. As a result, the effect that the inflow result of the game balls into the second route can be changed according to the execution time of the dynamic display, the variations of the game can be enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved. is there.

In the gaming machine G3 or G4,
Based on the state of the operating means, a firing suggesting means for suggesting the launching of a game ball that can flow into the second path before the start of the special gaming state (for example, “launch of“ V winning chance production ”) Gaming machine G5, characterized in that it has a promotion suggestion ").

  The gaming machine G5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3 or G4. That is, the firing suggesting means suggests, based on the state of the operating means, the firing of the game ball that can flow into the second path before the start of the special game state. As a result, the result of the inflow of the game balls into the second route can be changed depending on whether or not the launch of the game balls that can flow into the second route is suggested, and the variations of the game are enriched. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G5,
The launch suggestion means is
In the state of the operation means at the specific timing, when the game ball does not flow into the second path, it is provided with a launch instruction means (for example, "shooting promotion suggestion") for instructing to launch the game ball. Gaming machine G6.

  The gaming machine G6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G5. That is, when the game ball does not flow into the second path in the state of the operating means at the specific timing, the launch instruction means provided in the launch suggesting means instructs the launch of the game ball. As a result, even if the game ball does not flow into the second route at first, the dynamic display is stored in the first predetermined value or more and the execution time of the dynamic display is changed, so that the game ball flows into the second route. It can be done. Therefore, by following the instruction to fire the game ball from the firing instruction means, it is possible to change the inflow result of the game ball to the second route, to enrich the variations of the game, and to improve the interest of the game. effective.

In the gaming machine G5 or G6,
The launch suggestion means is
When the game ball flows into the second path in the state of the operation means at the specific timing, a firing stop instruction means (for example, "fire stop suggestion") for instructing to stop the firing of the game ball is provided. A gaming machine G7 characterized in that.

  The gaming machine G7 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G5 or G6. That is, when the game ball flows into the second path in the state of the operating means at the specific timing, the stop of the game ball is instructed by the stop firing instruction means provided in the firing suggesting means. That is, when the game ball flows into the second path in the state of the operating means at the specific timing, the player is instructed to stop the firing of the game ball and the number of the predetermined information stored in the storage means is the predetermined number. By setting the value not to be 1 predetermined value, it is possible to prevent the execution time of the dynamic display from being changed. Thereby, when the game ball can be flowed into the second route at the specific timing at the beginning, the game ball can be flowed into the second route by maintaining the state. Therefore, by following the instruction to stop the shooting of the game ball by the shooting stop instruction means, the game ball can flow into the second path, the variations of the game can be enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the configuration of any one of the gaming machines A0 to A6 is limited to any one of the gaming machines B0 to B6, C0 to C7, D0 to D7, E0 to E4, F0 to F6, G0 to G7. The configuration described above may be applied.

  The configuration of any one of the gaming machines B0 to B6 is limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A6, C0 to C7, D0 to D7, E0 to E4, F0 to F6, G0 to G7. The configuration described above may be applied.

  Note that the configuration is limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A6, B0 to B6, D0 to D7, E0 to E4, F0 to F6, and G0 to G7 with respect to the configuration of any of the gaming machines C0 to C7. The configuration described above may be applied.

  It should be noted that the configuration of any one of the gaming machines D0 to D7 is limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A6, B0 to B6, C0 to C7, E0 to E4, F0 to F6, G0 to G7. The configuration described above may be applied.

  It should be noted that the configuration of any one of the gaming machines E0 to E4 is limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A6, B0 to B6, C0 to C7, D0 to D7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7. The configuration described above may be applied.

  In addition, the configuration of any one of the gaming machines F0 to F6 is limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A6, B0 to B6, C0 to C7, D0 to D7, E0 to E4, G0 to G7. The configuration described above may be applied.

  In addition, the configuration of any one of the gaming machines G0 to G7 is limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A6, B0 to B6, C0 to C7, D0 to D7, E0 to E4, and F0 to F6. The configuration described above may be applied.

  In these cases, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

  Any one of the gaming machines A0 to A6, B0 to B6, C0 to C7, D0 to D7, E0 to E4, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. .. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

  Any one of the gaming machines A0 to A6, B0 to B6, C0 to C7, D0 to D7, E0 to E4, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. X2. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is moved to an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (major winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

  Any of the gaming machines A0 to A6, B0 to B6, C0 to C7, D0 to D7, E0 to E4, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, where the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine X3 characterized in that. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operating lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
64 First starting opening (part of the ball entering means, part of the first ball entering means)
65 Variable winning device (part of variable ball means, part of motion flow-down means)
71 2nd starting opening (a part of 2nd entrance means)
71a Normal electric power (part of movable means)
72 V winning device (part of the second variable ball means)
72a V winning / discharging device opening / closing plate (a part of second variable ball state changing means)
73a Distribution plate (part of passage switching means, part of operation means)
74 Left route (part of the second route)
74a V prize hole (part of special area, part of predetermined area)
75 Right Route (Part of Route 1)
81 3rd symbol display device (a part of display means)
112a Ball launching unit (part of launching means)
114 Display control device (part of dynamic display executing means, part of dynamic display executing means)
201 MPU (a part of judgment means)
203d First reserved sphere storage area (part of storage means, part of first storage means)
203e Second reserved ball storage area (part of storage means, part of second storage means)
203j Probability change transition flag (part of second advantageous state means)
223d Sub V drive timer (a part of passage determining means)
223e V prize suggestion lottery counter (part of continuous production lottery means)
223g Pending variable time integration counter (part of game ball inflow determination means, part of period determination means)
223h Execution variable time counting counter (a part of the game ball inflow determination means, a part of the period determination means)
223i total counter (a part of passage determining means)
S104 jackpot processing (part of advantageous state means, part of special game starting means)
S209 (part of information acquisition means, part of first information acquisition means, part of second information acquisition means)
S310 Variation start processing (part of dynamic time determination means)

Claims (3)

A launching means for launching a game ball,
A ball entering means capable of entering a game ball shot by the launching means,
Information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the ball entering means,
Determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means,
By using the determination result by the determination means, a dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information performed in the display means,
A memory for storing the predetermined information with a predetermined number as an upper limit when the predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means while the dynamic display is being executed on the display means by the dynamic display execution means. Means and
A second execution time different from the first execution time of the dynamic display that is easily selected when the number of the predetermined information stored in the storage unit is a predetermined first predetermined value and is less than the first predetermined value. Selection change means that makes it easy to select the execution time,
A variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or an inaccessible state and a second state in which a game ball can enter.
In a gaming machine provided with an advantageous state means for bringing the variable ball entering means into an advantageous state capable of being in the second state when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display,
In the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, a special area through which the game ball can pass,
Passing switching means for switching the special area to a passable state in which the game ball can pass, and a passable state in which the game ball cannot pass or cannot pass easily,
A second advantageous state means capable of generating a second advantageous state advantageous to the player when the game ball passes through the special area,
When the second execution time of the dynamic display is selected by the selection changing means, compared to when the first execution time of the dynamic display is selected, passage of the game ball to the special area A gaming machine characterized by changing results. The passage switching means,
Switching the passable state and the pass difficult state of the special area in a fixed period not linked to the execution of the dynamic display,
The certain period,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the difference between the first execution time and the second execution time is the same. A second variable ball entering means having the special area and capable of changing to a third state in which a game ball is hard to enter or inaccessible, and a fourth state in which a game ball can enter,
A second variable ball entering state changing means that can bring the second variable ball entering means into the fourth state in the advantageous state by using the result of the determination by the determining means;
The remaining time of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means, the execution time of the dynamic display based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and the second variable ball in the advantageous state. Time counting means for counting the first state time until the means becomes the fourth state,
Passage determination means for determining whether or not the special area is in the passable state when the remaining time counted by the time counting means, the execution time, and the first state time have elapsed,
The game machine according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising: a passage determination result notifying unit that notifies a determination result of the passage determining unit.

Images